Fibre Channel Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fibre Channel Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
©1997–2004, Seagate Technology LLC All rights reserved
Publication number: 77767496, Rev. D
February 2004
Seagate and Seagate Technology are registered trademarks of Seagate Technology LLC.
SeaTools, SeaFONE, SeaBOARD, SeaTDD, and the Wave logo are either registered trade-
marks or trademarks of Seagate Technology LLC. Other product names are registered trade-
marks or trademarks of their owners.
Seagate reserves the right to change, without notice, product offerings or specifications. No
part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without written permission of Seagate
Technology LLC.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revision status summary sheet
Sheets Affected
All
Revision
Date
Sheets Affected
L. Newman/J. Coomes and W. Whittington
A
B
C
03/21/1997
08/01/2000
01/03/2003
L. Newman/J. Coomes
L. Newman
All
No change except for new Seagate logo.
Document migration/conversion only.
All
D
02/05/2004
K. Schweiss/J. Coomes and W. Paulsen
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Publication overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
General interface description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction to Fibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Channels vs. networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
The advantages of Fibre Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Fibre Channel standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Description of Fibre Channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FC-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Relationship between the levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Topology standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
FC Implementation Guide (FC-IG). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Introduction to topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Arbitrated loop topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Topology and port login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Port bypass circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Data encoding (FC-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Encoding and decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Buffer-to-buffer data transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Data hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Transmission words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Data characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Ordered sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Primitive signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Primitive sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Framing protocol (FC-2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.1 Frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Frame header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Data field (payload) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CRC field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
6.2
Frame sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Class 3 flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Arbitrated Loop physical address (AL_PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Loop initialization state machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Access fairness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Access unfairness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Loop ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Maximum number of NL_Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Blocking switch emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Non-meshed environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Abort Sequence (ABTS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Basic Accept (BA_ACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fabric Login (FLOGI) (04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Read Link Error Status Block (RLS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Reinstate Recovery Qualifier (RRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Discover Address (ADISC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Report Node Capabilities (RNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Link Service Reject (LS_RJT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
FC common transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
9.3.1 Register FC-4 Types Name Service (RFT_ID). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Enclosure services interface (ESI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8045 ESI pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.4.1
ESI read transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
vi
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ESI write transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Enclosure-initiated ESI transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EIE Discovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EIE operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Enclosure requested information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
10.5.3.2 Device Address page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10.5.3.3 Loop Position Map page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10.5.3.4 Device Identification page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.5.3.5 Device Temperature page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.5.3.6 Port Parameters page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
10.5.3.7 Link Status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10.5.3.9 ESI data validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
SCSI operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
SCSI-FCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
11.1.1 FC-4 mapping layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
FCP CMND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Command Descriptor Block (CDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
11.2.1.1 Operation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
11.2.1.2 Logical block address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.2.1.3 Operation code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.2.1.4 Relative address bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.2.1.5 Transfer length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
11.2.1.6 Control byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FCP XFER RDY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
FCP DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
FCP RSP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Extended Sense Data format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
11.5.1.2 Current and deferred errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Parameter rounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
Change Definition command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Compare command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Copy command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Copy and Verify command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Format Unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Format Unit parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.5.1.1 Defect List header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
12.5.1.2 Initialization Pattern descriptor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
12.6
Inquiry command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Vital product data pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Unit Serial Number page (80h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Implemented Operating Definition page (81h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Device Identification page (83h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Firmware Numbers page (C0h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Date Code page (C1h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Jumper Settings page (C2h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Device Behavior page (C3h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
12.7
12.8
12.9
Lock-Unlock Cache (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Lock-Unlock Cache (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Log Select command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
12.10 Log Sense command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.1 Error Counter pages, Write, Read, Read Reverse, and Verify (code 02, 03, 04, and
12.10.2 Non-Medium Error page (code 06h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12.10.3 Temperature page (code 0Dh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.10.4 Device Self-Test Results Log page (code 10h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
12.10.5 Cache Statistics page (code 37h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.10.6 Factory Log page (code 3Eh). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.11 Mode Select (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
12.12 Mode Select (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
12.13 Mode Sense (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
12.13.1 Unit Attention page (00h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
12.13.2 Error Recovery page (01h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.13.3 Disconnect/Reconnect Control page (02h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12.13.4 Format Parameters page (03h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
12.13.5 Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page (04h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12.13.6 Verify Error Recovery page (07h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
12.13.8 Mode Sense/Mode Select Control Mode page (0Ah). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
12.13.9 Notch page (0Ch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.13.10 XOR Control Mode page (10h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.13.11 Fibre Channel Interface Control page (19h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.13.12 Power Condition page (1Ah) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
12.14 Mode Sense (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
12.15 Move Medium command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
12.16 Persistent Reserve In command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
12.16.1 Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
12.16.2 Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
12.17 Persistent Reserve Out command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
12.17.1 Persistent Reserve Out parameter list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
12.18 Prefetch (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
12.19 Prefetch (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
12.20 Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
12.21 Read (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
12.22 Read (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12.23 Read (12) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
12.24 Read (16) command (88h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
12.25 Read Buffer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
12.25.2 Read Data mode (010b). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12.25.3 Read Buffer descriptor mode (011b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
12.26 Read Capacity (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
12.27 Read Capacity (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
12.28 Read Defect Data (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
12.29 Read Defect Data (12) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12.30 Read Element Status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
12.31 Read Long command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
12.32 Reassign Blocks command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
12.33 Receive Diagnostic Results command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
12.34 Release (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
12.35 Release (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
12.36 Report Device Identifier command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
12.37 Report LUNs command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
12.38 Request Sense command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.39 Reserve (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
viii
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.40 Reserve (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
12.40.1 Logical unit reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.40.2 Third-party reservation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.40.3 Superseding reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.40.4 Parameter list format for third-party addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.41 Rezero Unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.42 Search Data Equal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.43 Search Data High command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.44 Search Data Low command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.45 Seek (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
12.46 Seek (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
12.47 Send Diagnostic command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
12.47.1 Supported Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
12.47.2 Translate Address page–Send Diagnostic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
12.47.3 Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
12.48 Set Device Identifier command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
12.49 Set Limits command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
12.50 Start/Stop Unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
12.51 Synchronize Cache (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
12.52 Synchronize Cache (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
12.53 Test Unit Ready command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
12.54 Verify (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
12.55 Verify (12) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
12.56 Verify (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
12.57 Write (6) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
12.58 Write (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
12.59 Write (12) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
12.60 Write (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
12.61 Write and Verify (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
12.62 Write and Verify (12) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
12.63 Write and Verify (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
12.64 Write Buffer command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
12.64.1 Combined Header and Data mode (000b). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
12.64.2 Write Data Only mode (010b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
12.64.3 Download Microcode and Save mode (101b) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
12.65 Write Long command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
12.66 Write Same (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
12.67 Write Same (16) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
12.68 XDRead (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
12.69 XDRead (32) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
12.70 XDWrite (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
12.71 XDWrite (32) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
12.72 XDWriteRead (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
12.73 XDWriteRead (32) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
12.74 XPWrite (10) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
12.75 XPWrite (32) command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Drive features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Self-test operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Default self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Short and extended device self-tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Device self-test modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
13.2.3.1 Foreground mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.2.3.2 Background mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
x
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Figures
Figure 20.
Fibre Channel standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Arbitrated loop topology (dual port private loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Port bypass circuit physical interconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Decimal value translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Serialization process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
FC data hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Relationship between frames, sequences, and exchanges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FC–SCSI exchanges, command and response transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Loop initialization sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Loop initialization state machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Loop state machine (simplified). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Discovery process flow diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
ESI transfer phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ESI command transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ESI reads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ESI writes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Enclosure Initiated ESI Request. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Prepare for Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
EIE Operation Phases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
xii
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.0
Publication overview
This publication provides some general information about Fibre Channel as well as detailed information about
how Seagate disc drives implement Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop technology.
This publication will continue to be revised as Fibre Channel technology advances and as Seagate Fibre
Channel drives change to meet data storage needs.
You will observe that many references are made to SCSI throughout this publication. This is because Fibre
Channel transports the SCSI command set. This concept is discussed in more detail throughout this publica-
tion beginning in Chapter 2.
1.1
Acknowledgements
The information contained in this publication was gathered from many sources. Portions of the text used to
explain general Fibre Channel concepts were adapted in various forms, with permission, from Ancot Corpora-
tion’s Fibre Channel, Volume 1: The Basics written by Gary R. Stephens and Jan V. Dedek. Additional informa-
tion was contributed by Canadian Valley Vocational-Technical instructor Chuck Chalupa.
1.2
How to use this manual
This publication provides a universal detailed description of the Fibre Channel interface for Seagate disc
drives. You may read it from front-to-back, or turn directly to the sections that interest you the most. A glossary
is provided in the back (see Appendix A) which you may find useful as you read this manual.
Note. Volume 1 Product Manuals have tables that specify which SCSI features are implemented in each
specific drive model, what the default parameters are for the various features they implement, and
which parameters are changeable and which are not.
No method exists at present to inform an initiator if a target supports SCSI-3 features as opposed to only SCSI-
2 features. A few SCSI-3 features are supported by Seagate drives, but no attempt has been made herein to
differentiate between SCSI-2 and SCSI-3 features. Therefore, when an Inquiry command reports what the
ANSI-approved version of the drive is, it reports SCSI-2, where SCSI-2 means SCSI-2 features plus some
SCSI-3 features.
No attempt is made in this universal specification to specify which descriptions or tables apply to SCSI-2 or
SCSI-3. The combination of this general specification with the details in the individual drive’s Product Manual,
Volume 1, provides a description of the individual drive implementation of the SCSI interface.
This interface manual is not intended to be a stand-alone publication about Fibre Channel’s features. You
should reference the individual drive’s Product Manual to determine the specific features supported by each
drive model.
This specification is Volume 2 of a set of manuals that is made up of a separate drive Product Manual, Volume
1, and this manual. This Volume 2 manual is referenced by the Volume 1 Product Manual for Seagate Fibre
Channel disc drives.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3
General interface description
This manual describes the Seagate Technology LLC Fibre Channel/SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface)
as implemented on Seagate Fibre Channel (FC) disc drives.
The disc drives covered by this manual are classified as intelligent peripherals.
The interface supports multiple initiators, self-configuring host software, automatic features that relieve the
host from the necessity of knowing the physical architecture of the target (logical block addressing is used),
and some other miscellaneous features.
The physical interface uses differential drivers and receivers for the Fibre Channel serial connections. The sin-
gle channel transfer rate is 106 MB/second (commonly called 1 gigabit/sec) or 212 MB/second (commonly
called 2 gigabit/sec). See the Volume 1 Product Manual for a definition of the electrical characteristics of the
interface.
2
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.0
Introduction to Fibre Channel
Fibre Channel is an American National Standards Institute (ANSI) interface that acts as a general transport
vehicle to simultaneously deliver the command sets of several existing interface protocols including SCSI-3,
IPI-3, HIPPI-FP, IP, and ATM/AAL5. Proprietary and other command sets may also use and share the Fibre
Channel, but these are not yet defined as part of the Fibre Channel standard.
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) is one topology used to connect two or more devices within the guide-
lines set by the ANSI standards. This topology is discussed in detail throughout this manual. Other topologies
do exist and are discussed briefly in this manual to give you some idea of how these topologies can coexist
and interact.
2.1
General information
Fibre Channel supports both large and small data transfers. This makes it effective in transferring a wide vari-
ety of data and can be used in systems ranging from supercomputers to individual workstations. Fibre Channel
peripherals can include devices such as, but not limited to, disc drives, tape units, high-bandwidth graphics ter-
minals, and laser printers.
To accommodate all of these device types with various command sets, Fibre Channel separates the physical I/
O interface from the I/O operations. This makes it possible to use the multiple command sets simultaneously.
This also allows new speeds and new functions to be added without making all previous investment in existing
components obsolete.
Another benefit of Fibre Channel is that it supports both channel and network peripheral protocols for device
communication. This means that channel and network protocols can share the same physical medium.
Fibre Channel does not have its own native I/O command set protocol. It simply lets other protocols superim-
pose their command sets onto itself and then transports this information. Fibre Channel has a command set
that it uses to manage the links between the various participating devices using Fibre Channel. Fibre Channel
calls these link level functions “link services.”
Since multiple command sets may use Fibre Channel, it identifies the information by command set type. This
allows the receiving port to distinguish among the protocols and make processing decisions. Each Fibre Chan-
nel frame has a field in the frame header to identify the protocol associated with that frame. Additional informa-
2.2
Channels vs. networks
As mentioned above, Fibre Channel supports both channel and network communications.
Channels
Traditional disc drive communications occur in a channel environment where the host controls the devices
attached to it. The primary requirement for channel environments is to provide error-free delivery, with transfer
delays being a secondary consideration.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Networks
Networks allow many devices to communicate with each other at will. This is usually accompanied by software
support to route transactions to the correct provider and to verify access permission. Networks are used for
transferring data with “error-free delivery” and voice and video where “delivery on time” is the primary require-
ment with error-free delivery being a secondary consideration. For example, when transferring video, it is more
important to provide on-time delivery of data to prevent loss of video frames than to lose one or two pixels in a
video frame.
2.3
The advantages of Fibre Channel
In addition to the channel/network support, Fibre Channel:
• Supports multiple physical interface types.
• Provides a means to interconnect physical interface types.
• Provides high-speed data transfer rates much faster than parallel SCSI.
• Separates the logical protocol being transported from the physical interface—this allows multiple protocols
to be transported over a common physical interface.
• Allows increased cable lengths. You can have 30 meters between each device when using twisted pair cop-
per media. Note that this 30 meters is between each device, not the total length (multiply the number of
devices by 30m to obtain total allowable length). Fiber optic media extended this even further by allowing
distances of 10km between each device.
• Increases the potential number of devices connected. Just one private arbitrated loop can have up to 125
devices attached. Even more can be attached in non-participating mode. Also, multiple loops can be
attached to fabrics to significantly increase the number of devices attached.
• Uses asynchronous transmission to fully utilize the available bandwidth.
• Allows flexibility in transfer rates, distances, media types, and protocols.
4
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.0
Fibre Channel standards
Figure 1 shows the various documents involved in the ANSI set of standards relating to Fibre Channel. This
model is not static—it is growing as others areas of interest are developed.
SCSI-GPP
FC-SB
FC-FP
FC-LE
Link
Encapsulation
SCSI-FCP
SCSI-FC
Protocol
FC-I3
FC-I3
Generic
Packetized
Protocol
Mapping of Single-Byte Mapping of
Revision to
Revision to
Command Code Sets
HIPPI-FP
IPI-3 Disk std IPI-3 Tape std
FC-ATM
Mapping of
ATM
FC-AL-n
Arbitrated Loop
FC-PH-n
Fibre Channel Enhanced Physical
FC-SW
Switch Fabric
FC-AE
Avionics
Environment
FC-PH
Fibre Channel Physical Interface
X3.230-1994
FC-FG
General Fabric
Requirements
FC-IG
Fibre Channel Implementation Guide
FC-GS
Generic Services
Figure 1.
Fibre Channel standards
The interface is compatible with a subset of the ANSI standards listed below:
• SCSI-2 Standard and the Common Command Set (CCS) document, Revision 4.B
• SCSI Parallel Interface-3 (SPI-3)
• SCSI Enclosure Services (SES) Command Set, X3T10 NCITS, 305-199x
• Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling, Revision 4.3 (FC-PH)
• Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling, Revision 7.4 (FC-PH-2)
• Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling, Revision 9.4 (FC-PH-3)
• SCSI Fibre Channel Protocol, Revision 12 (SCSI-FCP)
•
•
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop, Revision 4.5 (FC-AL)
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop Direct Attach SCSI Technical Report
• Fibre Channel Fabric Loop Attach Technical Report
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copies of ANSI documents relating to Fibre Channel can be purchased from:
Global Engineering
15 Inverness Way East
Englewood, CO 80112-5704
(800) 854-7179 or
(303) 792-2181
Fax: (303) 792-2192
3.1
General information
The FC-PH standard is the foundation upon which all others are based. Each topology, command set, and pro-
tocol has its own standard. These are all separate to allow future growth and to allow designers to more easily
use only those parts that affect their products. It is important for system designers to consider the requirements
of the set of protocols to be supported because different protocols require different subsets of the functions
permitted in a Fibre Channel port.
3.1.1
Description of Fibre Channel levels
The Fibre Channel levels are listed below:
• Physical (FC-0)
• 8B/10B encoding/decoding (FC-1)
• FC-AL (FC-1.5)
• Framing protocol (FC-2)
• Common services (FC-3)
• Interface mapping (FC-4)
3.1.1.1
FC-0
FC-0 defines the physical portions of the Fibre Channel. This includes the fibre, connectors, and optical and
electrical parameters for a variety of data rates and physical media. Coax, twinax, and twisted pair versions are
defined for limited distance applications. FC-0 also provides the point-to-point physical portion of the Fibre
Channel.
3.1.1.2
FC-1
FC-1 defines the transmission protocol which includes the serial encoding, decoding, and error control.
3.1.1.3
FC-1.5
FC-1.5 defines the topology involved with Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) configurations.
3.1.1.4
FC-2
FC-2 defines the signaling protocol which includes the frame structure and byte sequences.
3.1.1.5
FC-3
FC-3 defines a set of services which are common across multiple ports of a node.
6
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.1.6
FC-4
FC-4 defines the interface mapping between the lower levels of the Fibre Channel and the various command
sets. These various command sets are known as upper layer protocols (ULPs). Examples of upper layer proto-
cols include SCSI, IPI, HIPPI, and IP.
3.1.2
Relationship between the levels
FC-0, FC-1, and FC-2 are integrated into the FC-PH document. The other documents are separate so that
each implementation may use the technology best suited to the environment in which it will be used.
3.1.3
Topology standards
Each topology has its own standard. This is done so that designers can concentrate on documents that apply
to the technology suited to their specific area of interest.
The following topology standards are available:
• FC-FG (Fibre Channel Fabric Generic)
• FC-SW (Fibre Channel Cross-point switch)
• FC-AL (Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop)
The FC-FG and FC-AL documents are of the most interest for Seagate disc drive interconnection.
3.1.4
FC Implementation Guide (FC-IG)
FC-IG provides some implementation guidance for all Fibre Channel systems.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.0
Introduction to topologies
Topologies include all the elements necessary to successfully connect two or more nodes (also known as
devices). See Section 4.1. There are several topologies available with Fibre Channel, but all of them have cer-
tain common components: nodes, ports, and links. These components are discussed in this section.
The ANSI Fibre Channel standard defines three topologies:
1. Arbitrated loop (Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop, FC-AL)
2. Fabric
3. Point-to-point
Seagate supports arbitrated loop and fabric as the primary topologies for disc drive connections.
Note. Some brief discussions about items not directly associated with arbitrated loop and fabric topolo-
gies are included to make you aware that other topologies exist within the constructs of the ANSI
Fibre Channel standard.
The fabric topology permits dynamic interconnections between nodes through ports connected to a fabric. This
fabric is similar to a switch or router and is often compared to a telephone system because of its redundant
rerouting capabilities. The fabric topology also allows multiple connections simultaneously, unlike FC-AL which
results in a single circuit being established between only two ports at any one particular time. Fabric and arbi-
trated loop topologies may be combined in one system to provide a wide variety of services and performance
levels to the nodes.
Point-to-point topologies are used only to connect two ports without any routing capabilities.
4.1
Nodes
Fibre Channel devices are called nodes. This is a generic term describing any device (workstation, printer, disc
drive, scanner, etc.) connected to a Fibre Channel topology. Each node has at least one port, called an N_Port
to provide access to other nodes. The “N” in N_Port stands for node. As you will see later, ports used in a Fibre
Channel Arbitrated Loop topology are called NL_Ports where the “NL” stands for node loop.
The components that connect two or more node ports together are what are collectively called a topology.
Nodes work within the provided topology to communicate with all other nodes.
4.2
Ports
Ports are the link to the outside world for a Fibre Channel node. See Figure 2. As stated above, each node has
at least one port to provide access to other nodes. Each Seagate Fibre Channel drive has two ports.
Each port uses a pair of fibers—one to carry information into the port and one to carry information out of the
port. This pair of fibers (actually copper wire) is called a “link” and is part of each topology. The Fibre Channel
ANSI specification also supports fibers made of optical strands as a medium for data transfer.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As stated above, ports used in a FC-AL topology are called node loop ports (NL_Ports). Other port types exist
as documented in the following table.
Table 1:
Fibre Channel port types
Port type
N_Port
Location
Node
Associated topology
Point-to-point or Fabric
NL_Port
Node
in N_Port mode—Point-to-point or Fabric
in NL_Port mode—Arbitrated Loop
F_Port
Fabric
Fabric
Fabric
FL_Port
in F_Port mode—Fabric
in FL_Port mode—Arbitrated Loop
E_Port
G_Port
Fabric
Fabric
Internal Fabric Expansion
in F_Port mode—Fabric
in E_Port mode—Internal fabric expansion
GL_Port
Fabric
in F_Port mode—Fabric
in FL_Port mode—Arbitrated Loop
in E_Port mode—Internal fabric expansion
NL_Ports and FL_Ports discover their mode of operation dynamically during the initialization procedure.
Note. You may hear the term “L_Port” when discussing Fibre Channel. This term is often used as a
“catch-all” term meaning NL_Port or FL_Port when it is not important to specifically distinguish
between the two. Therefore, when you read the term L_Port, you should think of NL_Port when the
discussion is about Arbitrated Loop or Point-to-Point topologies, and you should think of FL_Port
when the discussion is about the Fabric topology.
An L_Port discovers its environment and works properly, without outside intervention, with an F_Port, N_Port,
or with other L_Ports.
Arbitrated loops can have up to 126 active NL_Ports, but only one active FL_Port attached to the same arbi-
trated loop. The NL_Ports discover whether there is a fabric present by discovering whether there is an
FL_Port present. If there isn’t an FL_Port present, the loop is called a private loop. If there is an FL_Port
present, the loop is called a public loop and the FL_Port is considered the manager of the loop.
The most commonly used ports are the NL_Port and FL_Port. With these two types, you can easily migrate
nodes from one topology to another.
Each NL_Port is attached to one link. Information flows in one direction only.
4.3
Links
Each port is comprised of two fibers, one carries information into the port and is called a receiver. The other
carries information out of the port and is appropriately called a transmitter. Fibre Channel supports two types of
fibers—electrical wires (most commonly copper) and optical strands. This pair of wires is called a link. See Fig-
Links carry the data frames between nodes. Each link can handle multiple frame types; therefore, frame multi-
plexing is possible. For example, a frame containing SCSI information may be followed by a frame containing
TCP/IP followed by a frame containing yet another protocol’s information.
4.4
Arbitrated loop topology
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loops (FC-AL) attach multiple nodes in a loop without hubs and switches. The node
ports use arbitration to establish a point-to-point circuit. FC-AL is a distributed topology where each L_Port
includes the minimum necessary function to establish the circuit.
10
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The arbitrated loop topology is used to connect from two to 126 node ports. See Figure 2.
NL_Port 6
(Fibre A)
NL_Port 1
(Fibre A)
Node A
Node F
Node E
Node B
Node C
Node D
NL_Port 6
(Fibre B)
NL_Port 1
(Fibre B)
NL_Port 5
(Fibre A)
NL_Port 2
(Fibre A)
NL_Port 5
(Fibre B)
NL_Port 2
(Fibre B)
NL_Port 4
(Fibre A)
NL_Port 3
(Fibre A)
NL_Port 4
(Fibre B)
NL_Port 3
(Fibre B)
Figure 2.
Arbitrated loop topology (dual port private loop)
The ports in an arbitrated loop topology are called NL_Ports (Node Loop Ports). Each of the NL_Ports has an
input and output connection. Seagate Fibre Channel drives support dual ports (specified with a “1” in byte 6, bit
4 of the disc drive inquiry data). The actual ports are located on the host’s backpanel, not on the disc drive.
Dual ports are provided for redundancy so that if one loop fails, the other one can fulfill the loop duties. Each
drive has one FC SCA (single connector attachment) connector.
The arbitrated loop protocol is a token acquisition protocol. This means each port on the same arbitrated loop
sees all messages, but passes all messages that are addressed to other ports.
4.5
Topology and port login
Each NL_Port must sign in with the other ports on the loop. Each port first attempts to locate an FL_Port. If it
finds an FL_Port, it knows it is a part of a public loop connected to a fabric. If the port does not locate an
FL_Port, it knows it is a part of a private loop with other NL_Ports only.
There can be up to 126 active NL_Ports and up to one active FL_Port attached to the same arbitrated loop. If
an NL_Port does not attempt to discover an FL_Port and there is an FL_Port present, the NL_Port is only
allowed to access other NL_Ports on the same loop.
4.6
Port bypass circuits
So far, we’ve discussed links, ports, nodes, and topology logins. All’s fine with this model as long as the loop is
intact. What happens, then, if a device is disconnected from the loop. Doesn’t this break the loop? The answer
is no. Fibre Channel provides port bypass circuitry which bypasses the drive if it is removed, incapable of pro-
viding loop services, unable to obtain a valid address, or otherwise incapable of providing loop services. These
port bypass circuits (PBCs) are located external to the drive or other FC-AL device. Figure 3 shows the rela-
tionship between the PBC and drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port Bypass
Circuit
From Previous
Drive
To Next
Drive
Port Bypass
Circuit N–1
Port Bypass
Circuit N+1
MUX
Select
Serial
In
Serial
Out
Drive N–1
Drive N+1
Drive N
Figure 3.
Port bypass circuit physical interconnect
12
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.0
Data encoding (FC-1)
Fibre Channel devices don’t transmit 8-bit bytes. If this were to occur, the receiving node would not understand
the transmitter’s intentions. To fix this situation, the data is encoded prior to transmission. Encoding allows the
creation of special transmission code characters with unique bit patterns for data management and word align-
ment so the receiving node will know what to do with the bytes. Encoding also improves the transmission char-
acteristics across a fibre and increases the likelihood of detecting errors.
5.1
Encoding and decoding
An unencoded data byte is represented in FC-1 as HGFEDCBA where H is the most significant bit. The hex to
FC-1 decimal value translation is accomplished as shown below:
Kxx.y
y = the decimal value of the most significant 3 bits (HGF)
xx = the decimal value of the least significant 5 bits (EDCBA)
y
xx
Example: BCh = 10111100 (binary) = 101 11100 (binary grouped)
5
28 (decimal values)
K28.5
Figure 4.
Decimal value translation
A decimal value is assigned to each bit combination with the range of 0 to 31 for xx and 0 to 7 for y. This means
the range of valid data characters using the FC-1 naming convention is D00.0 through D31.7.
FC serial transmission delivers 10-bit characters which represent encoded data. Of the 1,024 characters possi-
ble with the 10-bit space, 256 8-bit byte data characters are mapped, along with 1 control character. This map-
ping process is called 8B/10B encoding. This encoding method involves selecting encoded 10-bit characters to
maintain a run-length-limited serial stream of bits. To prevent too many ones or zeros on the serial interface
from causing a DC electrical shift of the serial media, the encoder monitors the number of ones in the encoded
character and selects the option of the 10-bit encode character that will shift to balance the total number of
zeros and ones. This balancing is called running disparity.
A 10-bit character is actually made up of 6- and 4-bit sub-blocks. The 6-bit sub-block shifts out first followed by
the 4-bit sub-block. Running disparity is set positive at the end of the sub-block as follows:
• If the number of ones in a sub-block is greater that the number of zeros, the 6-bit sub-block is 000111b, or
the 4-bit sub-block is 0011b. Running disparity is set positive at the end of the sub-block.
• If the number of zeros in a sub-block is greater than the number of ones, the 6-bit sub-block is 111000b, or
the 4-bit sub-block is 1100b. Running disparity is set negative at the end of the sub-block.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the number of ones and zeros in a sub-block are equal, running disparity is neutral and the value of run-
ning disparity at the end of the sub-block remains the same as the preceding character even if it is separated
by neutral characters.
Note. The rules of running disparity prohibit consecutive positive or consecutive negative characters even
if they are separated by neutral disparity characters. In other words, the negative and positive dis-
Table 2:
Running disparity examples
Sub-blocks
1
+
+
+
–
2
3
–
+
4
5
Valid?
Yes
No
N
N
+
+
–
No
–
No
5.2
Buffer-to-buffer data transfers
Fibre Channel devices transfer information from an output buffer in the transmitting node to an input buffer of
the receiving node. This is called a buffer-to-buffer transfer. Each node may have from 1 to n buffers. The num-
ber of buffers in each node does not have to be equal. Each buffer is the size a frame may transfer in its pay-
load. The Fibre Channel standard does not define the actual length of the buffer or the method used to store
the bytes in the buffer. Figure 5 shows how data is sent from the transmit buffer and received by the receive
buffer.
Transmit
Buffer
Receive
Buffer
8-bit 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit
byte byte byte byte
8-bit 8-bit 8-bit 8-bit
byte byte byte byte
8B/10B
Encoder
8B/10B
Decoder
8-bit character
10-bit character
Serializer
10-bit character
Deserializer
8-bit character
Serial transfer
Figure 5.
Serialization process
1
The bytes being transmitted are sent in increasing displacement.
The basic unit of transfer for the contents of a buffer-to-buffer data transfer is the frame.
1
This means that if byte 0 is sent first, bytes 1, 2, 3, and 4 are then transmitted in that order. If byte 100 is sent first, bytes
101, 102, 103, and 104 are then transmitted in that order.
14
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3
Data hierarchy
A hierarchy of data types is presented in Figure 6.
Transmission word (40 bits — 4 10-bit encoded bytes)
8B/10B encoded byte 1 (10 bits)
Byte (8 bits)
8B/10B encoded byte 4 (10 bits)
Byte (8 bits)
• • •
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit
Figure 6.
5.3.1
FC data hierarchy
Transmission words
Transmission words are the lowest level of control on Fibre Channel other than the control character used to
provide character synchronization.
A transmission word is defined as four contiguous 8B/10B encoded transmission characters (10 bits each)
treated as a unit. This unit is 40 bits in length (4 characters x 10 bits each) and is the smallest unit of transmis-
sion in Fibre Channel.
5.3.1.1
Data characters
A data character is a 8B/10B encoded transmission character with a data byte equated by the transmission
code as one of the 256 possible data characters.
5.3.1.2
Special characters
The 8B/10B encoding scheme allows for all 256 data byte values, plus several others that can be used for spe-
cial signaling. These other values are called special characters. Special characters include any transmission
character considered valid by the transmission code but not equated to a valid data byte.
5.4
Ordered sets
An ordered set is a four-character combination of data and special transmissions characters. There are three
primary categories of ordered sets:
• Primitive signals
• Primitive sequences
• Frame delimiters
The K28.5 special character is the first character of all ordered sets.
5.4.1
Primitive signals
Primitive signals are ordered sets that perform a control function. Primitive signals are recognized when one
ordered set is detected. Table 3 lists the defined primitive signals. There must be a minimum of six primitive
signals (Idles and R_RDYs) at the N_Port transmitter between frames to properly maintain clock skew.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 3:
Primitive signals
Beginning
running
Primitive signal
Signal
disparity
Ordered set (FC-1)
Ordered set (hex)
Idle
IDLE
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D21.4 D21.5 D21.5
K28.5 D21.4 D10.2 D10.2
BC 95 B5 B5
BC 95 4A 4A
Receiver_Ready
R_RDY
Idle (IDLE)
An Idle is transmitted on the loop to indicate the node is operational and ready for frame transmission and
reception. Idles are transmitted when frames, R_RDY, or primitive sequences are not being transmitted. This
maintains word synchronization and minimum spacing between frames.
Receiver ready (R_RDY)
R_RDY indicates that a frame was received and that the interface buffer that received the frame is ready for
another frame. R_RDY is preceded and followed by a minimum of two Idles. R_RDY establishes buffer-to-
buffer credit during data transmissions between an initiator and target.
5.4.1.1
Primitive signals used as frame delimiters
Primitive signals can also be frame delimiters. A frame is an indivisible information unit that may contain data to
record on disc or control information such as a SCSI command.
Note. All ordered sets (except for the End-of-frame delimiter, EOF) require the running disparity from the
previous word to be negative. The second character of an ordered set (except EOF) will be positive
and the third and fourth characters are neutral.
Frame delimiters mark the beginning and end of frames. There are several frame delimiters available in Fibre
Channel. There are nine Start-of-frame (SOF) delimiters and six End-of-frame (EOF) delimiters as listed in
Start-of-frame (SOF) delimiters:
• mark the beginning of a frame,
• indicate whether this is the first frame of the sequence, and
• indicate the class of service for the frame.
End-of-frame (EOF) delimiters:
• mark the end of a frame, and
• indicate whether this frame is the last frame of the sequence.
The second character of EOF delimiters differentiates between normal and invalid frames. The EOF delimiter
also ensures that negative running disparity results after processing the set by assigning the appropriate sec-
ond character.
The third and fourth characters of the delimiter functions (SOF and EOF) are repeated to ensure that an error
affecting a single character will not result in the recognition of an ordered set other than the one transmitted.
16
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seagate disc drives use only those listed in bold type (Seagate Fibre Channel disc drives are Class 3 devices
and use only Class 3 delimiters).
Table 4:
Frame delimiters
Beginning
running
Delimiter function
Delimiter
disparity
Ordered set (FC-1)
Ordered set (hex)
SOF Connect Class 1
SOF Initiate Class 1
SOF Normal Class 1
SOF Initiate Class 2
SOF Normal Class 2
SOF Initiate Class 3
SOF Normal Class 3
SOF Initialize Loop
SOF Activate Class 4
SOF Initiate Class 4
SOF Normal Class 4
SOF Fabric
SOFc1
SOFi1
SOFn1
SOFi2
SOFn2
SOFi3
SOFn3
SOFil
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D21.5 D23.0 D23.0
K28.5 D21.5 D23.2 D23.2
K28.5 D21.5 D23.1 D23.1
K28.5 D21.5 D21.2 D21.2
K28.5 D21.5 D21.1 D21.1
K28.5 D21.5 D22.2 D22.2
K28.5 D21.5 D22.1 D22.1
K28.5 D21.5 D22.2 D22.2
K28.5 D21.5 D25.0 D25.0
K28.5 D21.5 D25.2 D25.2
K28.5 D21.5 D25.1 D25.1
K28.5 D21.5 D24.2 D24.2
BC B5 17 17
BC B5 57 57
BC B5 37 37
BC B5 55 55
BC B5 35 35
BC B5 56 56
BC B5 36 36
BC B5 56 56
BC B5 19 19
BC B5 59 59
BC B5 39 39
BC B5 58 58
SOFc4
SOFi4
SOFn4
SOFf
EOF Terminate
EOFt
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D21.4 D21.3 D21.3
K28.5 D21.5 D21.3 D21.3
BC 95 75 75
BC B5 75 75
EOF Disconnect-
Terminate
EOFdt
EOFa
EOFn
EOFdti
EOFni
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D21.4 D21.4 D21.4
K28.5 D21.5 D21.4 D21.4
BC 95 95 95
BC B5 95 95
EOF Abort
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D21.4 D21.7 D21.7
K28.5 D21.5 D21.7 D21.7
BC 95 F5 F5
BC B5 F5 F5
EOF Normal
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D21.4 D21.6 D21.6
K28.5 D21.5 D21.6 D21.6
BC 95 D5 D5
BC B5 D5 D5
EOF Disconnect-
Terminate-Invalid
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D10.4 D21.4 D21.4
K28.5 D10.5 D21.4 D21.4
BC 8A 95 95
BC AA 95 95
EOF Normal-Invalid
Negative
Positive
K28.5 D10.4 D21.6 D21.6
K28.5 D10.5 D21.6 D21.6
BC 8A D5 D5
BC AA D5 D5
Notes.
1. EOF primitives come in two forms—one is used when the beginning running disparity is positive and the
other is used if the beginning running disparity is negative. Regardless of which form is used, each EOF
delimiter is defined so that negative current running disparity results after processing the final (rightmost)
character of the ordered set.
2. Ordered sets associated with SOF delimiters, primitive signals, and primitive sequences are always trans-
mitted with negative beginning running disparity. As a result, primitive signals, primitive sequences, and
SOF delimiters are only defined for the negative beginning running disparity case.
3. Frames that end with any other EOF type are discarded by the drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Start-of-frame Initiate Class 3 (SOFi3)
SOFi3 indicates the beginning of the first frame of a sequence of frames (an exchange). (This includes all sin-
gle frame sequences, commands, link services, transfer readys, and response frames.) SOFi3 is also used in
the first data frame of a sequence.
Start-of-frame Normal Class 3 (SOFn3)
SOFn3 indicates the beginning of any frame other than the first frame of an exchange (see SOFi3 above).
Start-of-frame Initialize Loop (SOFil)
SOFil is the same as SOFi3, but is renamed for use in Loop Initialization to remove the class of service distinc-
tion from the initialization process.
End-of-frame Normal (EOFn)
EOFn indicates the end of any frame other than the last frame of an exchange or sequence.
End-of-frame Terminate (EOFt)
EOFt marks the end of the last frame of all sequences. It can also indicate the end of the last frame of an
exchange. For example, the single frame sequences, commands, link services, transfer readys, and response
frames.
5.4.1.2
Primitive signals custom made for arbitrated loop topologies
There are eight primitive signals used exclusively within arbitrated loop (FC-AL) topologies. These primitives
Table 5:
FC-AL primitive signals
Beginning
running
FC-AL primitive signal
Signal
disparity
Ordered set (FC-1)
Ordered set (hex)
Arbitrate
ARBx
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D20.4 AL_PA AL_PA
K28.5 D20.4 D16.7 D16.7
K28.5 D17.4 AL_PD AL_PS
K28.5 D17.4 AL_PD AL_PD
K28.5 D17.4 D31.7 D31.7
K28.5 D17.4 AL_PD D31.7
K28.5 D5.4 D21.5 D21.5
K28.5 D10.4 D21.5 D21.5
K28.5 D31.2 MK_TP AL_PS
BC 94 AL_PA AL_PA
BC 94 F0 F0
Arbitrate (F0)
ARB(F0)
OPNyx
OPNyy
OPNfr
OPNyr
CLS
Open full-duplex
Open half-duplex
Open broadcast replicate
Open selective replicate
Close
BC 91 AL_PD AL_PS
BC 91 AL_PD AL_PD
BC 91 FF FF
BC 91 AL_PD FF
BC 85 B5 B5
Dynamic Half Duplex
Mark
DHD
BC 8A B5 B5
MRKtx
BC 5F MK_TP AL_PS
Arbitrate (ARBx)
ARBx is transmitted to request access to the loop. Each ARBx contains the Physical (port) Address (AL_PA) of
the requestor.
Arbitrate (ARB(F0))
ARB(F0) is transmitted to manage access fairness (see Section 8.3.1 on page 47). It is also used to assign a
loop master during initialization.
18
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open full-duplex (OPNyx)
After successful arbitration, the transmitting port (x) opens the receiving port (y) for control and data frame
transmission and reception. Any FC port can transmit or receive an OPN.
Open half-duplex (OPNyy)
After successful arbitration, the initiator opens the target (y) for control and data frame transmission and recep-
tion of control frames. Data frame transmission from the target is not allowed.
Open broadcast replicate (OPNfr)—Not supported by Seagate drives
OPNfr is used by the open port to communicate with all ports in the loop. When received by the targets (the
opened ports), they are not allowed to generate any transmission words (except fill words). They must replicate
and retransmit all received words until a CLS is detected. Both ‘ f ’ and ‘ r ’ are FFh (D31.7 in FC-1 transmis-
sion code).
Open selective replicate (OPNyr)—Not supported by Seagate drives
Similar to OPNfr (see definition above), with the exception that the initiator can communicate with a subset of
the targets on the loop. The target at AL_PA ‘ y ’ is a member of the subset.
Close (CLS)
Close indicates that the CLS originator is prepared to or has ended the current loop circuit.
Dynamic Half Duplex (DHD)
DHD indicates the open L_Port is relinquishing control of when the current loop circuit is closed. Support of
DHD is discovered during Port Login.
Mark (MRKtx)—Not supported by Seagate drives
Mark may be used for synchronization within the loop (for example, spindle sync in a RAID application). The
third character of the ordered set ‘ t ’ (MK_TP) is a vendor-unique sync code. Seagate drives pass through this
primitive signal without responding to it.
5.4.2
Primitive sequences
Primitive sequences are ordered sets that perform control functions. These primitive sequences are listed in
Table 6. Primitive sequences differ from primitive signals in the requirement for detection. Primitive sequences
must have at least three consecutive ordered sets to be detected. Primitive sequences are transmitted repeat-
edly.
All of these primitive sequences are defined in Fibre Channel, but are not recognized by the drive. The Loop
Initialization Primitive (LIP) sequence is used in arbitrated loop configurations to reset all attached ports to a
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 6:
Primitive sequences
Beginning
running
Primitive sequences
Sequence
disparity
Ordered set (FC-1)
Ordered set (hex)
Offline
OLS
NOS
LR
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D21.1 D10.4 D21.2
K28.5 D21.2 D31.5 D5.2
K28.5 D9.2 D31.5 D9.2
K28.5 D21.1 D31.5 D9.2
BC 35 8A 55
BC 55 BF 45
BC 49 BF 49
BC 35 BF 49
Not_Operational
Link_Reset
Link_Reset_Response
LRR
Offline (OLS)
Offline is transmitted to indicate that the port is initiating the initialization protocol prior to going offline. The
sequence will be transmitted for a minimum of 5 msec before further action is taken.
Not_Operational (NOS)
Not_Operational is transmitted to indicate that the port has detected a loop failure or is offline.
Link_Reset (LR)
Link_Reset is transmitted by a port to initiate the Link Reset protocol following a Link Timeout. This brings the
port back to a stable synchronized state.
Link_Reset_Response (LRR)
Link_Reset_Response is transmitted to indicate that the port is receiving and recognizes the Link_Reset (LR)
primitive sequence.
5.4.2.1
Primitive sequences custom made for Arbitrated Loop topologies
There are eight primitive sequences used exclusively within arbitrated loop (FC-AL) topologies. These primi-
Table 7:
FC-AL primitive sequences
Beginning
running
FC-AL primitive sequence
Sequence
disparity
Ordered set (hex)
Ordered set (FC-1)
Loop initialization,
no valid AL_PA
LIP
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D21.0 D23.7 D23.7
BC 15 F7 F7
Loop initialization,
loop failure, no valid AL_PA
LIP
LIP
LIP
K28.5 D21.0 D24.7 D23.7
K28.5 D21.0 D23.7 AL_PS
K28.5 D21.0 D24.7 AL_PS
BC 15 F8 F7
Loop initialization,
valid AL_PA
BC 15 F7 AL_PS
BC 15 F8 AL_PS
Loop initialization,
loop failure, valid AL_PA
Loop initialization reset
Loop initialization reset all
Loop port enable
LIP
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
Negative
K28.5 D21.0 AL_PD AL_PS
K28.5 D21.0 D31.7 AL_PS
K28.5 D5.0 AL_PD AL_PS
K28.5 D5.0 D31.7 AL_PS
K28.5 D9.0 AL_PD AL_PS
K28.5 D9.0 D31.7 AL_PS
BC 15 AL_PD AL_PS
BC 15 FF AL_PS
LIP
LPEyx
LPEfx
LPByx
LPBfx
BC 05 AL_PD AL_PS
BC 05 FF AL_PS
Loop port enable all
Loop port bypass
BC 09 AL_PD AL_PS
BC 09 FF AL_PS
Loop port bypass all
20
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note. There are six sequences that invoke loop initialization. There is no operational difference between
them except that bytes 3 and 4 identify the reason for the loop initialization.
Loop initialization, no valid AL_PA (LIP)
The L_Port is attempting to acquire an AL_PA.
Loop initialization, loop failure, no valid AL_PA (LIP)
The transmitting L_Port detects a loop failure at its receiver. Since it has not completed initialization, it uses ‘F7’
(D23.7) rather than a valid AL_PA.
Loop initialization, valid AL_PA (LIP)
The L_Port is attempting to reinitialize the loop to a known state after recognizing a problem (performance deg-
radation).
Loop initialization, loop failure, valid AL_PA (LIP)
The transmitting L_Port detects a loop failure at its receiver.
Loop initialization reset (LIP)
If the rightmost two bytes consist of a valid destination and source address, the source is requesting the target
to perform a device reset.
Loop initialization reset all (LIP)
If byte 3 is FFh and byte 4 is a valid source address, the source is requesting all receiving targets to perform a
device reset.
Loop port enable (LPEyx)
LPEyx resets the bypass circuit and enables a previously-bypassed L_Port.
Loop port enable all (LPEfx)
LPEfx resets the bypass circuits on all L_Ports on the loop.
Loop port bypass (LPByx)
LPByx activates the port bypass circuit and prevents the L_Port from actively participating on the loop.
Loop port bypass all (LPBfx)
LPBfx activates the port bypass circuit for all L_Ports on the loop with bypass circuits except for the source of
the LPBfx.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.0
Framing protocol (FC-2)
The entire responsibility of moving frames between N_Ports is assigned to the Fibre Channel layer called the
framing protocol (FC-2). This protocol is primarily concerned with constructing and managing frames,
sequences, and exchanges.
Navigation assistance
The field descriptions that are provided for most tables have sidebar labels
which identify the table they are associated with. This helps orient you when
nested tables occur within a section.
Sidebar example
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
1
Field name
The sidebar (black background with reversed text) identifies this field as being asso-
ciated with Table 1.
6.1
Frames
Frames transfer all information between nodes. The frames are normally constructed by the transmitting
node’s N_Port. A frame is the smallest unit of information transfer across a link. A sequence is one or more
It is possible, but not common, for a sequence to have only one frame and for an exchange to have only one
sequence. Again, this isn’t common, but possible. Most sequences have more than one frame, and most
exchanges have more than one sequence.
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame... Frame n
Sequence 1
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame... Frame n
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame... Frame n
Sequence n
Sequence 2
Exchange 1
Exchange 2...
Figure 7.
6.1.1
Relationship between frames, sequences, and exchanges
Frame structure
A frame is a string of transmission words containing data bytes. Every frame is prefixed by a start-of-field
(SOF) delimiter and suffixed by an end-of-field (EOF) delimiter. There are never any primitive signals or primi-
tive sequences in a frame.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All frames also have a header and a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) field. The payload data field is optional
(but normally present) with the size and contents determined by the type of frame.
Bytes
Fill
4
24
0 to 2112
4
4
24
Fill
SOF
1
Frame Header
6
Payload Data Field
0 to 528
Fill Bytes CRC EOF
Words
Words
Transmission
Words
1
1
6
Figure 8.
6.1.1.1
Frame structure
Start-of-frame (SOF) delimiter
Start-of-frame (SOF) delimiters signal the beginning of a frame. See “Frame delimiters” on page 17. This refer-
enced page contains a list of the various types of SOF delimiters.
6.1.1.2
Frame header
The frame header is 24 bytes long and is present in all frames. It is used to control link operation, control
device protocol transfers, and to detect missing frames or frames that are out of order.
Table 8:
Byte
Frame header format
0
1
2
3
Word
(bits 31 - 24)
(bits 23 - 16)
(bits 15 - 08)
(bits 07 - 00)
0
R_CTL
Reserved
Type
D_ID
S_ID
1
2
3
4
5
F_CTL
SEQ_ID
DF_CTL
SEQ_CNT
RX_ID
OX_ID
Offset
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Specifies the presence of optional headers in the payload of the frame. The drive does not support optional headers.
00h
The drive sets this field to 00h for all frames it originates (sends), and should also be 00h for all frames sent to the
drive.
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The 3-byte N_Port address to which the frame is being sent.
24
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
This 3-byte (24-bit) field contains control information relating to the frame content as defined below.
Table 9:
Frame Control (F_CTL) bit definitions
Bit
Definition
Description
Exchange context
Sequence context
First sequence
0 = Frame is from the exchange originator.
1 = Frame is from the exchange responder.
23
0 = Initiator
1 = Recipient
22
21
20
19
0 = Not the first sequence of the exchange.
1 = First sequence of the exchange.
Last sequence
0 = Not the last sequence of the exchange.
1 = Last sequence of the exchange.
End of sequence
0 = Not the last frame of the sequence.
1 = Last frame of the sequence.
End connection
Not supported.
Not supported.
18
17
16
Chained sequence
Sequence initiative
0 = Hold sequence initiative.
1 = Transfer sequence initiative.
X_ID reassigned
Invalid X_ID
Reserved
Not supported.
Not supported.
15
14
13
12
11
10
Retransmitted
sequence
Not supported.
Not supported.
Not supported.
9
Unidirectional
transmit
8
Continue sequence
condition
7
6
Abort sequence
condition
Not supported.
5
4
Relative offset
present
0 = Parameter field not meaningful.
1 = Parameter field equals relative offset.
3
Reserved
2
Fill data bytes
End of data field fill bytes
00 = 0 bytes of fill.
1
0
01 = 1 byte of fill (last byte of data field).
02 = 2 bytes of fill (last 2 bytes of data field).
03 = 3 bytes of fill (last 3 bytes of data field).
Offset
This 4-byte field is used in data frames to define the relative offset (displacement) of the first byte of the payload from the
base address of the command. When the relative offset is present, bit 3 of F_CTL is set to indicate that relative offset is
valid.
The drive uses the SEQ_CNT value to verify that frames are being received in order. The drive does not use relative offset
in frames it receives. The drive sends relative offset information in data frames it originates.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
This 2-byte field is assigned by the originator of an exchange. For SCSI FCP frames, this value is analogous to the Queue
Tag used in Parallel SCSI and must be unique for an initiator/drive pair.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
This one-byte field provides routing bits and information bits to categorize the frame function.
The high order bits (bits 31-28) indicate the frame type as indicated below:
0000
0010
0011
0100
1000
1100
Others
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
FC-4 Device_Data frame
Extended Link_Data frame
FC-4 Link_Data frame
Video_Data frame
Basic Link_Data frame
Link_Control frame
Reserved
The low order bits (bits 27-24) contain the Information field values. This is dependent on the value of the high order bits (31-
28). If the high order bit value = 1000, the Information field contains a basic link service. For all other high order bit values,
the Information field specifies the Common Information Categories specified in the table below.
Table 10:
High order bits
Type 08h, SCSI FCP, Device Data frames
Routing Control values
Low order bits
Use
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Uncategorized
Not supported
Read and write data
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Transfer ready
Command
Solicited Data
Unsolicited Control
Solicited control
Unsolicited data
Data descriptor
Unsolicited command
Command status
0000
Response
Type 01h, Extended link service
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Uncategorized
Not supported
Not supported
Request
Solicited data
Unsolicited control
Solicited control
Unsolicited data
Data descriptor
Unsolicited command
Command status
Reply
0010
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Type 00h, Basic link service
26
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 10:
Routing Control values (Continued)
High order bits
Low order bits
Use
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
No operation
Not supported
Request
Abort sequence (ABTS)
Remove connection
Reserved
Not supported
Not supported
Reply
1000
Basic_Accept (BA_ACC)
Basic_Reject (BA_RJT)
Reply
0110-
0111
Reserved
Not supported
RX_ID (Responder Exchange Identifier)
This 2-byte identifier is a unique identifier generated by the responder for an exchange established by an originator and
identified by an OX_ID.
With Class 3 devices such as this drive, the responder of the exchange assigns a unique value for RX_ID other than FFFFh
if RX_ID is being used in an ACK to a data frame in the first sequence transmitted as a sequence initiator.
The drive returns FFFFh in this field to indicate the RX_ID is not being used.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
This 2-byte field identifies the sequential order of frames within a sequence or multiple sequences of the same exchange.
The SEQ_CNT value for each frame of a sequence has to be unique. The field range limits the number of frames per
sequence to a maximum of 65,536.
For SCSI FCP write data transfers that require more than one sequence to transfer the data, the first frame of each
sequence starts with a SEQ_CNT of 0000h. The transfer of sequence initiative between write data sequences and the
XFR_RDY sent by the drive give the sequence originator (the SCSI Initiator) verification that the previous sequence is
closed.
For SCSI FCP read data transfers that require more than one sequence to transfer the data, the SEQ_CNT does not reset
to 0000h for each new sequence. The SEQ_CNT increments sequentially across the sequence boundaries. The
SEQ_CNT is still allowed to increment through all 65,536 possible values for each sequence. This is required as there is no
verification in Class 3 that all the frames of previous sequences have been delivered.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
This field uniquely identifies frames in a non-streamed sequence or when only one sequence is open.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The 3-byte address of the N_Port or F_Port originating the frame.
Type (Data Structure Type)
This 1-byte field identifies the protocol of the frame contents as described below:
Table 11:
Data type codes
R_CTL
(4 highest order bits)
Type code
Description
1000
0010
0000
00
01
08
Basic Link Service
Extended Link Service
SCSI FCP
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1.1.3
Data field (payload)
The data field, also known as the payload, is aligned on word boundaries. The payload length must be an inte-
ger multiple of four bytes and is limited to 2,112 bytes. If the data field is not an integer multiple of four bytes,
valid fill bytes are inserted to meet the requirement. F_CTL bits 0 and 1 indicate how many fill bytes are used.
Fill bytes are only permitted in the last frame of a sequence. These fill bytes can be any valid byte value.
The contents of the frame payload is specified by the type of frame. Refer to Section 9.0 for link service infor-
mation.
6.1.1.4
CRC field
The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is a 4-byte field that follows the payload field. The CRC is used to verify
the integrity of the frame header and payload fields. This helps detect errors in a frame. The SOF and EOF
frame delimiters are not included in the CRC calculation.
The algorithm used to calculate the CRC field value is the same as that used in the Fiber Distributed Data
Interface (FDDI) standard. The polynomial for the CRC is:
x32 + x26 + x23 + x22 + x16 + x12 + x11 + x10 + x8 + x7 + x5 + x4 + x2 + x + 1
6.1.1.5
End-of-frame (EOF) delimiter
End-of-frame (EOF) delimiters signal the end of a frame. See “Frame delimiters” on page 17. This page con-
tains a list of the various types of EOF delimiters.
6.2
Frame sequences
Since the data field has a maximum length of 2,112 bytes (528 transmission words), larger amounts of data
must be split into several frames.
Frame sequences always contain at least one frame. The frame header subfields in the F_CTL field are used
to identify the beginning, middle, and end of a frame sequence. The SEQ_ID and SEQ_CNT fields are used to
identify the order of the frames for reassembly in the event they arrive out of order at the destination when par-
ticipating in a fabric topology.
The OX_ID and RX_ID fields identify the larger context (the exchange) of which this frame sequence is a part.
The frame sequence itself may be part of an exchange and is identified by the SEQ_ID field in the frame
header. The R_CTL field of the frame header identifies the category of information in all the frames of the
sequence. All of the frames within the same sequence are required to have the same category.
6.3
Exchanges
Exchanges are an additional layer that controls operations across Fibre Channel. An exchange provides a con-
trol environment for the transfer of information between two N_Ports. You can think of exchanges as an operat-
ing system that controls communications between nodes when two or more sequences are required to transmit
data or commands. Exchanges even keep track of operations that occur in opposite directions (sender to
receiver and receiver to sender). Here’s a short explanation of how this occurs:
One of the N_Ports establishes an exchange by sending a sequence to the other N_Port with at least one
frame in it. The originator names its resources using the OX_ID field in the frame header of each frame of the
exchange.
The responder of the exchange also allocates resources after it receives the first frame of the first sequence. It
names its resources using the RX_ID field.
28
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These two independent fields (OX_ID and RX_ID) allow each N_Port to identify the resources needed to man-
age a frame or sequence as it arrives. Each N_Port involved with the exchange can use a link service request
to view the contents of the control information in the other port in the exchange; however, no other N_Ports are
allowed to request information for the exchange since they are not involved with that particular exchange.
SCSI Write
Initiator Target
Command
SCSI Read
Initiator Target
Command
Read
Data
Transfer Ready
Write Data
Write Data
Optional
Transfer
Ready’s
Optional
Read
Data
Response
Response
Command Transfer
Initiator Target
Response Transfer
Initiator Target
Arb
Arb
Figure 9.
FC–SCSI exchanges, command and response transfers
6.4
Credit
The framing protocol must be concerned about how many frames one source N_Port can send to another with-
out overflowing the buffers in the receiving N_Port. To address this problem, there are two types of credit:
1. Buffer-to-buffer credit (BB_Credit). This type of credit is associated only with the immediate fiber exiting the
transmitter to the next receiver (F_Port or N_Port). This credit is managed by the R_RDY primitive signal
on a link.
2. End-to-end credit (EE_Credit). This type of credit is negotiated between a source N_Port and a destination
N_Port. This credit is managed using an acknowledgment (ACK) frame sent from the destination back to
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the source N_Port. This type of credit is not used in Class 3 therefore it is not applicable to Seagate drives.
30
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7.0
Classes of service (FC-2)
There are five classes of service currently available or being defined. Classes of service are simply different
communication methods used between nodes. Seagate drives use only Class 3; however, brief explanations of
the other classes are provided as well.
7.1
Class 1
Class 1 is like a direct face-to-face meeting with no interruptions or delays. It is a dedicated full-bandwidth con-
nection between two nodes.
Other Class 1 attributes
• Guaranteed delivery
• Frames are received in the order they are transmitted
• Usually uses the least overall bandwidth
• Very little software interaction
7.2
Class 2
Class 2 is like an electronic mail transaction where each message has an acknowledgment message sent from
the receiver to signal that the message was received successfully. This class of service allows one N_Port to
transmit consecutive frames to multiple destinations without establishing a dedicated connection with any spe-
cific N_Port and also allows one N_Port to receive consecutive frames from one or more N_Ports without hav-
ing established dedicated connections with any of them.
Other Class 2 attributes
• Confirmed delivery (the receiver sends an acknowledgment on receipt)
• Frames are not always guaranteed to be received in the order they are transmitted
• Can potentially use more bandwidth than Class 1 and latency may increase by waiting for acknowledgments
7.3
Class 3
Class 3 service multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N_Ports without acknowledg-
ment of receipt.
Seagate drives use Class 3 exclusively. Class 3 reduces the complexity of the ports and provides better perfor-
mance for disc applications.
Other Class 3 attributes
• Full duplex transfers may be used between two ports using Class 3; however, Class 3 operation does not
require half duplex operation.
• Acknowledge (ACK) buffer not required (no waiting for ACKs)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• EE_Credit not required
• Busy and Reject not needed due to alternate credit model
• Errors are recovered at the exchange level
7.3.1
Class 3 flow control
Class 3 flow control is a simple model which does not require EE_Credits. With Class 3, there is only buffer-to-
buffer flow control in one direction and there are no link level responses to Class 3 frames.
7.4
Classes 4 and 5
Classes 4 and 5 are being defined by Fibre Channel committees to aid audio and video applications.
Class 4 is similar to Class 1 in that a dedicated connection is established; however, with Class 4, the full band-
width is not available. Connections for other nodes connected may be assigned portions of the bandwidth.
Class 5 provides isochronous service through a fabric. A Class 5 node is guaranteed access through a fabric
at established time intervals.
32
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.0
FC Arbitrated Loop concepts
This section describes some basic Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop (FC-AL) concepts. Seagate disc drives sup-
port FC-AL as the topology for connectivity in Fibre Channel environments.
Fibre Channel is a serial data channel that provides logical point-to-point service to two communicating
devices. With FC-AL, you can have a maximum of one point-to-point circuit at any one time. When this circuit
is active, only two L_Ports are communicating, but up to 127 devices may be attached to and participating on
the same loop. All of the L_Ports that are on the loop but that are not one of the two communicating L_Ports
“see” all data transferred across the loop and retransmit this information so that the data reaches its intended
destination.
8.1
Arbitrated Loop physical address (AL_PA)
Each device communicating on an arbitrated loop must have an Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA).
The AL_PA is an 8-bit (1-byte) 8B/10B encoded value that is a valid data character. This 8-bit character, when
encoded to 10 bits, must have an equal number of 1’s and 0’s in the address to maintain neutral running dis-
parity. Neutral running disparity is required so that the AL_PA data character does not change the current run-
ning disparity of the current transmission word. There are 134 characters that result in neutral disparity. See
Table 12. Seven of the 134 neutral disparity characters are reserved (see Table 13 on page 35). This leaves
127 valid addresses.
Table 12:
D xx.y
xx
8B/10B characters with neutral disparity
y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hex value
00, 80, E0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
*
*
01, 81, E1
02, 82, E2
*
*
*
*
*
23, 43, 63, A3, C3
04, 84, E4
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
25, 45, 65, A5, C5
26, 46, 66, A6, C6
27, 47, 67, A7, C7
08, 88, E8
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
29, 49, 69, A9, C9
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 12:
D xx.y
xx
8B/10B characters with neutral disparity
y
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hex value
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
2A, 4A, 6A, AA, CA
10
11
12
13
14
2B, 4B, 6B, AB, CB
2C, 4C, 6C, AC, CC
2E, 4E, 6E, AE, CE
2E, 4E, 6E, AE, CE
0F, 8F, EF
*
*
*
*
*
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
*
10, 90, F0R
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
31, 51, 71, B1, D1
32, 52, 72, B2, D2
33, 53, 73, B3, D3
34, 54, 74, B4, D4
35, 55, 75, B5, D5
36, 56, 76, B6, D6
17, 97, F7R
*
*
*
*
*
*
18, 98, F8R
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
39, 59, 79, B9, D9
3A, 5A, 7A, BA, DA
1B, 9B, FBR
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
3C, 5C, 7C, BC, DC
1D, 9D, FDR
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
1E, 9E, FER
1F, 9F, FFR
13
19
19
19
13
19
19
13
Total
134
* character with neutral disparity.
Of the 134 neutral disparity characters, seven are reserved. This leaves 127 valid non-reserved addresses.
126 of these addresses may be used by NL_Ports and one (00) may be used by a FL_Port (if present).
34
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 13:
AL_PA addressing
Values (hex)
Use
00
Reserved for the FL_Port (if present)
01-EF
F0
Contains 127 valid addresses
Reserved for fairness
F1-F6
F7-F8
These values do not have neutral running disparity
Reserved for loop initialization
FB, FD, and FE Reserved for future use
FF
Reserved to address all ports in broadcast mode
In the parallel SCSI world, the higher the bus address, the higher the priority the device has. The opposite is
Table 14:
AL_PA value priorities
AL_PA value
Priority
00
01
EF
F0
Highest priority (assigned to the FL_Port if present)
Highest priority NL_Port (on a public loop)
Lowest priority NL_Port address
Used only by the fairness algorithm and has no priority
During loop initialization, each NL_Port interested in participating on the loop is assigned one of the 126 AL_PA
values. If an NL_Port is offline because its node is powered off, the port is considered a non-participating
NL_Port.
One more reason exists for an L_Port being in non-participating mode; you can place more than 127 L_Ports
on a loop, and, if this occurs, loop initialization permits only the first 126 NL_Ports and the first FL_Port to
acquire a valid AL_PA. The remaining L_Ports must wait for a position to open up to obtain a valid AL_PA.
An L_Port can get a valid AL_PA in four ways:
1. Assigned by the fabric (if present)
2. Use the previously-assigned address
3. Hard assigned by the backpanel
4. Soft assigned and acquired through the loop initialization process
The most common method that disc drives use is to have the backpanel provide a hard assigned address. This
is similar to setting a SCSI ID on a drive, but with Fibre Channel, the ID is set on the backpanel rather than the
drive. If, for some reason, a duplicate address is encountered when hard-assigned addresses are processed,
the drive will revert to acquiring a soft-assigned AL_PA during initialization. This insures that every node gets a
unique AL_PA.
A more detailed explanation of loop initialization is provided in the following section.
8.2
Loop initialization
Loop initialization is the process used to obtain or verify AL_PAs. Loop initialization occurs at power-up, when
a new node is inserted in the loop, or for error recovery.
During loop initialization, each NL_Port discovers that it is connected in an arbitrated loop topology and that
there may be multiple NL_Ports on the arbitrated loop. The procedure used for this discovery is called the loop
port state machine (LPSM). The FC-2 protocol is also used.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A buffer on the drive receives each of the following loop initialization frames: LISM, LIFA, LIPA, LIHA, LISA,
LIRP, and LILP. All other frames may be discarded if the L_Port’s buffer is full.
If the NL_Ports finds that there are not any more NL_Ports attached, but that there is only an F_Port or N_Port
attached, the NL_Port configures itself to operate as an N_Port by going into N_Port mode.
An L_Port begins the loop initialization procedure in the initializing state at the request of the node. In most
cases, the backpanel will be set to provide a hard assigned physical address which will not be changed by the
initialization process, unless duplicate hard assigned physical addresses are found. The AL_PA of the one
FL_Port (if present) is always 00h. All other AL_PA values will range from 01h - EFh.
Start_of_Frame delimiter (4 bytes)
SOFil
Frame_Header (24 bytes)
22xxxxxx
00xxxxxx
01380000
00000000
FFFFFFFF 00000000
where ‘xxxxxx’ is hex ‘000000’ for an FL_Port and hex ‘0000EF’ for an NL_Port.
Payload (12, 20, or 132 bytes)
8-byte Port_Name
Loop
Initialization
Identifier*
16-byte AL_PA bit map
128-byte AL_PA position map (1-byte offset followed by up to 127 AL_PAs)
*The loop initialization identifier is one of the following:
11010000h = LISM — Select master based on 8-byte Port_Name (12-byte payload with an 8-byte Port_Name)
11020000h = LIFA — Fabric Assigned AL_PA bit map (20-byte payload with a 16-byte AL_PA bit map)
LIFA is used to gather all fabric-assigned AL_PAs.
11030000h = LIPA — Previously-acquired AL_PA bit map (20-byte payload with a 16-byte AL_PA bit map)
LIPA is used to gather all previously-acquired AL_PAs.
11040000h = LIHA — Hard Assigned AL_PA bit map (20-byte payload with a 16-byte AL_PA bit map)
LIHA is used to gather all hard assigned AL_PAs (usually set with configuration jumpers
on the host backpanel).
11050000h = LISA — Soft Assigned AL_PA bit map (20-byte payload with a 16-byte AL_PA bit map)**
LISA is used to assign any remaining AL_PA bits.
11060000h = LIRP — Report AL_PA position map (132-byte payload with a 128-byte AL_PA position map)
LIRP is used to record the relative positions of all L_Ports on the loop.
11070000h = LILP — Loop AL_PA position map (132-byte payload with a 128-byte AL_PA position map)
LILP is used to inform all L_Ports of their relative positions on the loop
from the perspective of the loop master.
**LISA contains the AL_PA mapping field in byte 2 (01h) to indicate that all L_Ports are able to enter
their position into the LIRP AL_PA position map. The 01h value in byte 2 may be changed to 00h
to bypass the LIRP and LILP sequences.
Cyclic Redundancy Check (4 bytes)
CRC
End_of_Frame delimiter (4 bytes)
EOFt
Figure 10. Loop initialization sequences
36
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The loop initialization process begins when any NL_Port forces the loop into the INITIALIZING state. See Fig-
ure 11. This initializing port begins transmitting loop initialization primitive sequences (LIPs). Any NL_Port can
cause this by sending any of the LIPS listed in Table 15. All LIPs cause the 4-step initialization process to
occur. A loss of signal will also force the loop to initialize.
There are five Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP) sequences:
Table 15:
Loop Initialization Primitive (LIP) sequences
LIP Reason Code
Use
Description
F7, F7
Initializing LIP
Loop failure
Used when an L_Port wants to acquire an AL_PA.
F8, AL_PS
The originating L_Port has detected an input failure. The
AL_PS is the AL_PA of the L_Port.
F8, F7
Loop failure
The originating L_Port has detected an input failure but the
L_Port does not have an AL_PA.
F7, AL_PS
AL_PD, AL_PS
Performance degradation The originating L_Port has detected poor loop performance.
Example: The L_Port is unable to win arbitration.
Selective reset
The source L_Port (AL_PS) wants to reset the destination
port (AL_PD). All L_Ports complete loop initialization. The
selected L_Port performs a reset after loop initialization.
FF, AL_PS
Reset all
The source L_Port (AL_PS) wants to reset all other L_Ports
supporting LIP reset on the loop. All L_Ports complete initial-
ization. The L_Ports supporting LIP reset all (generally only
the targets in a storage implementation) perform a reset after
loop initialization.
The next L_Port in the loop receives the LIPs and transitions to the OPEN_INIT state and transmits LIPs to the
next L_Port on the loop. This cycle continues until the port that started the initialization process receives the
LIPs. It then also transitions to the OPEN_INIT state. This means all L_Ports on the loop are in the OPEN_INIT
state at this point.
Each port transmits a minimum of 12 LIPs and then transmits Idles for the AL_TIME (15 msecs). The L_Port
then transmit Loop Initialization Select Master (LISM) frames to select a loop master who will then control the
initialization process.
Loop initialization steps
There are four primary steps involved in initializing the loop.
1. Select a loop master based on the 8-byte port name (Loop Initialization Select Master—LISM).
2. Assign each port an arbitrated loop physical address (AL_PA). There are four ways a port can acquire an
AL_PA. These are listed below.
•
•
•
•
Fabric assigned (Loop Initialization Fabric Assigned—LIFA)
Previously acquired (Loop Initialization Previously Acquired—LIPA)
Hard assigned (Loop Initialization Hardware Assigned—LIHA)
Soft assigned (Loop Initialization Soft Assigned—LISA)
3. Generate AL_PA position map (Loop Initialization Report Position—LIRP).
4. Transmit completed AL_PA position map around the loop (Loop Initialization Loop Position—LILP).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Initialization Select Master (LISM)
12-byte payload
11010000
8-byte port name
The loop master is determined as follows:
• Each NL_Port selects an initial AL_PA of ‘EF’. The FL_Port (if present) selects an AL_PA of ‘0’.
• Each port transmits LISM with the D_ID and S_ID fields of the header set to its AL_PA. The payload is set to
the port name which includes the world wide name (WWN).
• Each port examines the payload in the inbound LISM. If it is greater than its own, the port transmits a new
LISM with its own port name in the payload. If it is less than its own, the port retransmits the received LISM.
If it is the same as its own, it becomes the loop master.
• The loop master sends ARB(F0) to purge the loop and to inform all other ports that a master has been
selected. When the master receives ARB(F0) on the inbound fibre, initialization proceeds to LIFA.
Loop Initialization Fabric Assigned (LIFA)
20-byte payload
11020000
16-byte bit map of AL_PAs
The loop master primes the bit map with zeroes (0) then sends the bit map around the loop in the LIFA pay-
load.
Example
The loop master places zeroes in the bit map corresponding to
each bit position.
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
... 128
AL_PA positions --
00 01 02 04 08 0F 10 17 ...
7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 ...
EF
00
Switch address --
Bit map content
L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
...
0
Any port which has an AL_PA assigned by the fabric will set a ‘1’ in the bit map at the position corresponding to
its AL_PA. If a ‘1’ already exists, no map entry is made.
38
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Initialization Previously Assigned (LIPA)
20-byte payload
11030000
16-byte bit map of AL_PAs
The loop master transmits the bit map resulting from the LIFA.
The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its previously acquired AL_PA is set. If not, the L_Port
sets it to ‘1’. If the L_Port’s bit has already been set by another port, it will attempt to assume a soft-assigned
AL_PA (LISA).
Example
The L_Port had a previously assigned AL_PA of 4 which was
not already set by another port, so it set the bit at position 4 to
‘1’.
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
... 128
AL_PA positions --
00 01 02 04 08 0F 10 17 ...
7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 ...
EF
00
Switch address --
Bit map content
L
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
...
0
The L_Port at AL_PA 4 claims its’
previously assigned address.
The L_Port then retransmits the LIPA frame.
Loop Initialization Hard Assigned (LIHA)
20-byte payload
11040000
16-byte bit map of AL_PAs
The loop master transmits the bit map resulting from the LIPA.
The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its hard address is set (usually using switches or jump-
ers). If not, the L_Port sets it to ‘1’. If the L_Port’s bit has already been set by another port, it will attempt to
assume a soft-assigned AL_PA (LISA).
Example
The L_Port had a hard address set by switch or jumper at
AL_PA 8 which was not already set by another port, so it set the
bit at position 8 to ‘1’.
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
... 128
AL_PA positions --
00 01 02 04 08 0F 10 17 ...
7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 ...
EF
00
Switch address --
Bit map content
L
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
...
0
The L_Port at AL_PA 8 claims its’
preferred (hard-assigned) address.
The L_Port then retransmits the LIHA frame.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Initialization Soft Assigned (LISA)
20-byte payload
11050100
16-byte bit map of AL_PAs
The loop master transmits the bit map resulting from the LIHA.
The L_Port checks to see if there are any free addresses left in the bit map by checking for the first available
‘0’. The L_Port sets it to ‘1’. If there are no zeroes in the bit map, all 126 NL_Port addresses have been taken
and the port is not allowed to actively participate in the loop.
Example
The L_Port saw that the first ‘0’ occurred in bit position 1, so it
changed that bit to a ‘1’ to effectively select ‘1’ as it’s AL_PA.
Bit position
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
... 128
AL_PA positions --
00 01 02 04 08 0F 10 17 ...
7E 7D 7C 7B 7A 79 78 77 ...
EF
00
Switch address --
Bit map content
L
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
...
0
First available ‘0’
changed to ‘1’.
The L_Port then retransmits the LISA frame.
Loop Initialization Report Position (LIRP)
132-byte payload
11060000
128-byte map of AL_PA physical positions
The LIRP and LILP sequences build a mapping between AL_PA values and participating L_Port positions. This
allows all L_Ports to know where all of the other AL_PA addresses are physically located on the loop.
To build this address map, the loop master primes the 128-byte position map with ‘FF’ in each position. The
loop master then sets byte 0 (the “counter” byte) of the position map to ‘01’ and places its own AL_PA in byte 1
and then sends the position map around the loop.
Each port increments the position counter (byte 0) by one and places its AL_PA at the map position indicated
by the counter. For example, the second device on the loop (with the loop master counted as the first device)
increments byte 0 by one to make byte 0 have a value of ‘2’ and then places its AL_PA in position 2 of the posi-
tion map.
Each port retransmits the LIPA frame until the map completes its journey to each of the devices on the loop
and gets back to the loop master. At this point, the LIRP process results in a position map containing the phys-
ical location and AL_PA of every device on the loop.
Example
This example position map shows that there are 6 ports on
the loop. The loop master has AL_PA ‘E8’. The first port after
the master on the outbound fibre has AL_PA ‘D6’ and the last
port on the loop before getting back to the master has AL_PA
‘08’.
Byte map content
06 E8 D6 E2 6A 5F 08 FF ... FF
40
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loop Initialization Loop Position (LILP)
132-byte payload
11070000
128-byte map of AL_PA physical positions
When the loop master gets the LIRP frame back from the loop, it contains the AL_PAs and physical location of
each participating port on the loop. The loop master retransmits the completed position map (now called the
LILP) to the next port on the loop. This informs all ports of the loop’s physical make-up and also makes it pos-
sible for each port to make a copy of the map before retransmitting it to the next port.
When the loop master gets the LILP back from the loop, it sends a CLS followed by Idles. All of the other ports
retransmit the CLS and transition to the Monitoring state. When the loop master gets the CLS back from the
loop, it removes it and then transitions to the Monitoring state. This signals the end of the initialization process.
Example
This example LILP map shows that there are 6 ports on the
loop. The hex values of the AL_PAs are in the appropriate
positions indicating the physical order of the ports on the
loop.
Byte map content
06 E8 D6 E2 6A 5F 08 FF ... FF
Detailed loop initialization explanation
1. Select initial AL_PA
Each FL_Port selects an AL_PA hex value of ‘00’.
Each NL_Port selects an AL_PA hex value of ‘EF’.
2. Select the loop master
1
Each L_Port continuously transmits a LISM loop initialization sequence with the D_ID and S_ID fields set
to hex ‘0000xx’ (where ‘xx’ is its initial AL_PA) and its Port_Name in the payload.
Each L_Port monitors its receiver and proceeds as follows:
a. If the L_Port receives a LISM loop initialization sequence that is the same as the one it transmits, it
becomes the loop master and continues at step 3.
b. If the L_Port received a LISM loop initialization sequence that is not the same as the one it transmits,
the L_Ports checks the D_ID and payload as follows:
i. If the L_Port is an FL_Port and the received D_ID = hex ‘000000’, the loop initialization sequence
is from another FL_Port. If its Port_Name is algebraically:
-
lower than the Port_Name in the payload, the FL_Port transmits a LISM loop initialization
sequence with the payload containing its own Port_Name.
-
higher than the Port_name in the payload, the FL_Port retransmits the same LISM that it
received and goes to the MONITORING state in nonparticipating mode (another FL_Port won
the role of loop master).
ii. If the L_Port is an FL_Port and the received D_ID is not equal to hex ‘000000’, the FL_Port dis-
cards the received sequence. This allows an FL_Port to become the loop master.
iii. If the L_Port is a NL_Port and the received D_ID equals hex ‘000000’, the NL_Port retransmits the
received Loop Initialization Sequence. This allows an FL_Port to become the loop master.
iv. If the L_Port is an NL_Port and the received D_ID is not equal to hex ‘000000’, the Loop Initializa-
tion Sequence is from another NL_Port. If its Port_Name is algebraically:
1
Frames are sent continuously because they may be discarded by any L_Port that does not have a receive buffer available
(flow control is not used during initialization).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-
-
lower than the Port_Name in the payload, the NL_Port transmits a LISM loop initialization
sequence with the payload containing its Port_Name.
higher than the Port_name in the payload, the NL_Port retransmits the received Loop Initial-
ization Sequence.
Each L_Port continues with steps 2a through 2d.
c. If the L_Port receives an ARB(F0), it continues at step 4.
d. If it receives anything else, the value is discarded and the port continues with steps 2a to 2d.
3. Loop master — transmit remaining Loop Initialization Sequences
a. The loop master continuously transmits ARB(F0)s until its receives its own ARBx (ARB(F0)).
b. The L_Port transmits the LIFA, LIPA, LIHA, and LISA loop initialization sequences. These sequences
Table 16:
Loop initialization sequence AL_PA bit map
Bits
3322
1098
2222
7654
2222
3210
1111
9876
1111
5432
11
1098
7654
0000
0000
0000
0000
3210
0000
0000
0000
0000
0
1
2
3
L000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
Word
FL_Port or F/NL_Port to indicate that the configuration has changed. Setting the L_bit implicitly logs
out all NL_Ports. Private NL_Ports are implicitly logged out since the public NL_Ports with which they
may have been communicating, may have a new AL_PA.
The loop master transmits the four loop initialization sequences that contain the 16-byte AL_PA bit
maps as follows:
LIFA
The L_Port primes the AL_PA bit map with binary zero (0) and sets the bit that corresponds to its Fab-
ric Assigned AL_PA to one (1). If the L_Port is an FL_Port, it sets the bit associated with AL_PA 00h.
The L_bit is set if this is the first initialization attempt of an FL_Port or of an NL_Port that has assumed
the role of an F/NL_Port.
LIPA
The L_Port primes the AL_PA bit map with the AL_PA bit map of the previous LIFA loop initialization
sequence. The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its previously acquired AL_PA is set.
If it is not set to 1, the L_Port sets the bit (unless a bit was set in LIFA); if the bit is already set to 1, the
L_Port assumes a soft assigned AL_PA.
LIHA
The L_Port primes the AL_PA bit map with the AL_PA bit map of the previous LIPA loop initialization
sequence. The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its hard assigned AL_PA is set. If it is
not set to 1, the L_Port sets the bit (unless a bit was set in LIFA or LIPA); if the bit is already set to 1,
the L_Port assumes a soft assigned AL_PA.
If ESI activity is underway when the request for the hard address is received, the drive shall use the
last known value of the hard address before the current ESI activity started. For more information on
ESI, refer to Section 10.5.
42
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LISA
The L_Port primes the AL_PA bit map with the AL_PA bit map of the previous LIHA loop initialization
sequence. The L_Port sets the first available bit to 1 (unless a bit was set in LIFA, LIPA, or LIHA) which
corresponds to its soft assigned AL_PA. If a bit was available, the L_Port adjusts its AL_PA according
to which bit it set. If no bits are available, the L_Port remains in the nonparticipating mode; the L_Port
may attempt to re-initialize at the request of the node. If the L_Port does not support the AL_PA posi-
tion mapping loop initialization sequences, it sets byte 2 of the loop initialization identifier to 00h.
c. When the loop master receives the LISA sequence, it checks the loop initialization identifier value. If
the value is 11050100h, the loop master transmits two additional loop initialization sequences as fol-
lows:
LIRP
The L_Port sets the AL_PA position map to all hex ‘FF’, enters an offset of 01h followed by its AL_PA.
For example, if AL_PA = 05h, the AL_PA position map contains 0105FFFFFF...FFh.
LILP
The L_Port transmits the AL_PA position map of the previous LIRP loop initialization sequence.
d. When the last loop initialization sequence (identifier = LISA or LILP) is returned, the loop master trans-
mits CLS to place all L_Ports into Monitoring state. When the loop master received CLS, the L_Port
makes the transition to the Monitoring state and relinquishes its loop master role. At this time, all possi-
ble AL_PA values have been assigned for the number of L_Ports and every L_Port that has a valid
AL_PA is in participating mode.
If any frame is received that is not formatted according to figure 10, the frame is discarded and the loop master
restarts initialization at step 3b.
The loop master uses the E_D_TOV timer to wait for each of the above loop initialization sequences and the
CLS. If the timer expires before each transmitted loop initialization sequence of CLS is received, the L_Port
goes to the Initializing state.
The L_Port continues at step 5.
4. Non loop master L_Port—select unique AL_PA
A non loop master L_Port retransmits any received ARB(F0)s and prepares to receive (e.g. empties its
receive buffers) and retransmits the following LIFA, LIPA, LIHA, LISA, LIRP, and LILP loop initialization
sequences followed by CLS. The loop initialization sequences contain a 16-byte AL_PA bit map in the pay-
LIFA
The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its fabric-assigned AL_PA is set. If it is not set to 1,
the L_Port sets the bit; if the bit is already set to 1, the L_Port assumes a soft-assigned AL_PA. The L_Port
retransmits the loop initialization sequence.
LIPA
The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its previously-acquired AL_PA is set. If it is not set to
1, the L_Port sets the bit; if the bit is already set to 1, the L_Port assumes a soft-assigned AL_PA. The
L_Port retransmits the loop initialization sequence.
LIHA
The L_Port checks to see if the bit that corresponds to its hard-assigned AL_PA is set. If it is not set to 1,
the L_Port sets the bit (unless a bit was set in LIFA or LIPA); if the bit is already set to 1, the L_Port
assumes a soft-assigned AL_PA. The L_Port retransmits the loop initialization sequence.
To get the hard address, the drive must abort all Enclosure Services Interface (ESI) activity that may be in
process. Both ESI initiated by a receive or send diagnostic command and Enclosure Initiated ESI will be
LISA
The L_Port sets the first available bit to 1 (unless a bit was set in LIFA, LIPA, or LIHA above) that corre-
sponds to its soft-assigned AL_PA. If a bit was available, the L_Port adjusts its AL_PA according to which
bit was set. If no bits are available, the L_Port remains in nonparticipating mode; the L_Port may attempt to
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
reinitialize at 10.3 at the request of the node. If the L_Port does not support the AL_PA position mapping
loop initialization sequences, it sets byte 2 of the loop initialization identifier to 00h. The L_Port retransmits
the loop initialization sequence.
LIRP
If LIRP is received, the L_Port reads the left-most byte (offset), increment it by one, store the offset, and
store its AL_PA into the offset position. The L_Port retransmits the loop initialization sequence.
LILP
If LILP is received, the L_Port may use the AL_PA position map to save the relative positions of all L_Ports
on the loop. This information may be useful for error recovery. The L_Port retransmits the loop initialization
sequence.
If any frame is received that is not formatted according to figure 10 and as specified in step 3 on page 42,
the frame is discarded. If a LIRP or LILP frame is received by an L_Port which does not support the AL_PA
position map, the frame is discarded.
Each L_Port uses the E_D_TOV timer to wait for each of the above loop initialization sequences and the
CLS. If the timer expires before each loop initialization sequence of CLS is received, the L_Port goes to the
Initializing state. One possible reason for this is that the loop master was removed from the loop.
When CLS is received, the L_Port retransmits CLS and goes to the Monitoring state in participating mode
(if it acquired a valid AL_PA).
The L_Port continues at step 5.
5. Select final AL_PA and exit initialization
a. If an FL_Port is in participating mode, it has completed initialization with an AL_PA of 00h and exits the
loop initialization.
b. If a private NL_Port is in participating mode, the NL_Port has completed initialization with an AL_PA in
the range of 01h - EFh and exits loop initialization. If during initialization, the NL_Port detected that the
L_bit (Login required) was set to 1, it implicitly logs out with all other NL_Ports.
c. If a public NL_Port is in participating mode, the NL_Port has discovered an AL_PA in the range of 01h
- EFh. If one of the following occurred, the NL_Ports implicitly logout with all ports and attempt a fabric
login to the address FFFFFEh - AL_PA 00h:
•
•
•
the NL_Port detected that the L_bit (login required) was set to 1 in a LIFA, LIPA, LIHA, or LISA
loop initialization sequence;
the NL_Port was unable to set to 1 its fabric-assigned AL_PA bit or its previously-acquired AL_PA
bit in the LIFA or LIPA loop initialization sequence (i.e., another NL_Port is using the AL_PA);
the NL_Port has not previously executed a fabric login.
Normal responses to a fabric login request are:
•
the transmitted OPN(00,AL_PS) and login extended link service sequence are returned to the
NL_Port. No L_Port on the loop has accepted this request. The NL_Port sets its native address identi-
fier to 0000xxh (where xx is its AL_PA).
If the NL_Port is capable of providing fabric services in the absence of an FL_Port (i.e., it recognizes the
well-known alias address FFFFFEh as well as its own native address identifier), this NL_Port (also known
as an F/NL_Port) recognizes OPN(00,x) in addition to its own AL_PA. If this is the first time that the
NL_Port is assuming the responsibility of an F/NL_Port, to ensure that all previous login requests are
reset, the F/NL_Port goes to the Initializing state (REQ(initialize)) and sets the L_bit (login required) to 1 in
the LIFA loop initialization sequence.
Note. To prevent another L_Port from winning arbitration, this F/NL_Port should not relinquish control of
the loop until it is prepared to receive OPN(00,AL_PS).
If the NL_Port is not capable of becoming an F/NL_Port, the NL_Port exits loop initialization.
•
the NL_Port receives an Accept (ACC) link service sequence. The NL_Port uses the D_ID in the ACC
sequence as its native address identifier and bits 7 - 0 of the D_ID as its fabric-assigned AL_PA. The
NL_Port compares the fabric-assigned AL_PA in the ACC sequence with the AL_PA acquired prior to
step 5. If they are equal, the NL_Port exits loop initialization. If they are not equal, the NL_Port goes to
the Initializing state (REQ(initialize)) to re-initialize and acquire the fabric-assigned AL_PA value.
44
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2.1
Loop initialization state machine
Start
Retry
Initializing
Send LIPs
* Exit
OLD-PORT
State
LIP Received
OPEN-INIT: Transmit received LIPs
Step (1)
Select
Initial AL_PA
LISM rcvd >
LISM xmit
Step (2)
Select Loop Master
LIP received
after AL_TIME
Transmit LISM
Receive LISM/ARB
Compare LISMs
LISM rcvd =
LISM xmit
LISM rcvd <
LISM xmit
Loop Master
Wait Master
LIP or LP_TOV
Transmit ARB(F0)
Receive ARB(F0)
Retransmit all
received frames
timeout
occurred
before ARB(F0)
rcvd
Step (3)
Step (4)
**Transmit LIFA
Receive LIFA
Receive LIFA
**Transmit LIFA
**Transmit LIPA
Receive LIPA
Receive LIPA
**Transmit LIPA
LIP or LP_TOV
timeout
LIP or LP_TOV
timeout
**Transmit LIHA
Receive LIHA
Receive LIHA
**Transmit LIHA
occurred
between
events
occurred
between
events
**Transmit LISA
Recive LISA
Receive LISA
**Transmit LISA
<Transmit LIRP>
<Receive LIRP>
<Receive LIRP>
<Transmit LIRP>
<Transmit LILP>
<Receive LILP>
<Receive LILP>
<Transmit LILP>
Transmit CLS
Receive CLS
Receive CLS
Transmit CLS
Notes:
CLS received
CLS transmitted
* Not supported by drives
covered by this manual.
AL_PA
no AL_PA
** The L_Port must set
the appropriate AL_PA bit
before transmitting the
Step (5)
No AL_PA was
Loop Initialization Sequences.
EXIT
available.
NL_Port:
WAIT and retry
< > implies that these are
optional.
Login if required
Figure 11. Loop initialization state machine
The loop initialization process is used whenever any unusual event occurs on the loop. One such event would
be inserting a new NL_Port into the loop. Invoking the loop initialization process permits the new NL_Port to
acquire an AL_PA so it can begin operations.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.2.2
Loop reinitialization
Loop reinitialization occurs when an L_Port is added to the loop, removed from the loop, or for error recovery.
ENTER HERE
REQ(initialize)
REQ(old-port)
INITIALIZATION
OLD-PORT
Received CLS
REQ(bypass L_Port)
MONITORING
REQ(arbritrate as x)
ARBITRATING
REQ(monitor)
(when allowed)
ARB_PEN = 1
Transmit CLS
Rcvd my ARBx
ARBITRATION
WON
XMITTED
CLOSE
TRANSFER
Transmit
CLS
Transmit OPNy|OPNr
OPEN
OPENED
Rcvd CLS
RECEIVED
CLOSE
ARB_PEND = 1
Received CLS
Received OPNy
Figure 12. Loop state machine (simplified)
8.3
Accessing another L_Port
Each port has its own private arbitration primitive (ARBx) signal. Each port uses this ARBx signal to arbitrate
for and win access rights to the loop. This must be done before communicating with another port.
When an L_Port is not communicating with another port, it is in a monitoring state to see if some other L_Port
is trying to communicate with it. The L_Port is also retransmitting the stream of transmission words it is receiv-
1
ing. If a port needs to communicate, it sends out its arbitration primitive signal by replacing the fill words
between frames. If the arbitration primitive signal (ARBx) travels completely around the loop without being
1
Fill words may be Idles, ARBx’s, or ARB(F0)’s. Fill words are transmitted between frames and may be deleted for clock
skew management purposes.
46
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
replaced, that port has won arbitration of the loop and is free to open the loop between its receiver and trans-
mitter and is also free to stop retransmitting received transmission words. This means the NL_Port is no longer
in repeat mode and all words transmitted on its outbound fiber are generated by the NL_Port.
When operating in full duplex mode, the port that wins arbitration sends out a special primitive signal called
OPNyx to select a destination port on the loop and to identify the port sending the OPNyx primitive signal. The
“y” value of OPNyx is the arbitrated loop physical address of the destination device (AL_PD). If a port receives
an OPNyx and recognizes its AL_PD, the L_Port opens the loop at its L_Port. This L_Port and the one that
sent the OPNyx begin normal FC-2 protocols.
When the port that won arbitration and sent the OPNyx to initiate communication between itself and another
L_Port wants to close communication with the port, it uses another primitive signal called close (CLS) to signal
the other port of its intent to close the loop. The receiving L_Port finishes its work and then transmits a CLS
back to the originating L_Port. At this point, the two ports return to the monitoring state, and other L_Ports can
start communicating.
When operating in half duplex mode, OPNyy only identifies the destination port; therefore, the sending port
cannot be determined.
8.3.1
Access fairness
So what happens when two or more ports happen to request access to the loop at exactly the same time? Or
what happens when one port has already won access to the loop and others then want to arbitrate to win
access? The answers lie in the access fairness algorithm that most NL_Ports on a loop use. This access fair-
ness algorithm ensures that all participating NL_Ports will have equal access to the loop. NL_Ports that use the
access fairness algorithm are called “fair” NL_Ports. Seagate Fibre Channel drives fully implement the access
fairness algorithm.
Remember that each L_Port can continuously arbitrate to access the loop. Each L_Port has a priority assigned
to it based on its’ Arbitrated Loop Physical Address (AL_PA). AL_PA “01” has the highest priority for an
NL_Port and AL_PA “EF” has the lowest priority (except for the special arbitration primitive signal ARB(F0) dis-
cussed below). See section 8.1 for additional information about AL_PAs. The access fairness algorithm cre-
ates an access window in which all L_Ports are given an opportunity to arbitrate and win access to the loop
regardless of its’ assigned priority. After all L_Ports have had an opportunity to win access to the loop, a new
access window is started; however, all L_Ports don’t have to actually choose to win access, they just have to
be given the opportunity to win access in each access window.
When a fair L_Port has arbitrated for and won access to the loop, that L_Port will not arbitrate again until it
receives at least one Idle. The time between the first L_Port to win arbitration and transmitting an Idle is an
access window. A special arbitration Primitive Signal (ARB(F0)) prevents the access window from being reset
too early.
When a fair NL_Port has arbitrated for and won access to the loop and does not detect that another L_Port is
arbitrating, it may keep the existing circuit open indefinitely or close the circuit and retain control of the loop
(without rearbitrating) to open another L_Port on the loop.
How does the open NL_Port know when another port is arbitrating? The open NL_Port transmits ARB(F0)
primitive sequences and monitors to see if its ARB(F0) is replaced by a higher priority address. Since xF0 is
the lowest-priority address, any other NL_Port that is arbitrating will replace the ARB(F0) with its’ own ARBx
(which will always be higher-priority than ARB(F0)) and the highest priority arbitrating L_Port will win arbitra-
tion. If the OPEN L_port receives the ARB(F0) back it knows that no other NL_Port is arbitrating for the loop.
Once an L_Port has won access to the loop, it may retain control of the loop indefinitely; however, if access is
denied longer than the Error Detect Timeout Value (E_D_TOV), the offended L_Port can reset the access win-
dow to force arbitration. When a Seagate drive is operating as a target, it closes the loop when it has transmit-
ted all of the frames it needed to send. Seagate drives do not hold the loop open to monitor the input stream for
ARBs.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a fair NL_Port has arbitrated for and won access to the loop and does detect that another L_Port is arbi-
trating, the NL_Port closes the loop at the earliest possible time and arbitrates again in the next access window
before opening a different L_Port.
8.3.2
Access unfairness
Some loops may require that certain NL_Ports have more access to the loop than just one access per access
window. Examples of this situation include an NL_Port for a subsystem controller or file server. Any NL_Port
can be initialized to not use the fairness algorithm. If this occurs, the NL_Port is called an “unfair” NL_Port. An
NL_Port can also be configured to be temporarily unfair.
When an unfair L_Port has arbitrated for and won access to the loop and does not detect that another L_Port
is arbitrating, that L_Port may keep the existing circuit open indefinitely or close that circuit and retain owner-
ship of the loop without re-arbitrating to open another L_Port on the loop.
When an unfair NL_Port controls the loops and detects that another L_Port is arbitrating, the unfair NL_Port
may close the loop at the earliest possible time.
If you have a public loop connected to a fabric, the participating FL_Port is always the highest priority L_Port
Note. There can be only one participating FL_Port on any one loop. Additional FL_Ports can be present,
but they will be in nonparticipating mode.
The FL_Port doesn’t use the access fairness algorithm because it must control communications with the
attached fabric. This means the FL_Port will always win arbitration.
8.3.3
Clock skew management
Each loop port receives an input stream from the port upstream that is based on the clock frequency of that
upstream device. The clock frequency of the upstream device may be slightly faster or slower than the fre-
quency the loop port is using to transmit data. Each loop port captures data using the receive clock frequency
and retimes it to its own transmit clock before forwarding the data. Over time, if the receive clock frequency is
faster than the transmit frequency, data will start backing up in the port. If the receive clock frequency is slower
than the transmit frequency, the port may run out of data.
To compensate for this difference in clock frequencies, each loop port contains an Elasticity (smooting) FIFO
(First In, First Out) buffer that allows words to be inserted or deleted as necessary to account for this difference
in clock frequencies. Only fill words such as Idles or ARB’s may be inserted or deleted during times when
frames or R_RDYs are not being transmitted. Each port originating frames is required to transmit at least six fill
words between frames. This gives all monitoring loop ports an opportunity to insert or delete the fill words. A
minimum of two fill words must be left between frames when it arrives at its destination.
8.4
Loop ports
A loop port (L_Port) is a port designed specifically to operate in a Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop topology.
NL_Ports have special additional functions which permit them to operate in the arbitrated loop topology as well
as in the point-to-point physical topology when attached to an N_Port or an F_Port. N_Ports are designed for
point-to-point physical topologies, and F_Ports are designed for fabric topologies.
8.4.1
Maximum number of NL_Ports
Up to 126 NL_Ports may be participating on a single arbitrated loop. There can be more than 126 NL_Ports
attached to the loop, but only 126 will be able to obtain a valid arbitrated loop physical address (AL_PA). Only
one (rare) or two NL_Ports communicate at any one time, except during loop initialization. Only one NL_Port
can send frames but several NL_Ports may copy that frame into their buffer.
48
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.4.2
Blocking switch emulation
When two NL_Ports open communication with each other (see the OPNyx discussion in Section 8.3), commu-
nication between other devices is effectively blocked (other than to retransmit frames or insert fill words). This
is known as a blocking environment since the two communicating ports block operation between any other
L_Ports.
8.4.3
Non-meshed environment
FC-AL is called a non-meshed environment due to the fact that there is only one route to any other port. A
meshed environment (like a fabric) is like a telephone system in which there are many routes possible between
two communicating entities.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8.4.4
Assigned AL_PA values
All AL_PAs that are used in the loop protocol are listed in table 12. The AL_PAs are assigned to the 16-byte
Table 17:
AL_PA mapped to bit maps
AL_PA
(hex)
Bit map
AL_PA
(hex)
Bit map
AL_PA
(hex)
Bit map
AL_PA
(hex)
Bit map
Word
Bit
Word
Bit
Word
Bit
Word
Bit
--
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
3C
43
45
46
47
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
51
52
53
54
55
56
59
5A
5C
63
65
66
67
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
71
72
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
73
74
75
76
79
7A
7C
80
81
82
84
88
8F
90
97
98
9B
9D
9E
9F
A3
A5
A6
A7
A9
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
B1
B2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
B3
B4
B5
B6
B9
BA
BC
C3
C5
C6
C7
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D9
DA
DC
E0
E1
E2
E4
E8
EF
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
00
01
02
04
08
0F
10
17
18
1B
1D
1E
1F
23
25
26
27
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
31
32
33
34
35
36
39
3A
8
8
8
8
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
Notes: ‘--’ is reserved for the L-bit (login required)
AL_PA = ‘00’ is reserved for the FL_Port.
50
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.0
Fibre Channel link services
Link service frames are used to perform functions at the Fibre Channel layer. They are used to establish the
operating parameters, perform channel level error recovery, and check the status of the physical link between
two devices. Link service frames are divided into two groups, Basic and Extended.
Navigation assistance
The field descriptions that are provided for most tables have sidebar labels
which identify the table they are associated with. This helps orient you when
nested tables occur within a section.
Sidebar example
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
1
Field name
The sidebar (black background with reversed text) identifies this field as being asso-
ciated with Table 1.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1
Basic link services
The drive supports the Abort Sequence (ABTS) and two basic services replies, Basic Accept (BA_ACC) and
Basic Reject (BA_RJT). All other basic link services are discarded by the drive. Basic link service functions are
identified by the R_CTL field of the header.
Table 18:
Basic link services header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
R_CTL
0
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
D_ID
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(MSB)
SEQ_CNT
(LSB)
OX_ID
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The address of the drive for ABTS. This value must match the current address of the drive. For the basic link service
replies, the D_ID is the address of the initiator.
52
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Set to 00h to indicate no optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
Set to 090000h for the ABTS. This indicates the ABTS is from the originator of the exchange, this is the last frame of the
sequence, and sequence initiative is transferred for the drive to send the reply back.
For the reply frames, the drive sets the F_CTL to 990000h. This indicates the frame is from the responder, this is the last
sequence, this is the last frame of the sequence, and sequence initiative is returned to the initiator.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The OX_ID for the sequence being identified by the basic link service.
Parameter
Not used for basic link services.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
The basic link service frame. See the description of each basic link service below for the R_CTL value.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the initiator that sent the frame for ABTS. For the basic link service replies, the S_ID contains the address of
the drive.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
Set to 0000h to indicate this is the first frame of the Fibre Channel sequence.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
Contains the last used SEQ_ID for the exchange for ABTS. The drive does not check the SEQ_ID as the entire exchange
(command) is aborted by the error recovery process. The drive returns the same SEQ_ID in the reply frame as received
from the initiator in the ABTS.
Type
00h
Used for all basic link services frames.
9.1.1
Abort Sequence (ABTS)
The Abort Sequence (ABTS) is sent by the initiator to abort a single SCSI exchange (command) or FC
exchange (one of the link service operations). The ABTS frame does not have a payload. All the information is
included in the header.
The R_CTL is 81h.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.2
Basic Accept (BA_ACC)
BA_ACC is sent by the drive in response to all correctly structured ABTS. If the ABTS identifies an exchange in
execution or buffered for execution, the drive will discard the exchange.
The R_CTL is 84h.
Table 19:
BA_ACC Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
SEQ_ID Valid
Last SEQ_ID
(MSB)
0
1
2
Reserved
3
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
OX_ID Aborted
RX_ID Aborted
5
6
7
8
Lowest SEQ_CNT
Highest SEQ_CNT
9
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Highest SEQ_CNT (Highest Sequence Count)
FFFFh.
Last SEQ_ID (Last Sequence Identifier)
Not used.
Lowest SEQ_CNT (Lowest Sequence Count)
0.
OX_ID Aborted (Originator Exchange Identifier Aborted)
The same value as received in the ABTS.
RX_ID Aborted (Responder Identifier Aborted)
FFFFh.
SEQ_ID Valid (Sequence Identifier Valid)
00h
Marks the Last SEQ_ID field as invalid. The SEQ_ID is not used because the error recovery procedure requires the
entire exchange (command) to be aborted.
54
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.1.3
Basic Reject (BA_RJT)
BA_RJT is sent by the drive in response to an ABTS with a RX_ID not set to FFFFh.
The R_CTL is 85h.
Table 20:
BA_RJT Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
Reserved
Reason Code
Reason Explanation
Vendor Unique
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Reason Code
03h
(Logical Error) is the only Reason code sent by the drive if the RX_ID sent with the ABTS is not FFFFh.
Reason Explanation
03h
No Additional Explanation. This is the only Reason Explanation code sent by the drive.
Vendor Unique
Not supported by the drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2
Extended link services
The type of extended link service is identified by the LS Command Code in the first word of the payload. The
R_CTL field of the frame header identifies whether the extended link service is a request or a reply to a
request. The accept for extended link services varies with the function. A description of the accept for each
request is included with the description of the request.
Table 21:
Extended link services header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
X
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
1
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
SEQ_CNT
OX_ID
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(MSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
56
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Table
number
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
Frame destination address.
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Set to 00 to indicate no optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
Set to 290000h for extended link service requests. This indicates the frame is from the originator of the exchange, this is
the last frame of the sequence, and sequence initiative is transferred for the responder to send the reply back.
For the reply frames, the F_CTL is set to 990000h. This indicates the frame is from the responder, this is the last sequence,
this is the last frame of the sequence, and sequence initiative is returned to the originator.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The drive sends 0000 to the OX_ID field in extended link services requests it originates. For extended link services replies,
the drive uses the OX_ID value received from the initiator.
Parameter
Not used for extended link services.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
22h
Extended link services and unsolicited control for extended link service request, PLOGI, PRLI, RLS, RRQ, and
PDISC.
23h
Extended link services and solicited control for replies, ACC and LS_RJT.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the originator of the frame. This address is used by the destination to return any responses that may be
required by the operation.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
Not checked by the drive. For extended link services replies and requests sent by the drive, SEQ_CNT equals 0000.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
Not checked by the drive. For extended link services replies, the drive uses the SEQ_ID value received from the initiator.
The drive sends SEQ_ID equal to FFh for extended link services requests it originates.
Type
01h
All extended link services frames.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.1
Port Login (PLOGI) (02x)
Port Login (PLOGI) is sent by the initiator to a drive to establish the Fibre Channel operating parameters. The
PLOGI causes any open exchanges (commands) the initiator may have queued in the drive to be discarded.
Table 22:
PLOGI Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
LS Command Code
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name
4-19
20-27
28-35
36-51
52-67
68-83
84-99
100-115
Node Name
Class 1 Service Parameters
Class 2 Service Parameters
Class 3 Service Parameters
Reserved
Vendor Version
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Class 1 and 2 Service Parameters
May be present in the PLOGI frame. The drive checks only for class 3 service parameters.
Class 3 Service Parameters
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
03h
PLOGI payload.
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name and Node Name
Used to identify the device. The device may have multiple Fibre Channel ports with each having a unique Port Name. The
drive is a dual-ported device.
The Port and Node Names in the PLOGI identify the initiator. The drive saves the Port Name of the initiator with the login
parameters. If a change of the Port Name/AL_PA address association is detected during a Port Discovery (PDISC), an
implicit logout occurs (any queued commands for the previous Port Name/AL_PA are discarded, the previous login is
cleared) and a LS_RJT is returned to the initiator.
The Port and Node Names in the Port Login Accept (PLOGI ACC) identify the drive. The drive uses a format for the Port
58
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 23:
Port/Node Name format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
1
0
(MSB
Network Address ID
N_Port Identifier
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Company Identifier Assigned by IEEE
Unique Drive Identifier Assigned by Seagate
Company Identifier Assigned by IEEE
This Seagate-unique value is registered with the IEEE.
N_Port Identifier
Used by the drive to identify the name of a specific port or node.
000h
100h
200h
Drive Node Name
Port A
Port B
Network Address ID
2h
Defines the name as the IEEE extended format.
Unique Drive Identifier Assigned by Seagate
Assigned by Seagate. Uniquely assigned to each disc drive.
Vendor Version
Vendor-unique.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 24:
N_Port Common Service Parameters
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
Highest ANSI FC-PH Version
Lowest ANSI FC-PH Version
(MSB)
0
1
2
3
4
Buffer to Buffer Credit
(LSB)
Contin
Increasing
Offset
Random
Relative
Offset
Valid
Vendor
Version
F_Port
Alternate
Credit
E_D_TOV
Resolution
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Model
Common Features
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dynamic
Half Duplex
Continuous
Increase
SEQ_CNT
Payload
Length
Reserved
0
0
(MSB)
Reserved
Receive Data Field Size
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
8
9
Total Concurrent Sequences
10
11
12
13
14
15
(MSB)
Relative Offset by Info Category
(MSB)
E_D_TOV (Pt to Pt)
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer to Buffer Credit
Not checked by the drive. The drive requires the Alternate Credit Model and assumes a Buffer to Buffer Credit of zero.
When the drive opens a device on the loop, it waits until it receives a R_RDY or a Close. The drive returns 0000 in the
accept.
60
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Features
This is a bit significant field which requests options that are used in all classes of service by initiator login. Below is a list of
the features and the drive requirements. The drive returns an LS_RJT to PLOGI requests that do not satisfy the require-
ments.
Table 25:
Common Features bits
Drive requirement
Feature
Continuously Increasing Offset Must be a one (1).
Random Relative Offset
Valid Vendor Version
F_Port (Fabric Port)
Alternate Credit Model
E_D_TOV Resolution
Dynamic Half Duplex
Not checked. Port Login Accept returns a value of zero (0). Not supported.
X
Must be a zero (0) to denote a N_Port.
Must be a one (1).
Not checked. Port Login ACC returns 0.
Not checked. Port Login ACC returns 0.
Continuous Increase
SEQ_CNT
Not checked. Port Login ACC returns 0.
Not checked. Port Login ACC returns 0.
Payload Length
E_D_TOV (Pt to Pt) (Error Detect Time Out Value)
This field is only for point-to-point connections and is not valid for loop operation.
Highest ANSI FC-PH Version and Lowest ANSI FC-PH Version
The highest and lowest version of the ANSI Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling standards supported by the drive.
A version level of 09h is defined for FC-PH, Rev. 4.3. A version level of 20h is defined for FC-PH-3, Rev. 9.4.
Earlier drives supported by this manual require 09h in the highest and lowest version fields. An LS_RJT will be returned in
response to any PLOGI that does not satisfy this requirement. Later drives do not check the version fields in PLOGI and
return 20h in the PLOGI ACC. The version fields are not considered an accurate indicator of functionality. Reference the
drive product manual for specific behavior.
Receive Data Field Size
In the common and class 3 service parameters. Current drives check this field for the range 256 < fs < 2112 and a multiple
of four bytes. For multiple frame sequences, all frames but the last frame of the sequence must be this size. The drive uses
the receive buffer field size in the class 3 parameters when it sends frames. The drive returns the receive buffer field size in
the class 3 parameters from the initiator in the PLOGI ACC.
Relative Offset by Info Category
Indicates on a bit position basis which categories (e.g., solicited control, data descriptor) support the relative offset in the
FC header. The drive does not require relative offset and does not check this field in the PLOGI. The drive sends Relative
Offset in FCP Data frames (it sets 02h, bit 1 set, in the accept to indicate Relative Offset is supported for solicited data, cat-
egory 0001b).
Total Concurrent Sequences
Number of concurrent sequences across all classes of service. Sequences are concurrent if they are open and delivery
verification has not been received. It is the initiator’s responsibility to not issue commands to the drive that will exceed the
initiator’s capabilities for concurrent sequences.
The drive returns FFh in Concurrent Sequences field of the PLOGI ACC payload.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 26:
Class Service Parameters
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
Class
Valid
Intermix
Mode
Stacked Connect
Request
Sequence
Delivery
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Service Options
Reserved
1
2
Initial Process
Associator
ACK_0
Capable
ACK_N
Capable
0
0
X_ID Reassignment
Reserved
Reserved
Initiator Control
Reserved
ACK_0
3
4
ACK_N
Capable
X_ID
Interlock
0
Categories per Sequence
Error Policy
Recipient Control
Capable
Reserved
Reserved
5
6
0
0
0
0
(MSB)
Reserved
Receive Data Field Size
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
0
8
9
Concurrent Sequences
N_Port End to End Credit
10
11
12
13
14
15
(MSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
Reserved
Reserved
Open Sequences per Exchange
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Concurrent Sequences
Must be greater than 0. The drive returns FFh in the PLOGI ACC.
62
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiator Control
The transmit capabilities of the initiator in the PLOGI. The drive returns an LS_RJT to PLOGI requests that do not satisfy
the drive’s requirements. The Initiator Control bits in the PLOGI ACC indicate the capabilities of the drive. The drive returns
zero (0) for all bits that are not applicable for class 3 services and for all reserved bits.
Table 27:
Initiator Control fields
Option
Drive requirement
X_ID (Exchange Identifier) Reassignment Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
00 Initial Process Associator not supported.
01 Initial Process Associator supported.
10 Reserved.
11 Initial Process Associator
Initial Process Associator
Values of 10 or 11 cause the Login to be rejected. Other values are
accepted.
ACK_0 (Acknowledge 0) Capable
ACK_N (Acknowledge N) Capable
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
N_Port End to End Credit
Not valid for class 3.
Open Sequences per Exchange
Must be greater than zero (0). The drive returns 01h in the PLOGI ACC.
The PLOGI ACC returns the drive’s parameters to the initiator. The PLOGI ACC Payload has the same definition as the
PLOGI Payload except the LS Command Code.
Receive Data Field Size
A class 3 service parameter. Current drives check this field for the range 256 < fs < 2112 and a multiple of four bytes. For
multiple frame sequences, all frames but the last frame of the sequence must be this size. The drive uses the receive buffer
field size in the class 3 parameters when it sends frames. The drive returns the receive buffer field size in the class 3
parameters from the initiator in the PLOGI ACC.
Recipient Control
Indicates the receive capabilities of the initiator in the PLOGI. The Recipient Control bits in the PLOGI ACC indicate the
capabilities of the drive. The drive returns zero (0) for all bits that are not applicable for class 3 services and for all reserved
bits.
Table 28:
Recipient Control fields
Option
Drive requirement
ACK_0 (Acknowledge 0) Capable
ACK_N (Acknowledge N) Capable
X_ID (Exchange Identifier) Interlock
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
00 Only discard supported.
01 Reserved.
10 Discard and process supported.
Error Policy
11 Reserved.
The drive supports only the discard error policy. It does not check the Error Policy
bits in the PLOGI as all FC devices are required to support the discard policy. The
drive returns 00 in the PLOGI ACC.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 28:
Recipient Control fields
Drive requirement
Option
The drive does not check the Categories per Sequence bits in the PLOGI. The
drive originates only one category per sequence. The drive returns 00 in the
PLOGI ACC to indicate it only supports receiving one category per sequence.
Categories per Sequence
Service Options
These bits are only checked for class 3 service parameters. The drive returns an LS_RJT to PLOGI requests that do not
satisfy the drive’s requirement.
Table 29:
Service Option fields
Drive requirement
Option
Class Valid
Must be a one (1).
Intermix Mode
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
Not applicable. Not valid for class 3.
Not applicable. Valid only for Fabric login.
Stacked Connect Request
Sequence Delivery
64
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 30:
Port Login Accept Payload (PLOGI ACC)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name
4-19
20-27
28-35
36-51
52-67
68-83
84-99
100-115
Node Name
Class 1 Service Parameters
Class 2 Service Parameters
Class 3 Service Parameters
Reserved
Vendor Version
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Class 1 and 2 Service Parameters
May be present in the PLOGI frame. The drive returns only class 3 service parameters. Class parameters for all other
classes of service are set to all zeros.
Class 3 Service Parameters
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
PLOGI ACC.
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name and Node Name
Used to identify the device. The device may have multiple Fibre Channel ports with each having a unique Port Name. The
drive is a dual-ported device.
The Port and Node Names in the PLOGI identify the initiator. The drive saves the Port Name of the initiator with the login
parameters. If a change of the Port Name/AL_PA address association is detected during a Port Discovery (PDISC), an
implicit logout occurs (any queued commands for the previous Port Name/AL_PA are discarded, the previous login is
cleared) and a LS_RJT is returned to the initiator.
The Port and Node Names in the PLOGI ACC identify the drive. The drive uses a format for the Port and Node Names
Vendor Version
Vendor-unique. Not supported.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.2
Port Logout (PLOGO) (03x)
Port Logout (PLOGO) is sent by the target in response to any frame from an initiator that has not completed
N_Port Login. PLOGO may also be sent by an initiator when it has no further need for a target.
Table 31:
LOGO Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Reserved
4
5
N_Port Identifier
6
7
8
Port Name
:
15
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
05h PLOGO Payload.
N_Port Identifier
The three-byte address used in the D_ID and S_ID fields of the frame headers.
Port Name
The unique eight-byte address assigned to the port.
Table 32:
PLOGO Accept
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
PLOGO Accept.
66
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.3
Fabric Login (FLOGI) (04)
Fabric Login (FLOGI) is sent by the drive to the fabric to establish the Fibre Channel operating parameters in a
public loop environment. When the drive sends FLOGI, any open exchanges (commands) queued in the drive
are discarded.
Table 33:
FLOGI Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name
4-19
20-27
28-35
36-51
52-67
68-83
84-99
100-115
Node Name
Class 1 Service Parameters
Class 2 Service Parameters
Class 3 Service Parameters
Reserved
Vendor Version
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Class 1 and 2 Service Parameters
The drive supports only class 3 service parameters. The drive sends all zeros for all other classes of service.
Class 3 Service Parameters
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
04h
FLOGI payload.
N_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name and Node Name
Used to identify the device. The drive is a dual-ported device.
The Port and Node Names in the FLOGI uniquely identify the drive and the port sending the FLOGI.
The drive uses a format for the Port and Node Names defined as the IEEE extended address. See Table 23.
Vendor Version
Vendor-unique. Not supported.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 34:
F_Port Common Service Parameters
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
Highest ANSI FC-PH Version
Lowest ANSI FC-PH Version
(MSB)
0
1
2
3
4
Buffer to Buffer Credit
(LSB)
Contin
Increasing
Offset
Random
Relative
Offset
Valid
Vendor
Version
F_Port
Alternate
Credit
E_D_TOV
Resolution
Multicast
Broadcast
Model
Common Features
5
6
Hunt
Groups
Dedicated
Simplex
0
0
0
0
Dynamic
Half Duplex
Continuous
Increase
SEQ_CNT
Payload
Length
Reserved
0
0
0
(MSB)
Reserved
Receive Data Field Size
7
8
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
:
Reserved
15
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer to Buffer Credit
The drive sets the Alternate Credit Model and sets the Buffer to Buffer Credit to zero.
68
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Common Features
This is a bit significant field which indicates the options that are supported by the drive. Below is a list of the features. The
drive returns an LS_RJT to FLOGI ACC for requests that do not satisfy the drive’s requirements.
Table 35:
Common Features bits
Drive
Feature
Support (FLOGI)
Requirement (FLOGI ACC)
Continuously Increasing Offset
Random Relative Offset
Valid Vendor Version
F_Port (Fabric Port)
Alternate Credit Model
E_D_TOV Resolution
Multicast
1
Must = 1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Not checked
Not checked
Must = 1
Must = 1
Not checked. Not valid for loop operation.
Not checked
Broadcast
Not checked
Hunt Groups
Not checked
Dedicated Simplex
Dynamic Half Duplex
Payload Length
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Highest ANSI FC-PH Version and Lowest ANSI FC-PH Version
The highest and lowest version of the ANSI Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling standards supported by Public loop
drives is FC-PH-3 Rev. 9.4
A version level of 20h is defined for FC-PH-3 Rev. 9.4.
Receive Data Field Size
The drive sends a receive buffer size of 2112 bytes.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 36:
Class 3 Service Parameters
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
Class
Valid
Intermix
Mode
Stacked Connect
Request
Sequence
Delivery
Dedicated
Simplex
Camp-on
Buffered
Class 1
Service Options
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Priority
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reserved
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Service Options
The following class 3 service parameters are sent by the drive.
Table 37:
Service Option Class 3 fields
Drive
Option
Support (FLOGI)
Requirement (FLOGI ACC)
Class Valid
1
Must = 1
Intermix Mode
0, not applicable or valid for class 3.
Not checked
Stacked Connect Request
Sequence Delivery
Dedicated Simplex
Camp-on
00, not applicable or valid for class 3. Not checked
1
Must = 1
0, Not applicable or valid for class 3
0, not applicable or valid for class 3.
0, not applicable or valid for class 3
0, not applicable or valid for class 3
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Buffered Class 1
Priority
70
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 38:
Fabric Login Accept Payload (FLOGI ACC)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
F_Port Common Service Parameters
Port Name
4-19
20-27
28-35
36-51
52-67
68-83
84-99
100-115
Node Name
Class 1 Service Parameters
Class 2 Service Parameters
Class 3 Service Parameters
Reserved
Vendor Version
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Class 1 and 2 Service Parameters
May be present in the FLOGI ACC frame. The drive returns only class 3 service parameters. Class parameters for all other
classes of service are set to all zeros.
Class 3 Service Parameters
F_Port Common Service Parameters
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
FLOGI ACC.
Port Name and Node Name
Used to identify the fabric. The device may have multiple Fibre Channel ports with each having a unique Port Name.
The Port and Node Names in the FLOGI ACC identify the fabric. The drive saves the Port Name of the fabric with the login
parameters. If a change of the Port Name is detected during loop initialization, an implicit logout occurs (any queued com-
mands for the previous Port Name/AL_PA are discarded, the previous login is cleared).
Vendor Version
Vendor-unique. Not supported.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.4
Process Login (PRLI)
Process Login (PRLI) is sent by the initiator to a target to establish the SCSI FCP operating features.
Table 39:
PRLI Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type Code
0
0
Type Code Extension
Est Image
Pair
0
0
0
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Resp Proc
Assc Valid
Reserved
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Originator Process Associator
Responder Process Associator
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
Data
Overlay
Allow
Initiator
Function
Target
Function
Command/
Data
Data/
Response
Mix
RD XFR
RDY
Disable
WR XFR
RDY
Disable
Reserved
Mix
Service Parameters
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Command/Data Mixed Allowed
1
The initiator sends data in the same sequence as the command. The drive does not support Command/Data Mixed.
It will accept a PRLI with the Allow bit set, but will return a 0 in the accept to indicate the function cannot be used.
72
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Overlay Allow
Not supported by the drive. The Data Overlay Allowed bit is not checked.
Data/Response Mix Allowed
1
Allows the drive to send the FCP RSP in the same sequence as the data. The drive does not support the Data/
Response Mix. It will accept a PRLI with the Allow bit set, but will return zero (0) in the accept to indicate the function
cannot be used.
Establish Image Pair
1
0
The drive establishes a SCSI login for the initiator.
The PRLI is only an inquiry of the drive’s support of the process. The accept is still returned, but the login is not
retained.
Initiator Function
Must be set to one (1) for the drive to accept the login request.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
20h
PRLI Payload.
Orig Proc Assc Valid (Originator Process Associator Valid)
Not supported by the drive. Not checked by the drive.
Page Length
Length of the service parameter page (in bytes). For a SCSI FCP service page, the length is 10h.
Payload Length
Length of PRLI payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parameter
page per PRLI.
The Payload Length must be 14h (20 decimal).
RD XFR RDY Disable (Read Transfer Ready Disable)
1
FCP_XFR_RDY will not be sent before read data. The drive requires this bit to be set to one (1).
Resp Proc Assc Valid (Responder Process Associator Valid)
Not supported by the drive. Not checked by the drive.
Target Function
May be set in addition to the Initiator Function bit. The drive does not check this bit.
Type Code
08h
SCSI FCP process as included in the frame header for FCP frames.
Type Code Extension
0
Not defined for SCSI FCP and must be set to zero (0).
WR XFR RDY Disable (Write Transfer Ready Disable)
0
The drive requires this bit to be set to zero (0). The drive also requires the use of the WR_XFR_RDY bit.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The PRLI recipient returns a PRLI Accept or a LS_RJT to a PRLI request. The PRLI Accept may indicate suc-
cess or failure of the process login request in the Response Code field. A LS_RJT is returned to a PRLI with a
basic format error, e.g. page length error, payload length, and type code.
Table 40:
PRLI Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
LS Command Code
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type Code
0
Type Code Extension
0
0
0
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Resp Proc
Assc Valid
Est Image
Pair
Reserved
Response Code
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Originator Process Associator
Responder Process Associator
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
Data
Overlay
Allow
Command/
Data/
Response
Mix
RD XFR
RDY
Disable
WR XFR
RDY
Disable
Initiator
Function
Target
Data
Function
Mix
Reserved
Service Parameters
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Command/Data Mixed Allowed
1
The initiator sends data in the same sequence as the command. The drive does not support Command/Data Mixed.
It will accept a PRLI with the Allow bit set, but will return a 0 in the accept to indicate the function cannot be used.
74
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Data Overlay Allow
Not supported by the drive. The Data Overlay Allowed bit is not checked.
Data/Response Allowed
1
Allows the drive to send the FCP RSP in the same sequence as the data. The drive does not support the Data/
Response Mix. It will accept a PRLI with the Allow bit set, but will return a 0 in the accept to indicate the function
cannot be used.
Establish Image Pair
1
0
The drive establishes a SCSI login for the initiator.
The PRLI is only an inquiry of the drive’s support of the process. The accept is still returned, but the login is not
retained.
Initiator Function
Must be set to one (1) for the drive to accept the login request.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
PRLI Accept Payload.
Orig Proc Assc Valid (Originator Process Associator Valid)
Not supported by the drive. Not checked by the drive.
Must be set to zero (0).
Page Length
Length of the service parameter page (in bytes). For a SCSI FCP service page, the length is 10h.
Payload Length
Length of PRLI payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parameter
page per PRLI.
The Payload length must be 14h (20 decimal).
Rd XFR RDY Disable (Read Transfer Ready Disable)
1
FCP_XFR_RDY will not be sent before read data. The drive requires this bit to be set to one (1).
Resp Proc Assc Valid (Responder Process Associator Valid)
Not supported by the drive. Not checked by the drive.
Must be set to zero (0).
Response Code
The result of the PRLI request.
Only codes 1 and 7 are supported by the drive.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved.
Request executed.
The target has no resources available for establishing the login.
Initialization is not complete. The PRLI may be retried.
The Image Pair does not exist.
The Image Pair cannot be established due to a predefined configuration.
Request executed conditionally. Some of the parameters were not able to be set to their requested state.
The destination port is unable to process multiple page PRLI request. The PRLI request may be retried as a single
page request.
Target Function
May be set in addition to the Initiator Function bit. The drive does not check this bit.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type Code
08h
SCSI FCP process as included in the frame header for FCP frames.
Type Code Extension
0
Not defined for SCSI FCP and must be set to zero (0).
Wr XFR RDY Disable (Write Transfer Ready Disable)
1
0
FCP_XFR_RDY will not be sent to request write data.
The drive requires this bit to be set to zero (0). The drive also requires the use of the WR_XFR_RDY bit.
76
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.5
Process Logout (PRLO)
Process Logout (PRLO) is sent by the initiator to a target to remove an existing SCSI login. This frees target
resources for use by other initiators.
Table 41:
PRLO Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
LS Command Code
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type Code
Type Code Extension
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Resp Proc
Assc Valid
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Originator Process Associator
Responder Process Associator
Reserved
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
21h PRLO Payload.
Page Length
Length of the service parameter page in bytes. For a SCSI FCP service page, the length is 10h.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Payload Length
Length of PRLO payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parameter
page per PRLO. The Payload Length must be 14h (20 decimal).
Process Associators
Not supported by the drive. The process associator fields are not checked by the drive.
Type Code
00h
08h
All FC-4 processes between the initiator and target are removed. The drive treats 08h and 00h the same.
The SCSI-FCP process will be removed.
Type Code Extension
Not defined for SCSI-FCP and must be zero (0).
78
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 42:
PRLO Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
LS Command Code
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
Reserved
Reserved
4
5
6
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Resp Proc
Assc Valid
0
0
Reserved
Response Code
Reserved
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Originator Process Associator
Responder Process Associator
Reserved
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h PRLO Accept Payload.
Page Length
Length of the service parameter page in bytes. For a SCSI FCP service page, the length is 10h.
Payload Length
Length of PRLO payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parameter
page per PRLO. The Payload Length must be 14h (20 decimal).
Process Associators
Not supported by the drive. The originator and responder process associator valid bits must be set to zero (0). The process
associator fields are not checked by the drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Response Code
The result of the PRLO request.
Codes 1, 4, and 7 are supported by the drive.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved.
Request executed.
Reserved.
Reserved.
The Image Pair does not exist.
Reserved.
Reserved
The destination port is unable to process a multiple page PRLO request. The PRLO request may be retried as a sin-
gle page request.
80
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.6
Third Party Process Logout (TPRLO)
Third Party Process Logout (TPRLO) is sent by the initiator to a target to remove an existing SCSI login. This
frees target resources for use by other initiators.
Table 43:
TPRLO Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
LS Command Code
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
4
5
6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Type Code
0
0
Type Code Extension
Third Party Third Party Third Party
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Global
Process
Logout
0
Resp Proc Orig N_Port
Assc Valid ID Validity
Reserved
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Third Party Originator Process Associator
Third Party Responder Process Associator
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
(MSB
Reserved
Third Party Originator N_Port ID
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Global Process Logout
00h
01h
Only the process login for the port identified in the N_Port ID field and type code is removed.
All process logins for the specified type code are removed.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
24h TPRLO Payload.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Length
The length must be in the range of 10h to 14h.
Payload Length
Length of TPRLO payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parame-
ter page per TPRLO. The Payload Length must be in the range of 14h to 18h.
Process Associators
Not supported by the drive. The originator and responder process associator valid bits must be set to zero (0). The process
associator fields are not checked by the drive.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID
This field specifies the N_Port address associated with the process login to be removed.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID Validity
00h
01h
Third Party Originator N_Port ID field is not valid.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID field is valid.
Type Code
00h
All FC-4 processes between the initiator and target are removed. The drive treats 08h and 00h the same.
The SCSI-FCP process will be removed.
08h
Type Code Extension
Not defined for SCSI-FCP and must be zero (0).
82
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 44:
TPRLO Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
LS Command Code
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Page Length
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Payload Length
Reserved
Reserved
4
5
6
Third Party Third Party Third Party
Global
Orig Proc
Assc Valid
Resp Proc Orig N_Port
Assc Valid ID Validity
Process
Logout
Reserved
Reserved
7
8
(MSB)
9
Third Party Originator Process Associator
Third Party Responder Process Associator
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Reserved
Third Party Originator N_Port ID
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Global Process Logout
00h
01h
Only the process login for the port identified in the N_Port ID field and type code is removed.
All process logins for the specified type code are removed.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h TPRLO Accept Payload.
Page Length
Length of the service parameter page in bytes. For a SCSI FCP service page, the length is 10h.
Payload Length
Length of TPRLO payload (in bytes). The count includes the LS Command Code. The drive supports one service parame-
ter page per TPRLO. The Payload Length must be 14h (20 decimal).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Process Associators
Not supported by the drive. The process associator fields are not checked by the drive.
Response Code
The result of the TPRLO request.
Codes 1, 4, and 7 are supported by the drive.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved.
Request executed.
Reserved.
Reserved.
The Image Pair does not exist.
Reserved.
Reserved
The destination port is unable to process a multiple page TPRLO request. The TPRLO request may be retried as a
single page request.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID
This field specifies the N_Port address associated with the process login to be removed.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID Validity
00h
01h
Third Party Originator N_Port ID field is not valid.
Third Party Originator N_Port ID field is valid.
84
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.7
Read Link Error Status Block (RLS)
Read Link Error Status Block (RLS) is sent by the initiator to request the drive to return the Fibre Channel link
error information. The error information is contained in the Link Error Status Block (LESB) that is returned in the
accept to the RLS. The drive maintains a separate LESB for each port.
Table 45:
RLS Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Reserved
4
5
6
7
Port Identifier
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
0Fh RLS Payload.
Port Identifier
This field is interpreted to determine whether to return the Link Error Status Block for port A or B.
0
Return the LESB for the port the RLS was received on.
Return the LESB for port A.
1
2
Return the LESB for port B.
Others
LS_RJT is returned with Invalid N_Port Identifier.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The RLS Accept includes the LS Command Code and the LESB. The LESB counts are not cleared by a reset.
There is no protocol for clearing the counts. The requester must compare the current values with those read
previously.
Table 46:
RLS Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
4
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
5
Link Failure Count
6
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
9
Loss of Synchronization Count
Loss of Signal Count
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error
Invalid Transmission Word
Invalid CRC Count
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Invalid CRC Count
Number of frames discarded due to CRC errors while the drive is in an “open” state. Reference the specific drive product
manual to determine if this field is supported.
86
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Invalid Transmission Word
Number of invalid transmission words received while in word sync. Reference the specific drive product manual to deter-
mine if this field is supported.
Link Failure Count
Number of times synchronization was lost for greater than R_T_TOV (Receiver Transmitter Timeout Value). A Link Failure
results in sending Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence (LIP).
Loss of Signal Count
Not supported.
Loss of Synchronization Count
Number of times the drive detects loss of synchronization.
Note. This count includes the Link Failure Count.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
RLS Accept Payload.
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error
Not supported.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.8
Reinstate Recovery Qualifier (RRQ)
The Reinstate Recovery Qualifier (RRQ) is sent by the initiator to the drive to indicate the Recovery Qualifier
(S_ID, D_ID, OX_ID, RX_ID, SEQ_ID, and SEQ_CNT) for an aborted exchange may be reused. The drive
allows reuse of the Recovery Qualifier immediately after sending the accept to an ABTS and does not require
RRQ. It returns accepts to all RRQs.
Table 47:
RRQ Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Reserved
4
5
(MSB)
6
Originator S_ID
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
OX_ID
RX_ID
9
10
11
12
:
Association Header (optional)
43
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Association Header
Not supported by the drive.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
12h RRQ Payload.
Originator S_ID (Originator Source Identifier)
Address identifier of the port that originated the exchange.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The RRQ is the OX_ID of the Recovery Qualifier.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
The RRQ is the RX_ID of the Recovery Qualifier.
88
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 48:
RRQ Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
Not supported by the drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.9
Port Discovery (PDISC)
Port Discovery (PDISC) is sent by an initiator to a drive after loop initialization to verify addresses have not
changed. The PDISC transfers the same information as the PLOGI except that the LS Command code in the
first word of the payload is 50000000h. The PDISC does not cause the open exchanges (commands) to be dis-
carded if the initiator address and parameters have not changed. For other contents of the payload, see Sec-
The accept for the PDISC is the same as for the PLOGI if the drive detects the initiator AL_PA (Physical
Address) or parameters have not changed from a previous login. Section 9.2.1, Port Login (PLOGI). If the drive
detects either the initiator addresses or parameters have changed from a previous login, the drive will not send
an accept. The drive will return a LOGO to indicate to the initiator a PLOGI is required.
90
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.10
Discover Address (ADISC)
Discover Address (ADISC) is sent by an initiator to a drive after loop initialization to verify addresses have not
changed or to verify the drive was able to obtain the hard address select through the interface connector (SEL
Lines) during loop initialization.
The ADISC allows the drive to compare the initiator’s address and Port Name with previous login values. If
after the loop initialization process the address and Port Name pair provided by the initiator does not match the
login values, the initiator is implicitly logged out.
Table 49:
ADISC Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Hard Address of Originator
Port Name of Originator
Node Name of Originator
Reserved
4
5
(MSB)
6
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
(MSB)
:
15
16
:
23
24
25
26
27
Reserved
(MSB)
N_Port ID of Originator
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Hard Address of Originator
This is the 24 bit NL_Port Identifier. The lower 8 bits are the AL_PA the initiator attempts to acquire in the LIHA sequence
during loop initialization. If the initiator does not have a hard address, this 24 bit field is zeros. If the initiator has a hard
address and is able to acquire it during the loop initialization process, the Hard Address and N_Port ID fields of the ADISC
will be the same.
If ESI activity is underway when the request for the hard address is received, the drive shall use the last known value of the
hard address before the current ESI activity started. For more information on ESI, refer to Section 10.5.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
52h
ADISC Payload.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Node Name of Originator
This is the unique 8 byte identifier for the initiator sending the ADISC. Refer to Table 23 for the format of the Node Name.
N_Port ID of Originator
This is the 24 bit NL_Port Identifier used in the S_ID of the ADISC. The lower 8 bits are the AL_PA the initiator acquired
during loop initialization.
Port Name of Originator
This is the unique 8 byte identifier for the initiator port sending ADISC. Refer to Table 23 for the format of the Port Name.
92
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 50:
ADISC Accept Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Hard Address of Responder
Port Name of Responder
Node Name of Responder
Reserved
4
5
(MSB)
6
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
(MSB)
:
15
16
:
23
24
25
26
27
Reserved
(MSB)
N_Port ID of Responder
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Hard Address of Responder
This is the 24 bit NL_Port Identifier. The lower 8 bits are the AL_PA the drive attempts to acquire in the LIHA sequence dur-
ing loop initialization. This field represents the address indicated on the drive interface connector. If the drive does not have
a hard address, this 24 bit field is zeros. If the drive has a hard address and is able to acquire it during the loop initialization
process, the Hard Address and N_Port ID fields of the ADISC Accept will be the same.
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
ADISC Accept Payload.
Node Name of Responder
This is the unique 8 byte identifier for the drive sending the ADISC Accept. Refer to Table 23 for the format of the Node
Name.
N_Port ID of Responder
This is the 24 bit NL_Port Identifier used in the S_ID of the ADISC Accept header. The lower 8 bits are the AL_PA the drive
acquired during loop initialization.
Port Name of Responder
This is the unique 8 byte identifier for the drive port sending the ADISC Accept. Refer to Table 23 for the format of the Port
Name.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.11
Report Node Capabilities (RNC)
Report Node Capabilities (RNC) is sent to a target node to request that the node report on its capabilities. The
node does this by returning a list of specifications and the supported revision level of the specification.
Table 51:
RNC Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
LS Command Code
Reserved
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Payload Length
(LSB)
RNC Flags
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Reserved
VU Information Length
8
.
.
Vendor Identifier - RNC Accept Payload only
Capability Entries
15
16
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Capability Entries
There may be from zero to n number of capability entries (see the table below for the format of capability entries). The limit
is that the payload length can not be greater than 256 bytes.
Table 52:
Capability Entries
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
Flags
Document Identifier
0
1
2
3
Low Revision - RNC Accept Payload only
High Revision - RNC Accept Payload only
Document Identifier
This number identifies the document. Valid document numbers range from:
01h through 05h
10h through 13h, and
20h through 27h
Flags
Bit 7 = 0 - report on this capability.
Bit 7 = 1 - Invalidate this capability selection.
Bit 6 = 1 - There is an extension on the capability entry. This is not supported. This bit must = 0.
94
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If either bit 5 or bit 4 = 1 - The Document Identifier is vendor unique. This feature is not supported.
Bits 4 and 5 must = 0.
High Revision - RNC Accept Payload only
This field contains the highest revision of the specified document that is supported. The values in the revision fields
represent decimal revisions between 0.0 (00h) and 25.5 (FFh).
Low Revision - RNC Accept Payload only
This field contains the lowest revision of the specified document that is supported. The values in the revision fields
represent decimal revisions between 0.0 (00h) and 25.5 (FFh).
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
02h
53h
RNC Accept Payload.
RNC Payload.
Payload Length
Length of the RNC Payload (in bytes). This count includes the LS Command Code.
RNC Flags
00h
80h
Report on all available capabilities.
Report on the selected capabilities listed in the capability entries.
Vendor Identifier - RNC Accept Payload only
Eight bytes of ASCII data identifying the vendor of the product (node).
VU Information Length
00h
Length of the Vendor Unique Information in the payload. This feature is not supported and this field must = 0.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.2.12
Link Service Reject (LS_RJT)
Link Service Reject (LS_RJT) is a reply to an extended link service request that has been rejected. A reason
code is included to communicate additional information about the reject.
Table 53:
LS_RJT Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
LS Command Code
Reserved
4
5
6
7
Reason Code
Reason Explanation
Vendor Unique
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LS Command Code (Link Services Command Code)
01h LS_RJT Payload.
Reason Code
03h
09h
Logical Error. This reason code is sent in response to rejected PLOGI and PRLI requests. See Reason Explanation
codes 01h, 03h, 07h, 09h, and 0Fh for PLOGI errors. For PRLI errors, the Reason Explanation code is 00, unspeci-
fied. The PRLI errors are Page Length Not 16, Type Code Not 8, and Payload Length Not 20.
Unable to perform command request. This reason code is sent in response to PLOGI. See Reason Explanation
code 29h.
0Bh Not supported. This reason code is returned in response to extended link service frames that are not supported.
Reason Explanation
The following reason code explanations are returned:
01h
03h
07h
Invalid options. Returned in response to a PLOGI if class 3 parameters are not valid.
Initiator Control class service options. Returned in response to a PLOGI if the initiator requires process associators.
Receive data field size. Returned in response to a PLOGI if the initiator sends a receive buffer size in the common
or class 3 service parameters that is not a multiple of four bytes or not in the range of 256–2112 bytes.
09h
Invalid service parameter—concurrent sequences. Returned in response to a PLOGI if the initiator sets zero (0)
concurrent sequences.
0Bh Invalid service parameter—credit. Returned in response to a PLOGI if the alternate credit model is not supported by
the initiator.
0Fh Invalid common service parameters. Returned in response to a PLOGI if common service parameters contain an
unsupported version of FC-PH, continuously increasing offset is not supported, or the F_Port bit is set.
1Fh Invalid N_Port identifier. This code is returned in response to a RLS if the port identifier value is not in the range of
0–2.
29h
Insufficient resources for login. This code is returned to PLOGI if the login table is full and no initiator can be logged
out (all logged in initiators have active commands in the queue). The PLOGI may be retried.
2Ch Request not supported.
Vendor Unique
Not supported by the drive.
96
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3
FC common transport
FC common transport (CT) provides a transport for service applications such as the fabric name server. The
type of FC common transport service is identified by the command code in the third word of the payload. The
R_CTL field of the frame header identifies whether the common transport service is a request or a response to
a request. The response for a common transport service varies with the function. A description of the accept
for each request is included with the description of the request.
Table 54:
Common transport header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(MSB)
SEQ_CNT
(LSB)
OX_ID
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Table
number
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
Frame destination address.
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Set to 00 to indicate no optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
Set to 290000h for CT service requests. This indicates the frame is from the originator of the exchange, this is the last
frame of the sequence, and sequence initiative is transferred for the responder to send the reply back.
For the reply frames, the F_CTL is set to 990000h. This indicates the frame is from the responder, this is the last sequence,
this is the last frame of the sequence, and sequence initiative is returned to the originator.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The drive sends 0000 to the OX_ID field in extended link services requests it originates. For extended link services replies,
the drive uses the OX_ID value received from the initiator.
Parameter
Not used for CT services.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
02h
03h
Unsolicited control for CT service request, PDISC.
Solicited control for responses.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the originator of the frame. This address is used by the destination to return any responses that may be
required by the operation.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
Not checked by the drive. For extended link services replies and requests sent by the drive, SEQ_CNT equals 0000.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
Not checked by the drive. For CT services requests, the drive uses the SEQ_ID value equal to FFh.
Type
20h
Fibre Channel services.
98
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9.3.1
Register FC-4 Types Name Service (RFT_ID)
Register FC-4 Types Name Service (RFT_ID) is used to register the drive’s Port_Identifier and FC-4 type
(SCSI-FCP) with the fabric name server.
Table 55:
RFT_ID Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
FC-CT Revision
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
4
5
6
7
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
FC Services Type Code (Directory Service Application)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FC Services Sub Type (Name Service)
0
0
0
0
Options
Reserved
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Command Code: RFT_ID
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
0
Reason Code
0
0
0
Explanation Code
0
0
0
Vendor Unique
0
0
0
Reserved
17
18
MSB
S_ID of Requesting N_Port
19
LSB
0
20*
21*
22*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
23*
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51*
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*Bytes 20-51 contain a bit map of supported FC-4 types. The 1 in byte 22 indicates type 08h (SCSI-FCP)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Command Code: RFT_ID
Table
number
0217h
RFC-4
Explanation Code
00h
Used only for reject responses.
FC-CT Revision
Revision level of the FC-CT.
FC Service Sub Type
02h
Name Service.
FC Services Type Code
FCh
FC Services.
Options
00h
Single Exchange.
Reason Code
00h
Used only for reject responses.
S_ID (Source Identifier) of Requesting N_Port
This field contains the Native Port IDentifier of the port registering its FC-4 types.
Vendor Unique
00h
Used only for reject responses.
100
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.0
Enclosure services interface (ESI)
ESI provides a path for the drive to input data from the enclosure and, optionally, transfer data to the enclosure.
All transfers between the drive and its enclosure are initiated by the drive in response to SCSI Send Diagnostic
and Receive Diagnostic Results commands from the host system.
There are two levels of ESI capability defined by specifications developed in the Small Form Factor (SFF)
industry group. These specifications use the –Parallel_ESI (–P_ESI) and the seven Select_ID (SEL_(6:0)) pins
in the drive interface connector to implement the ESI interface. The drives covered by this manual support both
levels of capability.
The first level of functionality is defined by the SFF 8045 specification. It provides the simple capability for the
drive to input up to seven signals of enclosure information at the direction of a Receive Diagnostic Results
command and return the status to the host.
The second level of functionality is defined by the SFF 8067 specification. It defines a bidirectional capability
that enables the drive to transfer information to and from its enclosure.
ESI data is transferred in diagnostic pages. The drive does not check the page contents to see if they are valid.
It only provides a transfer function between the host and the enclosure. Reference the SCSI-3 Enclosure Ser-
vices Command Set (SES) standard for details of the page contents.
10.1
Discovery process
The drive uses a discovery process to determine whether its enclosure supports an ESI and which specifica-
tion is supported. The discovery process is initiated for each Send Diagnostic and Receive Diagnostic Results
command with a Page Code of 01h to 0Fh. The discovery process is initiated for each retry on an ESI opera-
tion and for each enclosure initiated operation. Reference Figure 13 for a flow diagram of the discovery pro-
cess.
µ
The drive enters the discovery phase be asserting –Parallel ESI low. The enclosure has a maximum of 1 sec
to respond.
There are three reactions for the enclosure:
1. The SEL_(6:0) pins do not change.
2. SEL_(3:0) change to the binary complement of the address. This indicates that 8067 mode may be sup-
ported, but more discovery steps are required.
3. The SEL_(6:0) pins change, but SEL_(3:0) do not equal the binary complement of the address.
In cases 1 and 3, the 8067 support level is not available. The drive processes both cases as 8045 mode and
returns only the seven bits of ESI status. In case 1, the drive is not able to detect whether the enclosure does
not support ESI for this drive location or if ESI equals Select_ID. It is the host’s responsibility to determine
whether the returned information is ESI or Select_ID information. This may be accomplished by issuing a
Receive Diagnostic Results command to a device location with redundant ESI capability.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In case 2, the drive continues the discovery process. The drive waits up to 1 second for the enclosure to assert
the –ENCL_ACK (SEL_4)) low. The time is allowed for the enclosure processor to complete processing other
possible ESI requests through other devices.
If –ENCL_ACK is not asserted within one second, the drive assumes the enclosure has 8067 support but is not
responding. The SCSI diagnostic command is failed with ASC/ASQ 35 02. If ENCL_ACK is detected, the drive
asserts –DSK_WR and –DSK_RD, SEL(6) and SEL(5) respectively, low.
µsec.
The enclosure is required to respond to –DSK_WR and –DSK_RD by negating –ENCL_ACK within 100
The drive responds to the negating of –ENCL_ACK by negating –DSK_WR and –DSK_RD and moving to the
ESI command phase.
Assert -Parallel_ESI
Do bits
Do bits
SEL_(3:0)
invert in
<1
No
No
No
SEL_(0-7)
change
at all?
µsec?
Yes
Yes
The drive:
Does
-ENCL_ACK
assert in
<1.2
- assumes enclosure is
SFF 8045 w/o Parallel ESI.
- ASC/ASCQ = 35 01.
sec?
Yes
Assert -DSK_RD, -DSK_WR
The drive:
- assumes enclosure is
SFF 8067 post error 35 02.
Does
-ENCL_ACK
negate in
<1.2
No
sec?
Yes
Negate -DSK_RD, -DSK_WR
The drive:
- assumes enclosure is SFF 8045 with Parallel ESI.
- provides ESI information.
The drive:
- assumes enclosure is SFF 8067.
- continues command and data transfer.
Figure 13. Discovery process flow diagram
10.2
8045 mode
In 8045 mode, the enclosure places the binary complement of ESI on the Select_ID pins, SEL_(6:0).
102
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.2.1
8045 ESI pinouts
The table below is a mapping of the Select pins to the SFF 8045 ESI function. The sense of the ESI information
is complemented and the address function of the select pins is true. The drive returns the true state of the ESI
in the diagnostic page.
Table 56:
SFF 8045 ESI pinouts
Pin
ESI function
–ESI In 6
–ESI In 5
–ESI In 4
–ESI In 3
–ESI In 2
–ESI In 1
–ESI In 0
SEL 6
SEL 5
SEL 4
SEL 3
SEL 2
SEL 1
SEL 0
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3
8067 mode
Transfers on an 8067 interface are started by the drive pulling the –P_ESI pin low to enter the Discovery
phase. For each transfer, there are three phases:
1. Discovery
2. ESI command
3. Data
The data phase is either a read or write to the enclosure depending on the SCSI command.
-Parallel_ESI
1 µsec max
1 µsec max
SEL/ESI Bus
SEL_ID
Discovery
ESI Command
Read or Write
SEL_ID
Figure 14. ESI transfer phases
10.3.1
8067 ESI command
When the discover process determines 8067 mode is supported, the drive generates an ESI command to the
enclosure based on the SCSI Send Diagnostic or Receive Diagnostic Results command received from the
Table 57:
ESI command format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Page Code
0
1
2
3
Reserved
Send
(LSB)
(MSB)
Send Diagnostic Parameter Length
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
The Page Code is from the SCSI Send Diagnostic or Receive Diagnostic Results command diagnostic page that initiated
the ESI transfer.
Send
0
1
The ESI data transfer is from the enclosure to the drive.
The ESI data transfer is from the drive to the enclosure.
Send Diagnostic Parameter Length
For a Send Diagnostic command, the Send Diagnostic parameter length is the page length from the diagnostic page
header incremented by 4 to include the ESI command bytes, and reflects the total number of bytes that will be transferred
to the enclosure unless the transfer is truncated by a shorted allocation length in the CDB. The Send Diagnostic parameter
length is 0 for Receive Diagnostic Results commands.
104
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.3.2
8067 ESI interface pinouts
In 8067, the ESI function becomes a bi-directional interface. Three pins are defined for control functions and
the remaining four pins become a 4-bit nibble interface. Table 58 is a mapping of the Select pins to the 8067
ESI interface function. 8067 specifies that open-collector type drivers be used for signals on the P_ESI and
Select lines.
Table 58:
SFF 8067 ESI pinouts
Pin
ESI function
–DSK_WR
–DSK_RD
–ENCL_ACK
Data (3)
SEL 6
SEL 5
SEL 4
SEL 3
SEL 2
SEL 1
SEL 0
Data (2)
Data (1)
Data (0)
10.3.3
8067 information format
ESI in 8067 mode is transferred on the ESI interface a nibble (4 bits) at a time. Refer to Table 59 for the trans-
Table 59:
Bit order in 8067 mode ESI transfers
MSB
LSB
Bit order byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Transfer order on ESI interface
Bit order is ESI data
First Nibble
Second Nibble
D(2) D(1)
D(3)
D(2)
D(1)
D(0)
D(3)
D(0)
Table 60:
Byte order in 8067 mode ESI transfers
Byte order in SCSI transfer
Byte order is ESI transfer
0
1
..........
..........
n – 1
n – 1
n
n
first
second
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.4
ESI command transfer
-P_ESI
SEL_6/-DSK_WR
SEL_5/-DSK_RD
SEL_4/-ENCL_ACK
CMD
Nibble 1
CMD
Nibble 2
CMD
Nibble 8
SEL(3:0)/DATA
-SEL(3:0)
Discovery
ESI Command
Data
Figure 15. ESI command transfers
10.4.1 ESI read transfer
To receive data from the enclosure, the drive pulls –DSK_RD pin low to request information from the enclo-
sure. The enclosure responds by driving the Data pins with ESI and pulling –ENCL_ACK low to signal that the
data is valid. The drive strobes the data and allows high –DSK_RD to return high. The enclosure responds
to the –DSK_RD going high by allowing –ENCL_ACK to return to high. This sequence may be repeated for as
many bytes, two nibble each, requested by the host. The drive exits the ESI mode by not pulling –P_ESI low—
the pull up resistor returns –P_ESI to a high level.
-P_ESI
1 µsec max
SEL_6/-DSK_WR
SEL_6
SEL_5/-DSK_RD
SEL_5
SEL_4
SEL_4/-ENCL_ACK
Data
Nibble 1
Data
Nibble 2
Data
Nibble N
SEL(3:0)/DATA
SEL(3:0)
Figure 16. ESI reads
10.4.2
ESI write transfer
To send data to the enclosure, the drive places ESI data on the data pins and pulls –DSK_WR in low. The
enclosure strobes the data and responds by pulling –ENCL_ACK low to signal the drive it has taken the data.
The drive stops pulling –DSK_WR low, allows the pin to return to a high. The enclosure responds to the –
106
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DSK_WR going high by allowing –ENCL_ACK to return to high. This sequence may be repeated for as many
bytes, two nibble each, sent by the host. The drive exits the ESI mode by allowing –P_ESI low to return to a
high.
-P_ESI
1 µsec max
SEL_6/-DSK_WR
SEL_6
SEL_5/-DSK_RD
SEL_5
SEL_4
SEL_4/-ENCL_ACK
Data
Nibble 1
Data
Nibble 2
Data
Nibble N
SEL(3:0)/DATA
SEL(3:0)
Figure 17. ESI writes
10.5
Enclosure-initiated ESI transfer
Enclosure-initiated ESI (EIE) provides a means for the enclosure to request information or action from a drive
that supports an 8067 ESI interface. The transfer of information is independent of the SCSI interface. The for-
mat of the information, however, is similar to the SES information transferred on the SCSI interface for ease of
implementation.
10.5.1
EIE Discovery
A modified discovery phase is defined to allow the enclosure to initiate an information request and allow the
drive to detect the request.
If the drive supports detection of the Un-Mated condition of the START_1 and START_2 signals (case 1), and
supports Enclosure Initiated ESI (EIE) transfers, it monitors the START_1 and START_2 signals. When the
device detects a transition from one state to another, the drive will wait 100 ms and check the lines again. If
the lines are still at their new state, it will assert the –PARALLEL ESI line. To avoid the drive spinning down, it is
highly recommended that when the enclosure changes the lines to initiate an ESI transfer, it does not change
them to the Un-mated condition. If the drive is requesting an ESI transfer with a change in the Start lines, it will
return the START_1 and START_2 lines to their original condition a minimum of 100 nanoseconds before
asserting the –ENCL_ACK signal. The discovery phase continues. Figure 18 illustrates a successful discovery
of an EIE transfer request.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START_1/ START_2
–PARALLEL ESI
1 sec max device delay
100 nsec min enclosure delay
1 µsec max enclosure delay
–DSK_WR
–DSK_RD
D(0:3)
SEL_6
/
/
/
SEL_5
SEL_(0:3)
–SEL_ID(0:3)
–ENCL_ACK
SEL_4
/
1.2 second max enclosure delay
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Enclosure Services Processor negates START_1 and START_2 to indicate that it is requesting communi-
cation with the drive.
[2] The drive asserts –PARALLEL ESI to indicate it is ready to begin communication with the Enclosure Ser-
vices Processor.
[3] The drive determines that enclosure is SFF-8067 compliant by noting that SEL_(0:3) bits have inverted
and that SEL_5 and SEL_6 have the value that the drive is presenting.
[4] The Enclosure Services Processor returns START_1 and START_2 to Case 2, 3, or 4.
[5] The Enclosure Services Processor asserts –ENCL_ACK and discovery continues.
Figure 18.
Enclosure Initiated ESI Request
If discovery determines the enclosure does not support an 8067 capable interface or the enclosure does not
return the START_1 and START_2 signals to a valid mated condition, the device negates –PARALLEL_ESI
and prepares for power removal. Figure 19 shows a case where the enclosure does support 8067 ESI transfer
but the enclosure is requesting the drive to prepare for removal. See Table 115, Section 12.6.7 for more infor-
mation on the motor spin-up options.
108
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
START_1/ START_2
–PARALLEL ESI
1 sec max device delay
1 µsec max enclosure delay
5 ms
max drive delay
–DSK_WR
–DSK_RD
D(0:3)
SEL_6
/
/
/
SEL_5
SEL_(0:3)
–SEL_ID(0:3)
–ENCL_ACK
SEL_4
/
1.2 second max enclosure delay
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1] Enclosure Services Processor negates START_1 and START_2 to indicate that it is requesting communi-
cation with the drive.
[2] The drive asserts –PARALLEL ESI to indicate it is ready to begin communication with the Enclosure Ser-
vices Processor.
[3] The drive determines that enclosure is SFF-8067 compliant by noting that SEL_(0:3) bits have inverted
and that SEL_6 and SEL_7 have the value that the drive is presenting.
[4] The Enclosure Services Processor asserts –ENCL_ACK to indicate it is ready to begin communication
with the drive.
[5] The drive negates –PARALLEL ESI to end the ESI transfer and prepares for power removal.
Figure 19. Prepare for Removal
10.5.2
EIE operations
Following successful discovery of an EIE transfer request, the drive transfers an ESI command to the enclo-
sure using the write and command phase procedure defined in the SFF-8067 Specification for 40-pin SCA-2
Connector w/Bidirectional ESI, Rev. 3.0, section 6.4.2.2. The contents of the command are defined in 8.3. The
device follows the command with a read phase procedure as described in the SFF-8067 Specification for 40-
pin SCA-2 Connector w/Bidirectionally ESI, Rev. 3.0, section 6.4.2.3 to retrieve the transfer request information
from the enclosure.
If the enclosure is requesting information, the drive sends an ESI command with Send = 1 to indicate to the
enclosure it is ready to transfer the requested information. The command is followed by a write of the informa-
tion requested by the enclosure. This information is defined in the SFF-8067 Specification for 40-pin SCA-2
Connector w/Bidirectionally ESI, Rev. 3.0, section 8.3. Following the write, the drive negates –Parallel ESI to
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
–PARALLEL ESI
ESI INTF
SEL_ID
Discovery
Command
Read
Command
Write
SEL_ID
Figure 20. EIE Operation Phases
If any errors or timeouts are detected during the EIE operation, the drive aborts the operation and continues
normal operation. Errors are not reported.
10.5.3
Enclosure requested information
If the enclosure services interface transfer is initiated by the enclosure, the drive sends ESI Command Phase
information as defined in the SFF-8067 Specification for 40-pin SCA-2 Connector w/Bidirectional ESI, Rev. 3.0,
table 7-3 to the enclosure following successful discovery. The page code in the ESI command is 00h. This
page code is reserved for SCSI diagnostic commands between the host and the drive and will not appear in
ESI transfers initiated by SCSI commands. An exception to this is the ESI Data Validation (EDV) (see Section
10.5.3.9). The ESI command is a read operation, SEND=0 with parameter length of 6h. During the second
command phase in EIESI, if the drive is writing data, SEND=1 with the parameter length equal to the amount of
data being transferred in the subsequent write phase including the four bytes of header in the write data.
The enclosure responds to the ESI command from the drive with an ESI request as defined in Table 61. The
information requested by the enclosure is identified by the action code.
If the ESI request contains a valid Action Code and non-zero Parameter Length, the drive responds with a write
operation with the requested information. Table 63 defines the format of the Enclosure Initiated ESI (EIE) page.
Table 61:
Enclosure Request
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Code (00h)
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
Action Code
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Action Specific
3
4
5
(MSB)
Parameter Length
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
The information requested by the enclosure is identified by one of the action codes listed below.
00h
01h
02h
03h
Device Standard Inquiry Data (see Section 10.5.3.1).
Device Address (see Section 10.5.3.2).
Initiate Loop Initialization.
110
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note: The Initiate Loop Initialization Action Code (03h) does not include a transfer of information to the enclo-
sure. The Action Specific bits in the Enclosure Request define the operation to be performed. See Table 62.
04h
05h
06h
07h
08h
09h
Device Identification (see Section 10.5.3.4).
Link Status (see Section 10.5.3.7).
Spin-Down Control (see Section 10.5.3.8).
0Ah-0Fh Reserved.
Action Specific
The Action Specific byte determines behavior unique to each action code. Refer to Table 63 for the Action Specific byte for
Action Code 3 and Table 71 for the Action Specific byte for Action Code 8. If an Action Specific field is not defined for a
given action code, its value shall be zero.
Initiate LIP Action Specific Bits
Table 62:
Initiate LIP Action Specific Bits
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
LIP Loop B LIP Loop A
Note. The LIP Loop B and LIP Loop A bits are only defined as such if the Action Code field is set to 03 (Initiate Loop Ini-
tialization).
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LIP Loop A/B
1
The drive enters the Loop Initialization Process on either loop A, B, or both as indicated by these bits. The drive
originates a LIP(F7,AL_PS) if it has a valid AL_PA. The drive originates a LIP(F7,F7) if it does not have a valid
AL_PA.
Page Code
The Page Code identifies the page of enclosure data being transferred.
Note. The Page Code is always 00h for Enclosure Initiated ESI.
Parameter Length
The parameter length in the enclosure request is set by the enclosure to the number of bytes it is requesting including the
four header bytes. The drive sends the actual length of the requested information or the length identified in the request
parameter length whichever is less. If the parameter length is equal to 0, The drive ends the ESI transfer by negating
Parallel_ESI.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 63:
Enclosure Initiated ESI Page Format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (n – 3)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
.
(MSB)
Data
.
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
The Action Code requested by the enclosure.
Data
The first n - 4 bytes of ESI data.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Page Length
The length of the ESI page (n - 3 bytes).
112
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.1
Device Standard Inquiry Data page
Device Standard Inquiry Data page
Table 64:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (00h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (24h)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
.
(MSB)
Inquiry Data
.
39
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
00h
Device Standard Inquiry Data
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Inquiry Data
The first 36 bytes of Standard Inquiry data. Refer to Section 12.6 for a definition of this data. Note: the vendor specific, VS,
bit in byte 6 is not valid.
Page Length
24h
The length of the ESI page (in bytes).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.2
Device Address page
Device Address page
Table 65:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (01h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (24h)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
(MSB)
Node Name
:
11
Port A (01h)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
:
(MSB)
Port A Port_Identifier
(LSB)
0
Port A Position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(MSB)
Port A Name
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
:
(LSB)
Port B (02h)
(MSB)
Port B Port_Identifier
(LSB)
0
Port B Position
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
(MSB)
Port B Name
39
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
01h
Device Address
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Node Name
The 64-bit Fibre Channel unique Name_Identifier assigned to the drive.
Page Length
24h
The length of the ESI page (in bytes).
114
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Port_Identifier
The FC 24-bit address assigned to the port. The lower byte is the current FC-AL AL_PA for this port. If the port does not
have a Port_Identifier, a value of FF FF FFh is returned in the Port_Identifier field.
Port Name
The 64-bit Fibre Channel unique Name_Identifier assigned to the port.
Port Position
The offset value for this port's AL_PA in the FC-AL AL Loop Initialization Loop Position (LILP) Frame. If the port does not
have an AL_PA, a value of FFh is returned in the Port Position field.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.3
Loop Position Map page
Loop Position Map page
Table 66:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (02h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (m – 3)
(LSB)
Offset Port A (n – 4)
4
5
(MSB)
Loop Map Port A
.
.
n
(LSB)
(LSB)
Offset Port B (m – n + 1)
n + 1
n + 2
(MSB)
Loop Map Port B
.
.
m
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
02h
Device Address
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Loop Map Port x
This field contains the valid AL_PA entries from the payload of the FC-AL LILP frame. Only the valid AL_PA entries are
transferred to minimize the transfer time on the ESI interface. The maximum Loop Map size is 127 bytes.
Offset Port x
This field Indicates the number of bytes of offset from the FC-AL LILP frame in the Loop Map. A value of 00h indicates the
Loop Map is not available for the port.
Page Length
The total transfer length depends on the number of valid ALPA’s on the loop.
116
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.4
Device Identification page
Device Identification page
Table 67:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (04h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (n – 3)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
.
(MSB)
Device ID Data
.
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
04h
Device Identification.
Device ID Data
This field contains the same data as the SCSI Vital Product Data Device Identification page (83h). See Section 12.6.4 for
the complete SCSI Vital Product Data device Identification information.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Page Length
The length is (bytes) of the Device Identification Page. It will reflect if the allocation length is too small to transfer all the
page.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.5
Device Temperature page
Device Temperature page
Table 68:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (05h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (06h)
(LSB)
Temperature
Reserved
4
5
.
.
9
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
05h
Device Temperature
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Temperature
The value of the drive temperature sensor in degrees Celsius, offset by +20 degrees. The range expresses a temperature
between –19 and +235 degrees Celsius. The value of 0 is reserved.
Page Length
06h
The length of the ESI page (in bytes).
118
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.6
Port Parameters page
Port Parameters page
Table 69:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (06h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (06h)
(LSB)
Drive Capabilities
4
5
6
Reserved
Port A
LSP CHG
0
0
0
Port A
Link Fail
0
0
Port A Link Rate
Bypass
Reserved
7
8
0
Port B
Link Fail
Port B
Bypass
Port B Link Rate
Reserved
9
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
06h
Port Parameters.
Drive Capabilities
This is a bit-significant field that indicates which device control codes defined by SFF 8045 are supported by the drive. The
corresponding device control code is supported. For example, a one in bits 7 and 6 indicates that device control codes 7
and 6 are supported. This indicates the drive supports Fibre Channel link rates or 1 and 2 GHz.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
LSP CHG (Link Status Page Change)
This bit-significant field indicates which device control codes defined in SFF 8045 are supported by the drive.
0
1
The Link Status Page data has not changed.
The date in the Link Status Page has changed since the enclosure last read the Link Status Page.
Port Bypass
0
1
The drive is not requesting bypass.
The drive is asserting the –ENBL BYP CH signal in the SCA connector for the port.
Port Link Fail
0
1
The drive is not currently detecting a loop failure condition as defined in FC-AL for the port.
The drive is currently detecting a loop failure condition as defined in FC-AL for the port.
Port Link Rate
This field contains the value defined for the Fibre Channel link rate by the Device Control Code inputs in SFF 8045. For
example, seven represents 1 GHz.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.7
Link Status page
All fields are supported unless specifically listed as not supported under Field Definitions below.
When the drive changes a value in this page, the drive sets the LSP CHG bit in the Port Parameter page. The
enclosure may poll the Port Parameter page to determine if it needs to read and process the Link Status page.
When the Link Status page is read by the enclosure, the LSP CHG bit is cleared.
The fields listed in this section are extracted from the FC-PH defined Link Error Status Block (LESB).
Table 70:
Link Status page
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (07h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (60h)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
.
7
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Link Failure Count, Port A
8
.
11
Loss of Sync Count, Port A
Loss of Signal Count, Port A
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
12
.
15
16
.
19
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error, Port A
Invalid Transmission Word Count, Port A
Invalid CRC Count, Port A
20
.
23
24
.
27
28
.
31
LIP F7 Initiated Count, Port A (valid in loop mode only)
LIP F7 Received Count, Port A (valid in loop mode only)
LIP F8 Initiated Count, Port A (valid in loop mode only)
LIP F8 Received Count, Port A (valid in loop mode only)
Reserved
32
.
35
36
.
39
40
.
43
44
.
51
120
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 70:
Link Status page (Continued)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
52
.
55
(MSB)
Link Failure Count, Port B
Loss of Sync Count, Port B
Loss of Signal Count, Port B
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
56
.
59
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
60
.
63
64
.
67
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error, Port B
Invalid Transmission Word Count, Port B
Invalid CRC Count, Port B
68
.
71
72
.
75
76
.
79
LIP F7 Initiated Count, Port B
LIP F7 Received Count, Port B
LIP F8 Initiated Count, Port B
LIP F8 Received Count, Port B
Reserved
80
.
83
84
.
87
88
.
91
92
.
99
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
07h
Link Status.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Invalid CRC Count
The count of the number of write data frames that have been received with invalid CRCs on the port. These errors are only
detected when this drive is the target of the data transfer.
Invalid Transmission Word Count
The count of the number of invalid transmission words/running disparity errors that have been detected on the port.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Link Failure Count
Count of the number of Loss of Sync conditions that have occurred on the port which exceeded 100 ms in duration.
LIP F7 Initiated Count
Count of the number of loop initialization processes originated by the port with LIP – F7’s (Initialize LIP).
LIP F7 Received Count
Count of the number of loop initialization processes initiated on the port by receiving LIP – F7’s (Initialize LIP).
LIP F8 Initiated Count
Count of the number of loop initialization processes originated by the port with LIP – F8’s (Failure LIP).
LIP F8 Received Count
Count of the number of loop initialization processes initiated on the port by receiving LIP – F8’s (Failure LIP).
Loss of Signal Count
00h
The count of the number of Loss of Signal conditions on the port (not supported).
Loss of Sync Count
The count of the number of short (< 100 ms) Loss of Synchronization conditions that have occurred on the port.
Page Length
60h
The length of the Link Status page (in bytes).
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error, Port A
00h
The number of FC-PH defined Primitive Sequence Protocol Errors on port A. This field is not valid in loop mode
(not supported).
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error, Port B
00h
The number of FC-PH defined Primitive Sequence Protocol Errors on port B. This field is not valid in loop mode
(not supported).
122
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10.5.3.8
Spin-Down Control Action Specific Bits
Spin-Down Control Action Specific Bits
Table 71:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
Enable
Spin
Down
Enable
SpinDn
Ctrl
Read
Status
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Read Status
0
Device updates the state of the Enable Spin-Down and Enable SpinDn Ctrl as directed by the corresponding bits in
the request.
1
Device ignores the state of the Enable Spin-Down and the Enable SpinDn Ctrl bits in the request and returns the
current state of these enables without changing their state.
Enable Spin-Down
0
Device will not spin-down if Enable SpinDn Ctrl bit is 1, when it detects an Un-Mated Case on the motor control
lines.
1
Device performs a spin-down if the Enable SpinDn Ctrl bit is a 1 and the Un-Mated Case is present on the motor
control lines at the end of Enclosure Initiated ESI discovery. The bit will remain valid for a maximum of 3 seconds.
Enable SpinDn Ctrl
0
1
Un-Mated Case is present at the completion of Enclosure Initiated ESI discovery, this device performs a spin-down.
Device performs a spin-down if Enable Spin-Down bit is a 1 and the Un-Mated Case is present on the motor control
lines at the end of Enclosure Initiated ESI discovery.
After processing a Spin-Down Control Enclosure Request, the device responds with the resulting status of the Spin-Down
10.5.3.8.1 Spin-Down Control Status
Table 72:
Spin-Down Control Status
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (08h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (06h)
(LSB)
4
Enable
Spin-
Down
Enable
SpinDn
Ctrl
5 - 9
Reserved
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
08h
Spin-Down Control Status.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Length
06h
The maximum length of the ESI page (in bytes).
10.5.3.9
ESI data validation
ESI Data Validation (EDV) provides a mechanism to verify correct data is transferred over the ESI. This func-
tion is optional with support discovered by negotiation. When EDV is enabled, a checksum is calculated and
appended to each ESI transfer phase, ESI command, data, and Enclosure request.
The drive will request ESI data validation when the following occur:
1. The first host request to send or receive ESI data after a power on, a firmware download, or a drive reset
caused by receiving a LIP(AL_PD, AL_PS), a LIP(FF, AL_PS) or a command frame with Target Reset bit
set.
2. If EDV has already been negotiated and then a failure occurs during an ESI transfer which is not the result
of a checksum error being detected.
If ESI data validation is negotiated through EI ESI after events 1 or 2, but before a new ESI command is
received from the host, EDV will not be renegotiated when the host sends the command.
The Parameter Length field for the EDV command phase during EDV negotiation is 00h if the drive initiated
EDV because of a host initiated ESI operation. If the drive is sending an EDV accept because of an enclosure
initiated EDV request, the drive will set the Parameter length to 06h during the command phase for the EDV
accept frame.
For ESI transfers initiated by a SCSI command, the drive will attempt up to two retries if communication with
the enclosure initially fails or if the drive does not detect in discovery that the enclosure is SFF-8067 compliant.
This applies to all product families that support ESI. During each retry the drive attempts the entire transfer
beginning with discovery. If EDV has been negotiated with the enclosure previously, then EDV is renegotiated
after each failed attempt and before the next if the failure does not occur because of a checksum failure.
Table 73:
ESI data validation accept
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ESI Page (00h)
Action Code (09h)
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (02h)
(LSB)
1
4
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
5 - 9
Reserved
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Action Code
09h
ESI Data Validation Accept.
ESI Page
00h
Identifies the ESI page code used (00h).
Page Length
02h
The maximum length of the ESI page (in bytes).
124
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.0
SCSI operations
SCSI information is transported in Fibre Channel frames. All SCSI Fibre Channel Protocol (SCSI-FCP) opera-
tions start with an FCP CMND (Command) frame and end with an FCP RSP (Response) frame. Operations ini-
tiated with an FCP CMND may be SCSI commands such as read or write data. The operations also include
control operations called Task Management functions. Task Management functions provide reset and Task Set
(queue) control.
Navigation assistance
The field descriptions that are provided for most tables have sidebar labels
which identify the table they are associated with. This helps orient you when
nested tables occur within a section.
Sidebar example
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
1
Field name
The sidebar (black background with reversed text) identifies this field as being asso-
ciated with Table 1.
11.1
SCSI-FCP
SCSI-FCP is an FC-4 mapping protocol for applying the SCSI command set to the Fibre Channel. This proto-
col retains the half-duplex nature of parallel SCSI within each I/O operation. For example, a single operation,
such as a Read command, operates over a single port pair between the initiator and target.
11.1.1
FC-4 mapping layer
All devices communicating with a Seagate Fibre Channel disc drive must implement the SCSI-FCP mapping
protocol. The FC-4 mapping layer uses the services provided by FC-PH to execute the steps required to per-
form the functions defined by the FC-4.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.2
FCP CMND
The content of the FCP CMND frame is shown below. Details of the FCP CMND contents are in Tables 74 and
75.
SOFi3
Frame header
Payload
CRC
EOFt
Table 74:
FCP CMND frame header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEQ_CNT
OX_ID
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
126
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Table
number
00h
No optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The address of the drive. This value must match the current address of the drive.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
290000h for FCP CMND frames. This indicates the frame is the first sequence of the exchange and last frame of that
sequence. Sequence initiative is also transferred so the drive may respond to the FCP CMND.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
Assigned by the initiator. This value must be unique for all commands issued by this initiator to the drive. If duplicate
OX_IDs are detected by the drive for uncompleted commands from an initiator, an overlap command error will be returned.
Parameter
Not used for the FCP CMND.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
Set to Unsolicited Command data sequence for the FCP CMND frame.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
0000h value indicates that this is the first frame of the Fibre Channel sequence. The FCP CMND is a single frame
sequence.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
May be set to any value. The OX_ID field uniquely identifies each command between the initiator and the drive.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the initiator that sent the frame. This address is used by the drive to return any responses that may be
required by the operation.
Type
08h
All SCSI FCP frames must be set to this value.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 75:
FCP CMND Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
:
(MSB)
Logical Unit Number
7
8
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
9
0
Task Attribute
Reserved
10
11
Target
Reset
0
0
0
0
Clear Task Abort Task
0
Term Task
0
Clear ACA
0
Set
Set
Reserved
0
0
Read Data Write Data
Reserved
12
:
(MSB)
(MSB)
CDB
DL
27
28
29
30
31
(LSB)
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Abort Task Set
Clears only the queue of commands from the initiator originating the Abort Task Set.
CDB (Command Descriptor Block)
Always 16 bytes long. The actual contents depends on the command type. Unused bytes are not checked by the drive. If
any of the Task Management flags are set in byte 10, the CDB field is ignored.
Clear ACA (Clear Auto Contingent Allegiance)
When this bit is set to one (1) by the initiator that caused the ACA condition, the drive will clear the ACA condition and allow
the drive to resume normal processing of commands.
Clear Task Set
Clears the queue for all initiators. A Unit Attention condition is created for all initiators with commands in the queue other
than the initiator originating the Clear Task Set.
DL (Data Length)
The maximum amount of data (in bytes) to be transferred by the command specified in the CDB.
If the DL value is zero, no data will be transferred regardless of the CDB or Read/Write bits in byte 11.
If the DL value is less than the transfer length in the CDB, the drive will transfer up to the DL value, set the Residual Over
Run bit in the FCP RSP, and place the difference between the actual transfer and DL in the FCP RSP Residual Count field.
If the DL value is greater than the transfer length in the CDB, the drive will transfer the CDB requested length, set the
Residual Under Run bit in the FCP RSP, and place the difference between the actual transfer and DL in the FCP RSP
Residual Count field.
128
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the DL value equals the actual transfer length in the CDB, the Residual Over Run and Residual Under Run bits in the
FCP RSP will be cleared.
Logical Unit Number (LUN)
Addresses physical devices or virtual devices attached to a target.
0
Zero is the only valid LUN number for the drives supported by this manual.
The drive will reject Inquiry, Test Unit Ready, and Request Sense commands that select an invalid LUN by sending
Check Condition status in the FCP RSP frame. Inquiry commands will return Inquiry Data with the Peripheral Device
Type field set to Logical Unit Not Present (7Fh). Request Sense and Inquiry commands will send Check Condition
status in response to an invalid LUN selection. For all other commands, the Logical Unit field is not tested.
Read Data
Set to one (1) when the command specified by the CDB field will result in a data transfer to the initiator.
Target Reset
When the drive receives a Target Reset, it clears the command queue for all initiators and returns a Unit Attention status in
response to the next command received from all initiators. N_Port and Process Logins are preserved.
Task Attribute
Specifies the type of command queue management requested for the SCSI command in the CDB field of this FCP CMND.
The drive supports:
0
Simple Queue. Specifies that the I/O process be placed in the drive’s I/O process queue for execution. The order of
execution can be arranged by the disc drive in accordance with a performance optimization algorithm.
1
Head of Queue. Specifies that the I/O process be placed first in that logical unit’s queue for the initiator originating
the I/O process. An I/O process already being executed by the drive is not preempted. A subsequent I/O process
received with a Head of Queue attribute is placed at the head of the queue for execution in last-in, first-out order.
2
Ordered Queue. Specifies that the I/O process be placed in the disc drive’s I/O process queue for execution in the
order received, with respect to other commands with Ordered Queue attributes, except for I/O processes received
with a Head of Queue, which are placed at the head of the queue.
4
5
ACA Queue. When an ACA condition is active in the drive, only FCP CMNDs with the ACA Queue attribute received
from the initiator that originated the I/O process that caused the ACA condition will be executed.
Untagged Queue. Allows the drive to accept only one command from each initiator. If another command is received
for an initiator with an active command, the drive will return a check in the FCP RSP.
Term Task (Terminate Task)
Not supported by the drive.
Write Data
Set to one (1) when the command specified by the CDB field will result in a data transfer from the initiator.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.2.1
Command Descriptor Block (CDB)
A request by an initiator to a disc drive is performed by sending a Command Descriptor Block (CDB) to the disc
drive. For several commands, the request is accompanied by a list of parameters sent in FCP DATA frames.
See the specific commands for detailed information.
The Command Descriptor Block always has an operation code as the first byte of the command. This is fol-
lowed by command parameters (if any) and a control byte. For all commands, if there is an invalid parameter in
the Command Descriptor Block, the disc drive terminates the command without altering the medium. The for-
mat description for the Command Descriptor Block as supported by the disc drive is shown in Tables 77 and
78.
11.2.1.1
Operation Code
Code field. The three-bit Group Code field provides for eight groups of command codes. The five-bit Command
Code field provides for 32 command codes in each group. Thus, a total of 256 possible operation codes exist.
Operation codes are defined in Section 12.0.
For the disc drive, the group code specifies one of the following groups:
Group 3 - Reserved
Group 4 - Sixteen-byte commands
Group 5 - Twelve-byte commands
Group 6 - Vendor specific
Group 7 - Vendor specific
Table 76:
Operation Code format for CDB
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
Group Code
Command Code
130
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 77:
Bit
Typical CDB for six-byte commands
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
Operation Code
0
0
0
(MSB)
Reserved
Logical Block Address (if required)
2
3
4
5
(LSB)
Transfer Length (if required)
Control Byte
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control Byte
Logical Block Address
Operation code
Transfer Length
Table 78:
Typical CDB for ten-byte commands
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
Operation Code
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RelAdr
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Logical Block Address (if required)
Transfer Length (if required)
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
Control Byte
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control Byte
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Logical Block Address
Operation Code
RelAdr (Relative Address)
Transfer Length
11.2.1.2
Logical block address
The logical block address in the Command Descriptor Block begins with block zero and is continuous up to the
last logical block on drive.
Group 0 command descriptor block contains 21-bit logical block addresses. Groups 1 and 2 command descrip-
tor blocks contain 32-bit logical block addresses.
The logical block concept implies that the initiator and target have previously established the number of data
bytes per logical block. This may be established through the use of the Read Capacity command or the Mode
Sense command or by prior arrangement.
The maximum logical block address for the disc drive which is accessible by the initiator is defined in Read
11.2.1.3
Operation code
Operation codes are defined in Section 12.0.
11.2.1.4
Relative address bit
Relative addressing is a technique of accessing logical blocks relative to the logical blocks accessed in a previ-
ous linked command. Seagate fibre channel drives do not support relative addressing.
11.2.1.5
Transfer length
The Transfer Length field specifies the amount of data to be transferred, usually the number of blocks. For sev-
eral commands, the Transfer Length indicates the requested number of bytes to be sent as defined in the com-
mand description. For these commands, the Transfer Length field may be identified by a different name. See
the following descriptions and the individual command descriptions for further information.
Commands that use one byte for the Transfer Length field allow up to 256 blocks of data to be transferred by
one command. A Transfer Length field value of 1 to 255 indicates the number of blocks that are transferred. A
value of zero indicates 256 blocks.
Commands that use two bytes for the Transfer Length field allow up to 65,535 blocks of data to be transferred
by one command. In this case, a Transfer Length of zero indicates that no data transfer takes place. A value of
1 to 65,535 indicates the number of blocks that are transferred.
For several commands, more than two bytes are allocated for the Transfer Length field. Refer to the specific
command description for further information.
The Transfer Length field of the commands that are used to send a list of parameters to a disc drive is called
the Parameter List Length field. The Parameter List Length field specifies the number of bytes sent during the
FCP DATA sequences for the command.
132
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Transfer Length field of the commands used to return sense data (e.g., Request Sense, Inquiry, Mode
Sense, etc.) to an initiator is called the Allocation Length field. The Allocation Length field specifies the number
of bytes that the initiator has allocated for returned data. The disc drive terminates the data in the FCP DATA
sequence when Allocation Length bytes have been transferred or when all available data have been trans-
ferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
11.2.1.6
Control byte
Normally all zeros unless the extended features of ACA or Link commands are being used.
Table 79:
Control byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
LAST
0
0
0
0
0
NACA
Flag
Link
Reserved
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Flag
Drives supported by this manual do not use this bit.
Link
This bit is set to one (1) to indicate that the initiator desires an automatic link to the next command upon successful comple-
tion of the current command. If the link bit is one (1), upon successful termination of the command, the drive returns Inter-
mediate status in the FCP RSP frame.
Note. The OX_ID must be the same for all linked commands because it is considered the same exchange.
NACA (Normal Auto Contingent Allegiance)
1
Enables ACA handling rules for the command. If a Check Condition occurs during the processing of the command,
an ACA condition is entered.
0
Disables ACA handling rules for the command.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.3
FCP XFER RDY
The FCP XFER RDY (Transfer Ready) frame is sent by the drive when it requests data for a transfer to the
drive. Examples of commands resulting in data transfers to the drive are Write, Mode Select, and Write Buffer.
Table 80:
FCP XFER RDY header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEQ_CNT
OX_ID
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
134
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Table
number
00h
No optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The address of the initiator that originated the command for which the data is being requested.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
Set to 890000h for FCP CMND frames. This indicates the frame is sent by the responder of the exchange, not the origina-
tor, and the frame is the last of the Fibre Channel sequence. Sequence initiative is transferred so the initiator may send the
requested data.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The drive returns the OX_ID it received from the initiator with the FCP CMND.
Parameter
Not used for the FCP XFER RDY.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
Set to Data Descriptor.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
0000h
Indicates that this is the first frame of the Fibre Channel sequence. The FCP XFER RDY is a single frame
sequence.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
The drive sends FFh.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
Address of the drive.
Type
08h
For all SCSI FCP frames.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 81:
FCP XFER RDY Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
1
(MSB)
Relative Offset
Burst Length
Reserved
2
3
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
4
(MSB)
(MSB)
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Burst Length
The amount of data (in bytes) requested by the drive for transfer in this Fibre Channel sequence. The maximum length the
drive will request is the remaining data to complete the transfer, the Maximum Burst Size in the Disconnect/Reconnect
SCSI mode (page 2), or the maximum length that may be transferred in a Fibre Channel sequence, whichever is less.
Relative Offset
The byte offset of the requested transfer relative to the first byte of the data addressed in the CDB.
136
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.4
FCP DATA
The payload of FCP DATA frames transfer the user data associated with a command.
Note: EOFt is used on the last
frame of a sequence. Single
frame sequences end with an
EOFt. All other FCP DATA
frames use EOFn.
FCP DATA format
SOFi3
Frame Header
Payload (Data)
CRC
EOFn or EOFt
Table 82:
FCP DATA frame header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(MSB)
SEQ_CNT
(LSB)
OX_ID
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
RO
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
(LSB)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Table
number
00h
Indicates no optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The address of the drive if transfer is data to the drive and the address of the initiator originating the command if the trans-
fer is from the drive.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
This field is determined by the direction of the transfer and whether or not the frame is the last frame of the sequence.
For transfers to the drive, the initiator sets the F_CTL to 000008h or 000000h for all frames except the last frame of the
sequence. These values indicate the frame is from for the originator of the exchange (command) and whether the parame-
ter field is the relative offset. For the last frame of the sequence, the initiator sets the F_CTL to 09000Xh. This indicates the
frame is the last frame of the sequence and sequence initiative is transferred so the drive may send an additional FCP
XFER RDY or FCP RSP. The X represents the lower four bits of the F_CTL.
Table 83:
Frame Control bit descriptions
Bit
Description
3
2
Set to one (1) to indicate the parameter field is the relative offset.
0 (Reserved)
1 - 0
Number of fill bytes in the last word of the frame. The drive requires all data frames for transfers
to and from the media to be integer multiples of four bytes, so the drive requires the fill byte count
to be 0. For transfers that do not require media operations (e.g., inquiry data, read, and write
buffer), the drive supports the fill byte count.
For transfers to the initiator, the drive sets the F_CTL to 800008h for all frames but the last frame of the sequence. This
indicates the frame is from the responder of the exchange (command) and the parameter field is the relative offset. For the
last frame of the sequence, the drive sets the F_CTL to 88000Xh. This indicates the frame is the last frame of the
sequence. Sequence initiative is held for transfer of another sequence or the FCP RSP. The X has the same meaning as
defined above.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The value assigned by the initiator in the FCP CMND.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
Set to Solicited Data for the FCP DATA frame.
RO (Relative Offset)
The RO is a byte count offset between the first byte of the transfer address identified in the command and the first byte of
data in the frame payload. The drive sends a continually increasing RO on data frames when sending data. The drive does
not require or check the RO field on frames it receives. The drive uses the SEQ_CNT field to verify frames are received in
order.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
Set to 0000h on the first frame transferred. The SEQ_CNT is required to continually increase through a sequence and
across sequence boundaries if additional sequences are required to complete the transfer. The drive requires all received
frames to be in sequential order. Frames originated by the drive are sent in sequential order.
138
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
For transfers to the drive, the drive captures the SEQ_ID from the first frame of the sequence and requires all subsequent
frames of the sequence to have the same SEQ_ID. For transfers to the initiator, the drive sets the SEQ_ID to 00h for the
first data sequence of a command (exchange). The SEQ_ID is sequentially increased for additional data sequences, if
required, for the command.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the initiator originating the command if transfer is data to the drive and the address of the drive if the trans-
fer is from the drive.
Type
08h
For all SCSI FCP frames.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5
FCP RSP
An FCP Response (RSP) frame is returned by the drive for each FCP CMND operation unless the drive
receives:
1. A Clear Task Set
2. An Abort Task Set
3. A Target Reset
4. A Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence (LIP) Reset
5. An Abort Sequence (ABTS) for the command
Table 84:
FCP RSP header
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
R_CTL
D_ID
1
2
3
4
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
Reserved
S_ID
5
6
7
8
(MSB)
(LSB)
0
0
Type
9
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
F_CTL
(LSB)
0
SEQ_ID
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
DF_CTL
14
15
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SEQ_CNT
OX_ID
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
(LSB)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RX_ID
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Parameter
(LSB)
140
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DF_CTL (Data Field Control)
Table
number
00h
Indicates no optional Fibre Channel headers are used.
D_ID (Destination Identifier)
The address of the initiator that originated the command.
F_CTL (Frame Control)
Set to 990000h for FCP RSP frames. This indicates the frame is sent by the responder of the exchange, not the originator,
the frame is the last frame of the sequence (FCP RSP is a single frame sequence for this drive), and the sequence is the
last for the Fibre Channel exchange.
OX_ID (Originator Exchange Identifier)
The value assigned by the initiator in the FCP CMND. The OX_ID field uniquely identifies each command between the initi-
ator and the drive.
Parameter
Not used for the FCP RSP.
R_CTL (Routing Control)
Set to Command Status for the FCP RSP frame.
RX_ID (Responder Identifier)
Not used by the drive. The value of FFFFh indicates the RX_ID is not being used.
SEQ_CNT (Sequence Count)
Set to 0000h to indicate this the first frame of the Fibre Channel sequence. The FCP RSP is a single frame sequence.
SEQ_ID (Sequence Identifier)
Set to FFh by the drive.
S_ID (Source Identifier)
The address of the drive.
Type
08h
The value for all SCSI FCP frames.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 85:
FCP RSP Payload
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
0
:
(MSB)
Reserved
9
(LSB)
10
0
0
0
0
Sense
Length
Valid
RSP
Length
Valid
Resid
Under Run
Resid
Over Run
Reserved
SCSI Status
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
(MSB)
Residual Count
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Length of Sense Information
Length of Response Information
Response Information
(LSB)
(LSB)
24
:
31
(MSB)
(MSB)
32
:
51
SCSI Extended Sense Information
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Length of Response Information
1
The Length of Response Information contains the byte length of the FCP response information in the frame. Valid
lengths for the response information are 0, 4, and 8. The Length of Response Information field is always transferred
in the FCP RSP frame.
Length of Sense Information
1
The Length of Sense Information contains the byte length of the additional SCSI sense information in the frame. The
Length of Sense Information field is always transferred in the FCP RSP frame.
Residual Count
Only valid when a Resid Under Run or Resid Over Run bit is set. When this field is valid, the value is a byte count.
Resid Over Run (Residual Over Run)
1
The byte count in the Residual Count field, bytes 12–15, is the number of bytes not transferred because the length
of the transfer in the CDB exceeded the DL field in the FCP CMND.
142
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resid Under Run (Residual Under Run)
1
The number of bytes transferred was less than the DL of the FCP CMND by the byte count in the Residual Count
field, bytes 12–15.
Response Information
Value
00
Definition
Task Management function Complete or No Failure
FCP DATA length different than Burst Length
FCP CMND fields invalid
01
02
03
RO in the data frame header mismatch with FCP XFER RDY DATA RO
Task Management Function not supported
Task Management Function failed
04
05
Table 86:
Response Information format
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte (*)
0 (24)
:
(MSB)
Reserved
(LSB)
2 (26)
3 (27)
Response Information Code
(MSB)
4 (28)
:
Reserved (optional)
(LSB)
7 (31)
*Fibre Channel frame byte number shown in parenthesis.
RSP Length Valid (Response Length Valid)
1
Additional FCP response information is included in the payload. The length is given in the Length of Response Infor-
mation field, bytes 20–23.
SCSI Extended Sense Information
Additional information related to a Check Condition returned in the SCSI Status byte. See Table 87 on page 145.
SCSI Status
The ending (returned) status for FCP CMND operations with a valid CDB field.
Value
00h
Definition
Good. This status indicates that the target has successfully completed the command.
02h
Check Condition. Any error, exception, or abnormal condition that causes sense data to be sent, causes a
Check Condition status. The extended sense data the drive has regarding the nature of the condition will be in
the SCSI Sense Information in the FCP RSP frame with the Check Condition.
08h
10h
Busy. The drive is busy. This status is returned whenever a drive is unable to process the command from an oth-
erwise acceptable initiator. The normal initiator recovery action is to issue the command again at a later time.
Intermediate. This status is returned for every command in a series of linked commands (except the last com-
mand), unless an error, exception or abnormal condition causes a Check Condition status, a Reservation Con-
flict status or a Command Terminated status to be set. If this status is not returned, the chain of linked
commands is broken; no further commands in the series are executed.
18h
Reservation Conflict. This status is returned whenever a SCSI device attempts to access a logical unit or an
extent within a logical unit that is reserved with a conflicting reservation type for another SCSI device (see
Reserve and Reserve Unit command). The normal initiator recovery action is to issue the command again at a
later time.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28h
30h
Task Set (queue) Full. This status is implemented if tagged queuing is implemented. This status is returned
when a command is received and the command can not be accepted because the command queue is full. The
command is not executed.
ACA Active. This status is returned when an auto contingent allegiance (ACA) exists with another initiator. The
initiator may reissue the command after the ACA condition has been cleared.
Sense Length Valid
1
Additional SCSI sense information (extended sense data) is included in the payload. The length is given in the
Length of Sense Information field, bytes 16–19.
144
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5.1
Extended Sense Data format
The drive is capable of sending 18 bytes of extended sense data. The Extended Sense Data format is summa-
rized in Table 87. The 1s and 0s shown in the tables below represent the logical 1s and 0s as sent by the disc
drive.
Table 87:
Disc Drive Extended Sense Data Summary
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte (*)
0 (32)
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Validity Bit
0
0
Error Code
0
1 (33)
0
0
0
0
0
0
Segment Number
0
2 (34)
0
0
0
ILI
Sense Key
Filemark
EOM
3 (35)
(MSB)
4 (36)
Information
5 (37)
6 (38)
(LSB)
(LSB)
7 (39)
Additional Sense Length 10 decimal (Max)
8 (40)
(MSB)
9 (41)
Command Specific Data
10 (42)
11 (43)
12 (44)
13 (45)
14 (46)
15 (47)
16 (48)
17 (49)
Additional Sense Code (ASC)
Additional Sense Code Qualifier (ASCQ)
Reserved for Seagate internal use only
SKSV
Sense Key Specific
18-n
(50-n)
Product Unique Sense Data
*Fibre Channel frame byte number shown in parenthesis.
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Note. If the Sense Key, Additional Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier combination is 04/8086 (a Read
IOEDC error, see Tables 92 and 93), bytes 14-17 are the four IOEDC words associated with the IOEDC error.
Additional Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier
Provide additional clarification of errors when Sense Key is valid. Error code definitions are in Table 93. If the condition is
not reportable by the disc drive, the Additional Sense Code and Additional Sense Code Qualifier are set to No Additional
Sense Information (Code 0000).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Sense Length 10 (Max)
Specifies additional sense bytes are to follow. This is limited to a maximum of 10 (decimal) additional bytes. If the Allocation
Length of the Command Descriptor Block is too small to transfer all of the additional sense bytes, the additional sense
length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Command Specific Data
These four bytes contain data for the command.
EOM (End of Medium)
Always zero (0) for disc drives.
Error Code
70h
71h
Current error.
Deferred error.
These two error conditions are described in Section 11.5.1.2.
Filemark
Always zero (0) for disc drives.
ILI (Incorrect Length Indicator)
The requested (previous command) block of data did not match the logical block length of the data on the medium.
Information
If the validity bit is one (1), these bytes contain the unsigned logical block address associated with the sense key. Unless
otherwise specified, the Information bytes contain the address of the current logical block. For example, if the sense key is
Medium Error, it is the logical block address of the failure block.
Product Unique Sense Data
Not presently used.
Segment Number
Always zeros.
Sense Key
General error category. These are listed in Table 92. The code given in byte 12 provides additional clarification of errors.
See the Additional Sense Code field definition for related information.
SKSV (Sense Key Specific Valid) and Sense Key Specific
The additional sense bytes field may contain command specific data, peripheral device specific data, or vendor-specific
data that further defines the nature of the Check Condition status. See Section 11.5.1.1.
The Sense Key Specific field is defined by this specification when the value of the SKSV bit is one (1). The definition of this
field is determined by the value of the Sense Key field. This field is reserved for sense keys described in Table 92.
Note. During a format started by a Format Immediate command or a Device Self-test started by a Send Diagnostic com-
mand, bytes 16 and 17 become a progress indicator with values ranging from 0h to FFFFh. Value 0h indicates the opera-
tion just started and FFFFh indicates the operation is complete.
Validity Bit
1
0
The Information bytes (Bytes 3–6) are valid.
The Information bytes (Bytes 3–6) are not valid.
146
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11.5.1.1
Sense Key Specific Valid (SKSV) and Sense Key Specific
Refer to the appropriate tables in this section for sense key specific values.
Table 88:
Sense Key Specific reference tables
Sense Key field value
Error description
SKSV
See table
These fields point to illegal parameters in command descriptor blocks
and data parameters sent by the initiator.
05h (Illegal Request)
1
01h (Recovered Error)
04h (Hardware Error) or
03h (Medium Error)
These fields identify the actual number of retries used in attempting
to recover from the error condition.
1
1
These fields are only defined for the Format Unit command with the
Immed bit set to one (1).
02h (Not Ready)
Table 89:
Field Pointer bytes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
15
16
17
SKSV
(MSB)
C/D
Reserved
BPV
Bit Pointer
Field Pointer
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BPV (Bit Pointer Valid) and Bit Pointer
0
1
The value in the bit pointer field is not valid.
The bit pointer field specifies the bit of the byte designated by the field pointer that is in error. When a multiple-bit
field is in error, the bit pointer field points to the most significant (left-most) bit of the field.
C/D (Command Data)
1
0
The illegal parameter is in the command descriptor block.
The illegal parameter is in the data parameters sent by the initiator.
Field Pointer
The byte of the command descriptor block or of the parameter data that was in error. Bytes are numbered starting from
zero, as shown in the tables describing the commands and parameters. When a multiple-byte field is in error, the pointer
points to the most significant (left-most) byte of the field.
Note. Bytes identified as being in error are not necessarily the place that has to be changed to correct the problem.
SKSV (Sense Key Specific Valid)
This bit indicates whether the sense key specific data is valid.
0
1
Data is not valid.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 90:
Actual Retry Count bytes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
15
16
17
SKSV
(MSB)
Reserved
Actual Retry Count
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Actual Retry Count
Returns implementation-specific information on the actual number of retries used in attempting to recover an error or
exception condition.
Note. This field relates to the retry count fields specified within the Verify Error Recovery Page (07h) parameters of the
SKSV (Sense Key Specific Valid)
This bit indicates whether the sense key specific data is valid.
0
1
Data is not valid.
Table 91:
Format Indication bytes
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit
Byte
15
16
17
SKSV
(MSB)
Reserved
Progress Indication
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Progress Indication
Percent complete indication in which the returned value is the numerator that has 65536 (10000h) as its denominator. The
progress indication is based upon the total format operation including any certification or initialization operations.
Support or non-support for format progress indication is given in individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1.
Note. Bytes 18–n are not presently used.
SKSV (Sense Key Specific Valid)
This bit indicates whether the sense key specific data is valid.
0
1
Data is not valid.
148
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 92:
Applicable disc drive sense keys
Sense
Key
Description
0h
No Sense: There is no specific sense key information to be reported for the disc drive. This
would be the case for a successful command or when the ILI bit = 1.
1h
Recovered Error: The last command completed successfully with some recovery action per-
formed by the disc drive. When multiple recovered errors occur, the last error that occurred is
reported by the additional sense bytes. Note: For some Mode settings, the last command may
have terminated before completing.
2h
3h
4h
5h
Not Ready: Indicates the logical unit addressed cannot be accessed. Operator intervention may
be required to correct this condition.
Medium Error: Indicates the command terminated with a nonrecovered error condition, probably
caused by a flaw in the medium or an error in the recorded data.
Hardware Error: Indicates the disc drive detected a nonrecoverable hardware failure while per-
forming the command or during a self-test. This includes controller failure, device failure, etc.
Illegal Request: Indicates an illegal parameter in the command descriptor block or in the addi-
tional parameters supplied as data for some commands (Format Unit, Mode Select, etc.). If the
disc drive detects an invalid parameter in the Command Descriptor Block, it terminates the com-
mand without altering the medium. If the disc drive detects an invalid parameter in the additional
parameters supplied as data, the disc drive may have already altered the medium. This sense
key may also indicate that an invalid Identify message was received. This could also indicate an
attempt to write past the last logical block.
6h
7h
detailed information about the Unit Attention condition.
Data Protect: Indicates that a command that reads or writes the medium was attempted on a
block that is protected from this operation. The read or write operation is not performed.
9h
Firmware Error: Vendor-specific sense key.
Bh
Aborted Command: Indicates the disc drive aborted the command. The initiator may be able to
recover by trying the command again.
Ch
Dh
Equal: Indicates a Search Data command has satisfied an equal comparison.
Volume Overflow: Indicates a buffered peripheral device has reached the end of medium parti-
tion and data remains in the buffer that has not been written to the medium.
Eh
Miscompare: Indicates that the source data did not match the data read from the medium.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 93:
Error codes for bytes 12 and 13 of sense data (values are in hexadecimal)
Byte 12
(ASC)
Byte 13
Description
(ASCQ)
00
01
02
03
04
04
04
04
04
08
08
09
09
09
0A
0C
0C
0C
10
11
11
12
12
12
14
15
16
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
04
00
01
00
01
04
00
00
01
02
00
00
04
00
01
02
01
01
00
01
02
03
06
00
01
02
05
No additional sense information
No index/sector signals found
No seek complete (no drive command complete)
Peripheral device write fault
Logical unit (drive) not ready, cause not reportable
Logical unit (drive) not ready, becoming ready
Logical unit (drive) not ready, initializing command (start unit) required
Logical unit (drive) not ready, manual intervention required
Logical unit (drive) not ready, format in progress
Drive communications failure
Drive communications timeout
Track following error
Write fault status during read
Head select fault
Error log overflow
Write error
Write error recovered with auto reallocation
Write error – auto reallocation failed
ID CRC or ECC error 11 00 unrecovered read error
Unrecovered read error
Unrecovered read error – auto reallocation failed
Address mark not found for ID field
Recovered data using headerless retry without ECC using previous sector ID
Recovered data using headerless retry with ECC using previous sector ID
Record not found
Mechanical positioning error
Data synchronization mark missing or incorrect
Recovered data using retries
Recovered data using positive offset
Recovered data using negative offset
Recovered data without ECC – data auto reallocated
Recovered data using ECC, no retries attempted
Recovered data using ECC after normal retries
Recovered data with ECC and/or retries, data auto-reallocated
Recovered data with ECC and/or retries, recommend reassignment
150
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 93:
Error codes for bytes 12 and 13 of sense data (values are in hexadecimal) (Continued)
Byte 12
(ASC)
Byte 13
Description
(ASCQ)
19
1A
1C
1D
20
21
24
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
27
29
29
29
29
29
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2A
2C
2F
31
31
31
32
32
32
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
02
03
04
97
98
99
00
00
01
02
03
04
00
01
02
03
04
05
00
00
00
01
91
00
01
02
Defect list error
Parameter list length error
Defect list not found
Miscompare during verify operation
Invalid command operation code
Logical block address out of range
Invalid field in CDB
Logical unit number not supported
Invalid field in parameter list
Invalid field parameter – parameter not supported
Invalid field parameter – parameter value invalid
Invalid field parameter – threshold parameter not supported
Invalid release of persistent reservation
Invalid field parameter – TMS firmware tag
Invalid field parameter – check sum
Invalid field parameter – firmware tag
Write protected
Power-on or reset
Power on
LIP reset
Device reset
Internal reset
Parameters changed
Mode parameters changed
Log parameters changed
Reservations preempted
Reservation released
Registrations preempted
Command sequence error
Tagged commands cleared by another initiator
Medium format corrupted
Format failed
Format corrupted – ETF WWN is invalid
No defect spare location available
Defect list update error
No spares available – too many defects on one track
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 93:
Error codes for bytes 12 and 13 of sense data (values are in hexadecimal) (Continued)
Byte 12
(ASC)
Byte 13
Description
(ASCQ)
35
35
35
35
35
37
3F
3F
3F
3F
40
42
43
44
45
47
00
01
02
03
04
00
01
02
05
91
01
00
00
00
00
00
Enclosure services failure
Unsupported enclosure function
Enclosure services unavailable
Enclosure services transfer failure
Enclosure services transfer refused
Parameter rounded
Microcode changed
Changed operating definition
Device identifier changed
WWN mismatch, ETF WWN is valid
DRAM parity error
Power-on or self-test failure
Message reject error
Internal target failure
Select or reselect failure
Interface error
When the ASC and ASCQ are 47 and 00 respectively, the Sense Key Specific field of the Extended
Sense Data has the meaning defined below. Note that more than one bit may be set.
Byte 16:
Bit 7 - Invalid destination ID
Bit 6 - Invalid source ID
Bit 5 - Invalid frame type
Bit 4 - Invalid f_ctl
Bit 3 - Invalid sequence ID
Bit 2 - Invalid df_ctl
Bit 1 - Invalid sequence count
Bit 0 - Invalid 0x_id
Byte 17:
Bit 7 - Running disparity error
Bit 6 - CRC error
Bit 5 - Payload still coming after transfer count went to 0, or invalid primitive detected before EOF.
Bit 4 - EOFa — ‘abort’ detected as EOR
Bit 3 - Invalid EOF (EOFni EOFdti)
Bit 2 - Unsupported EOF
Bit 1 - Unsupported Class (Class 1 or 2 SOF primitive detected)
Bit 0 - Invalid R_CTL
48
49
4E
00
00
00
Initiator detected error
Invalid message
Overlapped commands attempted
152
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 93:
Error codes for bytes 12 and 13 of sense data (values are in hexadecimal) (Continued)
Byte 12
(ASC)
Byte 13
Description
(ASCQ)
55
55
55
5B
5B
5B
5C
5C
5C
5D
5D
65
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
01
03
04
00
01
02
00
01
02
00
FF
00
00
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
00
XOR cache is not available
Insufficient reservation resources
Insufficient registration resources
Log exception
Threshold condition met
Log parameter value at maximum
Servo RPL status change
Servo RPL spindles synchronized
Servo RPL spindles not synchronized
Failure prediction threshold exceeded
False failure prediction threshold exceeded
Voltage fault
General firmware error qualifier
FC FIFO error during read transfer
FC FIFO error during write transfer
Disc FIFO error during read transfer
Disc FIFO error during write transfer
LBA seeded CRC error on read
LBA seeded CRC error on write
IOEDC error on read
IOEDC error on write
Reassign power-fail recovery failed
11.5.1.2
Current and deferred errors
Error code 70h (current error) indicates that the Check Condition or Command Terminated status returned is
the result of an error or exception condition on the command that returned the Check Condition or Command
Terminated. This includes errors generated during execution of the command by the actual execution process.
It also includes errors not related to any command that are first observed during execution of a command.
Examples of this latter type of error include disc servo-mechanism off-track errors and power-up test errors.
Error code 71h (deferred error) indicates that the Check Condition status returned is the result of an error or
exception condition that occurred during execution of a previous command for which Good status has already
been returned. Such commands are associated with use of the Immediate bit (start unit), with some forms of
caching, and with multiple command buffering.
The deferred error is indicated by returning Check Condition status to the appropriate initiator as described
below. The subsequent execution of a Request Sense command returns the deferred error sense information.
If Check Condition status for a deferred error is returned, the current command has not performed any storage
operations or output operations to the media. After the target detects a deferred error condition on a logical
unit, it returns a deferred error according to the rules described below:
1. If a deferred error can be recovered with no external system intervention, a deferred error indication is not
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
posted unless required by the error handling parameters of the Mode Select command. The occurrence of
the error may be logged if statistical or error logging is supported.
2. If a deferred error can be associated with a causing initiator and with a particular function or a particular
subset of data, and the error is either unrecovered or required to be reported by the mode parameters, a
deferred error indication is returned to the causing initiator. If an initiator other than the causing initiator
attempts access to the particular function or subset of data associated with the deferred error, a Busy sta-
tus is returned to that initiator in response to the command attempting the access.
Note. Not all devices may be sufficiently sophisticated to identify the function or data that has failed.
Those that cannot should treat the error in the following manner:
If a deferred error cannot be associated with a causing initiator or with a particular subset of data, a
deferred error indication is returned on behalf of the failing logical unit to each initiator. If multiple
deferred errors have accumulated for some initiators, only the last error is returned.
3. If a current command has not yet started executing, and a deferred error occurs, the command is termi-
nated with Check Condition status and deferred error information posted in the sense data. If a deferred
error occurs while a current command is executing and the current command has been affected by the
error, the command is terminated by Check Condition status and current error information is returned in the
sense data. In this case, if the current error information does not adequately define the deferred error con-
dition, a deferred error may be returned after the current error information has been recovered. If a
deferred error occurs while a current command is executing and the current command completes success-
fully, the target may choose to return the deferred error information after the completion of the current com-
mand.
Deferred errors may indicate that an operation was unsuccessful long after the command performing the data
transfer returned Good status. If data that cannot be replicated or recovered from other sources is being stored
using such buffered write operations, synchronization commands should be performed before the critical data
is destroyed in the host initiator. This is necessary to be sure that recovery actions can be taken if deferred
errors do occur in the storing of the data. The synchronizing process provides the necessary commands to
allow returning Check Condition status and subsequent returning of deferred error sense information after all
buffered operations are guaranteed to be complete.
11.6
Parameter rounding
Certain parameters sent to a target with various commands contain a range of values. Targets may choose to
implement only selected values from this range. When the target receives a value that it does not support, it
either rejects the command (Check Condition status with Illegal Request sense key) or it rounds the value
received to a supported value. The target rejects unsupported values unless rounding is permitted in the
description of the parameter.
To enabled rounding, set Mode Select command, page code 00h, byte 2, bit 2.
Rounding of parameter values, when permitted, is performed as described below.
A target that receives a parameter value that is not an exact supported value adjusts the value to one that it
supports and returns Check Condition status with a sense key of Recovered Error. The additional sense code
is set to Rounded Parameter. The initiator is responsible for issuing an appropriate command to learn what
value the target has selected.
Implementor: Generally, the target should adjust maximum-value fields down to the next lower supported value
than the one specified by the initiator. Minimum value fields should be rounded up to the next higher supported
value that the one specified by the initiator. In some cases, the type of rounding (up or down) is explicitly spec-
ified in the description of the parameter.
154
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.0
Commands
This section contains information about the commands used by Seagate Fibre Channel disc drives. This sec-
tion is organized to provide rapid access to command information.
Navigation assistance
All commands are:
• Listed alphabetically by command name.
• Cross-referenced by command name and command operation code.
The field descriptions that are provided for most tables have sidebar labels
which identify the table they are associated with. This helps orient you when
nested tables complicate the structure of this section.
Sidebar example
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
1
Field name
The sidebar (black background with reversed text) identifies this field as being asso-
ciated with Table 1.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 94:
Commands sorted by command name
Command type
Direct
Length
16
Op
All
access
6
10
12
32
Command name
code devices devices bytes bytes bytes bytes bytes Variable
Reference
Change Definition
Compare
(obsolete) 40h
x
x
x
x
x
(obsolete) 39h
(obsolete) 18h
(obsolete) 3Ah
04h
Copy
Copy and Verify
Format Unit
Inquiry
x
x
12h
x
Lock-Unlock Cache (10)
Lock-Unlock Cache (16)
Log Select
36h
92h
4Ch
4Dh
15h
55h
1Ah
5Ah
A7h
5Eh
5Fh
34h
90h
1Eh
08h
28h
A8h
88h
3Ch
25h
9Eh
37h
B7h
B4h
3Eh
07h
1Ch
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Log Sense
Mode Select (6)
Mode Select (10)
Mode Sense (6)
Mode Sense (10)
Move Medium
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Persistent Reserve In
Persistent Reserve Out
Prefetch (10)
x
x
x
Prefetch (16)
x
Prevent/Allow Medium Removal
Read (6)
x
Read (10)
x
Read (12)
x
x
Read (16)
x
x
Read Buffer
x
x
Read Capacity (10)
Read Capacity (16)
Read Defect Data (10)
Read Defect Data (12)
Read Element Status
Read Long
10h
x
x
Reassign Blocks
Receive Diagnostic Results
x
x
x
x
Release (6)
(obsolete) 17h
(obsolete) 57h
A3h
x
x
Release (10)
x
x
Report Device Identifier
Report LUNs
x
x
x
x
05h
A0h
x
Request Sense
Reserve (6)
03h
x
x
(obsolete) 16h
(obsolete) 56h
(obsolete) 01h
(obsolete) 31h
(obsolete) 30h
(obsolete) 32h
(obsolete) 0Bh
2Bh
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Reserve (10)
Rezero Unit
x
Search Data Equal
Search Data High
Search Data Low
Seek (6)
x
x
Seek (10)
x
Send Diagnostic
Set Device Identifier
Set Limits
1Dh
x
x
A4h
x
06h
33h
x
156
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 94:
Commands sorted by command name (Continued)
Command type
Direct
Length
Op
All
access
6
10
12
16
32
Command name
code devices devices bytes bytes bytes bytes bytes Variable
Reference
Start/Stop Unit
Synchronize Cache (10)
Synchronize Cache (16)
Test Unit Ready
Verify (10)
1Bh
35h
91h
00h
2Fh
AFh
8Fh
0Ah
2Ah
AAh
8Ah
2Eh
AEh
8Eh
3Bh
3Fh
41h
93h
52h
7Fh
50h
7Fh
53h
7Fh
51h
7Fh
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Verify (12)
x
Verify (16)
Write (6)
x
Write (10)
x
x
Write (12)
x
x
Write (16)
x
x
Write and Verify (10)
Write and Verify (12)
Write and Verify (16)
Write Buffer
x
x
x
x
Write Long
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Write Same (10)
Write Same (16)
XDRead (10)
x
x
x
x
x
XDRead (32)
x
x
x
x
0003h
0004h
0007h
0006h
XDWrite (10)
XDWrite (32)
XDWriteRead (10)
XDWriteRead (32)
XPWrite (10)
XPWrite (32)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 95:
Commands sorted by operation code
Command type
Direct
Length
16
Op
All
access
6
10
12
32
code
Command name
devices devices bytes bytes bytes bytes bytes Variable
Reference
00h Test Unit Ready
01h Rezero Unit
03h Request Sense
04h Format Unit
07h Reassign Blocks
08h Read (6)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
(obsolete)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0Ah Write (6)
0Bh Seek (6)
(obsolete)
12h Inquiry
x
15h Mode Select (6)
16h Reserve (6)
17h Release (6)
18h Copy
x
x
x
x
x
x
(obsolete)
(obsolete)
(obsolete)
1Ah Mode Sense (6)
1Bh Start/Stop Unit
x
x
x
x
1Ch Receive Diagnostic Results
1Dh Send Diagnostic
1Eh Prevent/Allow Medium Removal
25h Read Capacity (10)
28h Read (10)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2Ah Write (10)
2Bh Seek (10)
2Eh Write and Verify (10)
2Fh Verify (10)
30h Search Data High
31h Search Data Equal
32h Search Data Low
33h Set Limits
(obsolete)
(obsolete)
(obsolete)
34h Prefetch (10)
x
x
x
x
35h Synchronize Cache (10)
36h Lock-Unlock Cache (10)
37h Read Defect Data (10)
39h Compare
(obsolete)
3Ah Copy and Verify
3Bh Write Buffer
3Ch Read Buffer
3Eh Read Long
(obsolete)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
3Fh Write Long
40h Change Definition
41h Write Same (10)
4Ch Log Select
(obsolete)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
4Dh Log Sense
50h XDWrite (10)
51h XPWrite(10)
52h XDRead (10)
53h XDWriteRead (10)
55h Mode Select (10)
56h Reserve (10)
57h Release (10)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
(obsolete)
(obsolete)
158
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 95:
Commands sorted by operation code
Command type
Direct
Length
16
Op
All
access
6
10
12
32
code
Command name
devices devices bytes bytes bytes bytes bytes Variable
Reference
5Ah Mode Sense (10)
5Eh Persistent Reserve In
5Fh Persistent Reserve Out
7Fh XDRead (32)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0003h
0004h
0006h
0007h
7Fh XDWrite (32)
7Fh XPWrite (32)
7Fh XDWriteRead (32)
88h Read (16)
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
8Ah Write (16)
8Eh Write and Verify (16)
8Fh Verify (16)
90h Prefetch (16)
91h Synchronize Cache (16)
92h Lock-Unlock Cache (16)
93h Write Same (16)
9Eh Read Capacity (16)
A0h Report LUNs
10h
x
x
x
A3h Report Device Identifier
A4h Set Device Identifier
A7h Move Medium
x
x
05h
06h
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
A8h Read (12)
x
x
x
x
AAh Write (12)
AEh Write and Verify (12)
AFh Verify (12)
B4h Read Element Status
B7h Read Defect Data (12)
x
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40h
Change Definition command
12.1
Obsolete. If this command is received, the disc drive sends a Check Condition status and a sense key of Illegal
Request.
39h
Compare command
12.2
Obsolete. A Check Condition status is sent if a Compare command is received.
18h
Copy command
12.3
Obsolete. If received, the disc drive sends a Check Condition status and a sense key of Illegal Request.
3Ah
Copy and Verify command
12.4
Obsolete. A Check Condition status is sent if a Copy and Verify command is received.
160
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
04h
Format Unit command
12.5
The Format Unit command ensures that the medium is formatted so all of the user-addressable data blocks
can be accessed. There is no guarantee that the medium has or has not been altered. In addition, the medium
may be certified and control structures may be created for the management of the medium and defects.
The drive allows an initiator to specify (or not specify) sectors which are to be reallocated during the format pro-
The Format Unit command is rejected with Reservation Conflict status if the logical unit is reserved, or any
extent reservation, from any initiator, is active in the specified logical unit.
During the format operation, the target responds to commands as follows:
• In response to all commands except Request Sense and Inquiry, the target returns Check Condition status
unless a reservation conflict exists, in which case Reservation Conflict status is returned.
• The target responds to the Inquiry and Request Sense commands normally.
Table 96:
Bit
Format Unit command (04h)
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
FMT
DATA
CMP
LST
Defect List Format
0
Reserved
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
Interleave
Control
5
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
CMP LST (Complete List)
1
The data supplied is the complete list of Growth defects. Any previous Growth defect data or Certification defect
data is erased. The disc drive adds to this list as it formats the medium. The result is to purge any previous Growth
or Certification defect list and to build a new defect list.
1
0
When FMT DATA equals 0, the Format Unit command is terminated with Check Condition status and a sense key of
Illegal Request.
The data supplied is in addition to the existing Growth defect list.
The use of the P list and C list defect is controlled by byte 1 of the defect list header (see Table 98).
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Defect List Format
Specifies additional information related to the defect list. (See Table 97 for further information.)
FMT DATA (Format Data)
1
0
The Format Unit Parameter list (Section 12.5.1) is supplied in a data transfer. The data transferred consists of a
defect list header (Table 98), followed by an initialization pattern descriptor (Table 99 if any) followed by the defect
descriptors. The format of the defect descriptor list is determined by the Defect List Format field.
The data transfer does not occur (no defect data will be supplied by the initiator).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interleave
This field requests that logical blocks be related in a specific fashion to the physical blocks to facilitate data transfer speed
matching.
0
The target uses its default interleave.
1
Consecutive logical blocks will be placed in consecutive physical order.
Š2
One or more (respectively) physical blocks separate consecutive logical blocks. The disc drive implements an
optional prefetch (read look ahead) function which reads a user-specified number of sectors into its buffer beyond
and contiguous to the sectors requested by the read command. This data is subsequently available for the next
sequential read command without re-access of the disc media thereby increasing performance and negating the
need for an interleave during format if this prefetch option is enabled (see Read Command, Section 12.21). Inter-
leave values other than zero or one are vendor specific.
The following definitions of flaw categories are supplied to help you understand the alternatives listed in Table
97.
P
Primary Defect Type: P type flawed sectors are identified at the time of shipment in a list of defects (permanent
flaws) supplied by Seagate and stored on the disc in an area that is not directly accessible by the user. (This list may
be referred to as an ETF List). This defect list is not modified or changed by the disc drive (or initiator) after ship-
ment.
C
D
Certification Defect Type: C type flawed sectors are sectors that fail a format verify during the format function.
Data Defect Type: D type sectors are sectors identified in a list supplied to the target by the initiator during a Format
Unit command. The D List follows a four-byte defect list header and is referred to as Defect Descriptor Bytes.
G
Growth Defect Type: G type flawed sectors contain medium flaws and have been reallocated as a result of receiving
a Reassign Blocks command, or certification defects (C type) reallocated during a previous Format Unit command,
or Data Defects (D type) reallocated during a previous Format Unit command or defects that have been automati-
cally reallocated by the drive. This (G) list is recorded on the disc drive media and may be referenced for the current
(and subsequent) Format Unit commands. This (G) list does not include the Primary (P) list of defects.
162
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 97:
Format Unit parameter definition (format variations)
CMP
LIST
FMT
DATA
Defect List Format
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Comments
Default format: No data is transferred. The disc drive reallocates all sectors
in the P list plus any sector which fails to Format Verify phase (C type
flaws). Any previous G list is erased.
0
X
X
X
X
Block format [2]
0
Format with G and no D: A four-byte Defect List header must be sent by the
initiator. No Defect Descriptors (D list) are sent by the initiator. The disc
drive reallocates all sectors in the drive’s current G list. See also note [1].
1
1
0
1
X
X
X
X
Format without G or D: A four-byte Defect List header must be sent by the
initiator. No D list may be sent by the initiator. The disc drive erases any pre-
vious G list. See also note [1].
0
Bytes from Index format
Format with D and without G: The initiator must send a four-byte Defect List
header followed by a D list of the defects for the disc drive to reallocate. The
erases any previous G list. See also note [1].
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Format with D and with G: The initiator must send a four-byte Defect List
header followed by a D list of the defects for the disc drive to reallocate.
drive also reallocates all sectors in the drive’s current G list. See also
Physical Sector format
Format with D and without G: The initiator must send a four-byte Defect List
header followed by a D list of defects for the disc drive to reallocate. The D
erases any previous G list. See also note [1].
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
Format with D and with G: The initiator must send a four-byte Defect List
header followed by a D list of defects for the disc drive to reallocate. The D
also reallocates all sectors in the drive’s current G list. See also note [1].
[1] Byte 1 of the Defect List header determines whether the P and C defects are reallocated. See Table 98.
[2] See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, for support/non-support.
The defect list shown in Table 98 contains a four-byte header followed by one or more defect descriptors. The
Defect List Length in each table specifies the total length (in bytes) of the defect descriptors that follow. In Table
98 the Defect List Length is equal to eight times the number of defect descriptors.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.5.1
Format Unit parameter list
Parameter
Reference
Defect List Header
Initialization Pattern Descriptor
Defect Descriptors
12.5.1.1
Defect List header
Defect List header
Table 98:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Reserved
FOV
0
1
2
3
DPRY
DCRT
STPF
IP
DSP
Immed
VS
(MSB)
Defect List Length
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DCRT (Disable Certification)
1
The disc drive does not perform a verify function during formatting (thus no C list for this format is created or reallo-
cated).
0
The disc drive performs a verify function during formatting and reallocates any sector that fails the verify (i.e., a C list
is created and these flaws reallocated).
On drives that have MR (magnetoresistive) heads, the DCRT bit is always interpreted as a 0 when the user sets the IP bit
(see Table 98) and specifies a format pattern of greater than 1 byte (see Table 99), and/or if the IP Modifier bits are set to 01
or 10 (see Table 99). This is done since the user format pattern and/or IP header is written onto the media during the format
certification phase. Because of this the user may see G list entries added to the defect list even though the DCRT bit was
set to 1.
Defect List Length
The length of any following D list (Defect descriptors) must be equal to 8 times the number of sectors to be reallocated per
Note. The initiator may not use any previously defined C, G, or D lists if the sector size (block length) has been changed.
DPRY (Disable Primary)
1
Flaws in the disc drive P list are not reallocated during formatting. This means existing reallocations of the P list are
canceled and no new reallocations made during formatting. The P list is retained.
0
Flaws in the disc drive P list are reallocated during formatting. A Check Condition is sent in the status if the P list
cannot be found by the disc drive.
DSP (Disable Saving Parameters)
1
0
The target does not save the Mode Select savable parameters to nonvolatile memory during the format operation.
The target saves all the Mode Select savable parameters for all initiators to nonvolatile memory during the format
operation.
FOV (Format Options Valid)
1
0
The disc drive interprets the remaining bits of byte 1.
The disc drive checks the remaining bits of byte 1 for zeros.
164
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Immed (Immediate)
0
1
Status will be returned after the first operation has completed.
The target will return status as soon as the command descriptor block has been validated, and the entire defect list
has been transferred.
Check individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, for applicability of this feature.
IP (Initialization Pattern)
This field indicates the type of pattern the target uses to initialize each logical block within the initiator accessible portion of
the medium (Table 100). All bytes within a logical block are written with the initialization pattern. The initialization pattern is
1
An initialization pattern descriptor is included in the Format Unit parameter list immediately following the Defect List
header.
0
An initialization pattern descriptor is not included and the target uses its default initialization pattern.
STPF (Stop Format)
1
Formatting is terminated with a Check Condition status if an error is encountered while accessing either the P or G
defect list. The sense key is set to Medium Error and the additional sense code is set to either Defect List Not Found
or Defect List Error.
0
Formatting is not terminated if an error is encountered while accessing either the P or G defect list.
VS (Vendor Specific)
Not used.
12.5.1.2
Initialization Pattern descriptor
The initialization pattern option specifies that the logical blocks contain the specified initialization pattern. The
initialization pattern descriptor is sent to the target as part of the Format Unit parameter list.
Table 99:
Initialization Pattern descriptor
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
IP Modifier
Reserved
1
Pattern Type
2
(MSB)
Initialization Pattern Length
3
(LSB)
0 – n
Initialization Pattern
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Initialization Pattern (IP) and IP Modifier
The Initialization Pattern field is modified in accordance with the specification of the IP Modifier field given in Table 100. The
Initialization Pattern is sent by the host for the drive to write in each logical block by the Format command. Refer to the table
below.
Table 100: Initialization Pattern Modifier
IP Modifier
Description
No header. The target does not modify the initialization pattern.
0
0
0
1
The target overwrites the initialization pattern to write the logical block address in the first four bytes of
the logical block. The logical block address is written with the most significant byte first.
or
1
1
0
1
Reserved.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initialization Pattern Length
The number of bytes contained in the initialization pattern. If the length exceeds the current logical block size, this is an
error. The initialization pattern is sent by the host for the drive to write in each logical block by the Format command.
Pattern Type
00h
01h
Use default pattern. If the initialization pattern length is not zero, this is an error and the drive terminates the
command with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense
error code is set to Invalid Field In Parameter List.
Use pattern supplied by host computer. If the Initialization Pattern Length is zero or insufficient data is pro-
vided by the initiator, this is an error and the drive terminates the command with Check Condition status. The
sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense error code is set to Invalid Field In Parameter
List.
02-7Fh
80-FFh
Reserved.
Vendor specific.
Defect List formats
This section describes the format of the defect list that follows the Defect List header described in Table 98.
Three formats are possible:
• Block format (Seagate does not support the block format, except as a customer special option)
Table 101: Defect descriptors
Byte
Description
for Physical Sector format)
0–n
Table 102: Defect descriptor bytes–Index format
Byte
Description
Cylinder Number of Defect (MSB)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cylinder Number of Defect
Cylinder Number of Defect (LSB)
Head Number of Defect
Defect Bytes from Index (MSB)
Defect Bytes from Index
Defect Bytes from Index
Defect Bytes from Index (LSB)
For defects to be specified in the Bytes from Index format, the defect list format field (Byte 1, bits 2, 1, 0) must
Each defect descriptor for the Bytes from Index format specifies the beginning of an eight bit (1 byte) defect
location on the medium. Each defect descriptor is comprised of the cylinder number of the defect, the head
number of the defect and the number of bytes from Index to the defect location.
The defect descriptors are in ascending order. The drive may return Check Condition if the defect descriptors
are not in ascending order. For determining ascending order, the Cylinder Number of Defect is considered the
most significant part of the address and the Defect Bytes from Index is considered the least significant part of
the address.
166
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A value for Defect Bytes from Index of FFFFFFFFh (i.e., reassign the entire track) is illegal for the disc drive.
Table 103: Defect descriptor bytes–Physical Sector format
Byte
Description
Cylinder Number of Defect (MSB)
Cylinder Number of Defect
Cylinder Number of Defect (LSB)
Head Number of Defect
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Defect Sector Number (MSB)
Defect Sector Number
Defect Sector Number
Defect Sector Number (LSB)
Information in this table is repeated for each defect.
For defects to be specified in the Physical Sector format, the Defect List format field (Byte 1, bits 2, 1, 0) must
Each defect descriptor for the Physical Sector format specifies a sector size defect location comprised of the
cylinder number of the defect, the head number of the defect and the defect sector number.
The defect descriptors are in ascending order. The drive may return Check Condition if the defect descriptors
are not in ascending order. For determining ascending order, the Cylinder Number of the defect is considered
the most significant part of the address and the Defect Sector Number is considered the least significant part of
the address.
A value for Defect Sector Number of FFFFFFFFh (i.e., reassign the entire track) is illegal for the disc drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12h
Inquiry command
12.6
The Inquiry command requests that information regarding parameters of the disc drive be sent to the initiator.
The Enable Vital Product Data (EVPD) option allows the initiator to request additional information about the
Several Inquiry commands may be sent to request the vital product data pages instead of the standard data
Table 104: Inquiry command (12h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
EVPD
Reserved
Page Code
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Allocation Length (in bytes)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The allocation length specifies the number of bytes the initiator has allocated for returned data. The disc drive terminates
the Data In phase when allocation length bytes have been transferred or when all available data have been transferred to
the initiator, whichever is less.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
EVPD (Enable Vital Product Data)
0
1
The disc drive returns the standard Inquiry data.
The disc drive returns the vital product data specified by the page code field.
Page Code
The Page Code field specifies the page of vital product data information that the disc drive returns.
If the EVPD bit = 0 and the page code field is not 0, the disc drive returns Check Condition status with the sense key set to
Illegal Request and an additional sense code of Invalid Field In CDB.
168
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Inquiry command information
The Inquiry command returns Check Condition status only when the disc drive cannot return the requested
Inquiry data.
If an Inquiry command is received from an initiator with a pending unit attention condition (i.e., before the disc
drive reports Check Condition status), the disc drive performs the Inquiry command and does not clear the Unit
Attention condition.
The Inquiry command is typically used by the initiator after a reset or power-up condition to determine the
device types for system configuration. To minimize delays after a reset or power-up condition, the standard
Inquiry data is available without incurring any media access delays. Since the disc drive stores some of the
Inquiry data on the device media it may return zeros or ASCII spaces (20h) in those fields until the data is avail-
able.
The Inquiry data may change as the disc drive executes its initialization sequence or in response to a Change
Definition command. For example, the disc drive may contain a minimum command set in its nonvolatile mem-
ory and load its final firmware from the medium when it becomes ready. After it has loaded the firmware it may
support more options and therefore return different supported options information in the Inquiry data.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disc drive inquiry data
The disc drive standard inquiry data contains 36 required bytes, followed by a number of bytes of disc drive
specific data that is drive dependent. See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 2. Refer to the standard
Table 105: Disc drive inquiry data format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ANSI-Approved Version
0
0
0
0
Response Data Format
AENC
TRMIOP
NACA
HiSupport
4
5
6
7
Additional Length
0
0
ENCSER
0
0
Port
0
0
Dual P
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
BQue
0
RelAdr
LINKED
CMD QUE Soft Reset
TrnDis
8
:
15
Vendor Identification
Product Identification
Product Revision Level
Drive Serial Number
16
:
31
32
:
35
36
:
43
44
:
55
Unused Vendor-Specific Area (00h)
Reserved (00h)
56
:
95
96
:
Copyright Notice
143
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional Length
Specifies the length (in bytes) of the parameters. If the allocation length of the command descriptor block is too small to
transfer all of the parameters, the additional length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
AENC (Asynchronous Event Notification Capability)
0
The disc drive does not support the asynchronous event notification capability.
170
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ANSI-Approved Version
2h Indicates this device complies with ANSI lX3.131-199x (SCSI-2) and the SCSI-3 features as described in this man-
ual.
BQue (Basic Queuing)
The following BQue values are valid only when the CMD QUE bit = 0.
0
The device does not support tagged tasks (command queuing) for this logical unit. This value is always used if the
CmdQue bit is 1.
1
The device supports, for this logical unit, the basic task management model defined by ANSI document SCSI3
Architectural Model-2, T10/1157.
CMD QUE (Command Queuing)
0
1
The disc drive does not support tagged command queuing.
The disc drive supports tagged command queuing.
Copyright Notice
The 48 bytes of ASCII data “Copyright (c) XXXX Seagate All rights reserved,” where “XXXX” indicates the current year (for
example: 1997).
Drive Serial Number
The 8 bytes of ASCII data containing 8-digit drive serial number.
Dual P (Dual Port)
0
1
The disc drive is not a dual port device.
The disc drive is a dual port device.
ENCSER (Enclosure Services)
0
1
The drive does not support the enclosure services diagnostic pages.
The drive supports the Enclosure Service Diagnostic pages (see Sections 12.33 and 12.47). The drive returns
Enclosure Services Information (ESI) data as a result of a Receive Diagnostic Results command.
HiSupport (Hierarchical Support)
0
1
The target does not use the hierarchical addressing model to assign LUNs to logical units.
The target uses the hierarchical addressing model to assign LUNs to logical units. When the HiSupport bit is one,
the device server supports the Report LUNs command.
LINKED (Linked Command)
0
1
The disc drive does not support linked commands.
The disc drive supports linked commands.
NACA (Normal Auto Contingent Allegiance)
Drives supported by this manual do not support ACA.
0
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Port
This bit is only defined when the Dual Port (Dual P) bit = 1.
0
1
The disc drive received the Inquiry command on port A.
The disc drive received the Inquiry command on port B.
Product Identification
The ASCII data containing the drive model number. The data is left-aligned within this field.
Product Revision Level
The four bytes of ASCII data containing the last four digits of the firmware release number.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RelAdr (Relative Addressing)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Reserved
Byte 56 through byte 95 are filled with 00h.
Response Data Format
0
1
The Inquiry data format is as specified in the ANSI SCSI-1 standard.
Indicates compatibility with some products that were designed prior to the development of the ANSI SCSI-2 stan-
dard (i.e., CCS).
2
Indicates that the data is in the format specified in the SCSI-2 standard.
Values greater than two are reserved.
> 2
Soft Reset
0
1
The drive responds to the Reset condition with the hard Reset alternative.
The drive responds to the Reset condition with the soft Reset alternative.
TRMIOP (Terminate I/O Process)
The disc drive does not support the Terminate I/O Process message.
0
TrnDis (Transfer Disable)
Not supported.
Vendor Identification
The ASCII data containing the vendor name (“SEAGATE”).
172
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.1
Vital product data pages
The initiator requests the vital product data information by setting the EVPD bit to one and specifying the page
code of the desired vital product data. If the disc drive does not implement the requested page it returns Check
Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code is set to Invalid Field in
CDB.
This section describes the vital product data page structure and the vital product data pages that are applicable
to the disc drive. These pages are optionally returned by the Inquiry command and contain specific product
information about the disc drive. The vital product data includes unit serial numbers, device operating defini-
tions, firmware release numbers, servo ROM and RAM release numbers and the date code from the manufac-
turer’s defect log.
Table 106: Vital product data page
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
Page Code (00h)
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length
4
:
Supported Page List
8
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
Page 00h provides a list of all supported vital product data pages. The Page Code field is set to the value of the Page Code
field in the Inquiry command descriptor block. Page Code C3 is only returned by ASA-II firmware.
Page Length
The length (in bytes) of the supported page list. If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the page
length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation. The page length reported by ASA-1 firmware is 06. The page length reported
by ASA-II firmware is 07. The total number of bytes returned (N) will be Page Length +4 in either case.
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Supported Page List
Contains a list of all vital product data page codes implemented for the disc drive in ascending order beginning with Page
Table 107: Vital product data page codes
Page Code
Description
Supported vital product data pages
Unit Serial Number page
Implemented Operating Definition page
Device Identification page
Firmware Numbers page
Date Code page
00h
80h
81h
83h
C0h
C1h
C2h
C3h
Jumper Settings page
Device Behavior page
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.2
Unit Serial Number page (80h)
The Unit Serial Number page provides the product serial number for the drive.
Table 108: Unit Serial Number page (80h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
0
Page Code (80h)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (08h)
4
:
Product Serial Number
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
Page 80h provides the product serial number for the disc drive. See bytes 4–8 (Product Serial Number field).
Page Length
The length (in bytes) of the Unit Serial Number page. If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the page
length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Product Serial Number
Contains ASCII data. The least significant ASCII character of the serial number appears as the last byte of a successful
data transfer. If the product serial number is not available, the disc drive returns ASCII spaces (20h) in this field.
174
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.3
Implemented Operating Definition page (81h)
Table 109: Implemented Operating Definition page (81h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
0
Page Code (81h)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (04h)
0
Current Operating Definition
Default Operating Definition
Supported Operating Definition
Supported Operating Definition
SAVIMP
SAVIMP
SAVIMP
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Current Operating Definition
Returns the value of the present operating definition. The default operating definition field returns the value of the operating
definition the disc drive uses when power is applied if no operating definition is saved.
Note. The FC-AL drive always returns a value of 03h in the current and default fields.
00h
01h
03h
Use current operating definition.
SCSI X3.131-1986 operating definition.
SCSI-2 X3.131-199x operating definition.
Default Operating Definition
Returns the value of the default operating definition.
Page Code
81h
Defines the current operating definition, the default operating definition, and which operating definitions are imple-
mented by the disc drive.
Page Length
04h
The length of the implemented operating definition data (in bytes).
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
SAVIMP (Save Implemented)
For each operating definition there is an associated Save Implemented (SAVIMP) bit. A SAVIMP bit of zero indicates that
the corresponding operating definition parameter cannot be saved. A SAVIMP bit of one indicates that the corresponding
operating definition parameter can be saved. The disc drive saves the default operating definition and all supported operat-
ing definitions.
Supported Operating Definition
The operating definition supported by this device.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.4
Device Identification page (83h)
The device identification page provides the Node Name for the drive.
Table 110: Device Identification page (83h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
Page Code (83h)
Reserved
Page Length (0Ch)
Identification descriptor list
4
:
Identification descriptor
15
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Identification Descriptor
Contains type information and a unique drive identification value.
Table 111: Identification Descriptor
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Code Set
1
2
3
4
:
0
Association
Identifier Type
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (08h)
MSB
Identifier
11
LSB
Association
00h The Identifier field is associated with the addressed device.
Code Set
01h
The Identifier field contains binary values.
Identifier
The 64-bit Node Name of the drive.
Identifier Type
03h
The Identifier field contains a unique 64-bit Fibre Channel Name_Identifier.
Page Length
08h The length of the Identification Descriptor page.
Page Code
83h
Provides the Node Name of the disc drive.
176
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Length
The length (in bytes) of the Device Identification page. If the allocation length is too small to transfer all the page, the page
length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Each identification descriptor contains information identifying the logical unit. If the logical unit is accessible
through any other path, it returns the same identification.
Table 112: Identification Descriptor structure
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
:
Reserved
Code Set
Identifier Type
Reserved
Reserved
Association
Identifier Length (n - 3)
(MSB)
Identifier
(LSB)
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Association
This field specifies the entity that the Identifier field is associated with.
00h
Associated with the addressed physical or logical device.
Associated with the port that received the request.
Reserved.
01h
02 - 03h
Code Set
This field specifies the code set used for the identifier field. This field is an aid to software that displays the identifier field.
00h
Reserved.
01h
The Identifier field contains binary values.
02h
The Identifier field contains ASCII graphic codes (i.e., code values 20h through 7Eh)
Reserved
03 - 0Fh
Identifier
This field contains the identifier as described by the Identifier Type, Code Set, and Identifier Length fields.
Identifier Length
This field specifies the length, in bytes, of the Identifier.
Note. If the command descriptor block’s allocation length is too small to transfer all of the identifier, the Identifier Length
is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Identifier Type
This field specifies the format and assignment authority for the identifier.
00h
No assignment authority was used and, consequently, there is no guarantee that the identifier is globally
unique (the identifier is vendor-specific).
01h
The first eight bytes of the Identifier field contain the Vendor ID. The organization associated with the Vendor
ID is responsible for ensuring that the remainder of the Identifier field is unique. One recommended method
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of constructing the remainder of the Identifier field is to concatenate the Product Identification field from the
standard Inquiry Data field and the product serial number field from the Unit Serial Number page.
02h
The Identifier field contains an IEEE Extended Unique Identifier, 64-bit (EUI-64). In this case, the Identifier
Length field is set to 8. Note that the IEEE guidelines for EUI-64 specify a method for unambiguously encap-
sulating an IEEE 48-bit identifier within an EUI-64.
04 - 0Fh
Reserved.
178
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.5
Firmware Numbers page (C0h)
Table 113: Firmware Numbers page (C0h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Peripheral Qualifier
Page Code (C0h)
0
1
Peripheral Device Type
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (20h)
3
4
Firmware Release Number
Servo RAM Release Number
Servo ROM Release Number
:
11
12
:
19
20
:
27
28
:
Servo RAM Release Date in ASCII
Servo ROM Release Date in ASCII
31
32
:
35
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Firmware Release Number
Contain ASCII data. The least significant ASCII character of the drive firmware number appears as the last byte of a suc-
cessful data transfer.
Page Code
C0h Provides the firmware release numbers for the disc drive.
Page Length
20h
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
The length of the Firmware Numbers page (in bytes).
Servo RAM Release Date in ASCII
This field contains the servo RAM release data in ASCII format.
Servo RAM Release Number
This field contains the servo RAM release number.
Servo ROM Release Date in ASCII
This field contains the servo ROM release data in ASCII format.
Servo ROM Release Number
This field contains the servo ROM release number.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.6
Date Code page (C1h)
Table 114: Date Code page (C1h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
0
Page Code (C1h)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (0Ch)
4
:
Product Date Code
11
12
:
Compile Date
19
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Compile Date
The field contains 8 ASCII bytes of data for a date of the form MMDDYYYY.
Page Code
C1h Provides the date code from the disc drive defect list.
Page Length
0Ch The length (in bytes) of the product date code. If the ALLOCATION LENGTH is too small to transfer all of the page,
the page length shall not be adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Product Date Code
Contains ASCII data. The least significant ASCII character of the product date code appears as the last byte of a successful
data transfer. If the product date code is not available, the drive returns ASCII spaces (20h) in this field.
180
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.7
Jumper Settings page (C2h)
Table 115: Jumper Settings page (C2h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
0
Page Code (C2h)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Length (02h)
S2
S1
Rsvd
Rsvd
Rsvd
Rsvd
Rsvd
Rsvd
Rsvd
Sel. ID
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
C2h Provides the status of the option selections at the disc drive connector.
Page Length
02h
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
The length (in bytes) of the Jumper Settings page.
Sel. ID (Select-ID)
S2 (Start_2), S1 (Start_1)
Motor spinup options:
S2
0
S1
0
Function
Motor spins up at power on.
1
0
Remote motor spin up. A SCSI Start command is required to spin up the drive.
Delay motor spin up.
0
1
1
1
Invalid selection or the drive is not completely plugged in. Also referred to as the “Un-Mated Case” option.
Note. If Enclosure Initiated ESI is supported in the backplane that the drive is plugged in to, the S2 and S1 values
reported may reflect attempts by the enclosure to start an EI ESI transfer. Several reads separated by at least a
second may better indicate what the value is for these lines that the drive uses to determine motor spinup
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 116: AL_PA Select-ID mapping
AL_PA
(hex)
Sel. ID
(hex)
AL_PA
(hex)
Sel. ID
(hex)
AL_PA
(hex)
Sel. ID
(hex)
EF
E8
E4
E2
E1
E0
DC
DA
D9
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
CE
CD
CC
CB
CA
C9
C7
C6
C5
C3
BC
BA
B9
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
AE
AD
AC
AB
AA
A9
A7
A6
A5
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
OC
OD
OE
OF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
A3
9F
9E
9D
9B
98
97
90
8F
88
84
82
81
80
7C
7A
79
76
75
74
73
72
71
6E
6D
6C
6B
6A
69
67
66
65
63
5C
5A
59
56
55
54
53
52
51
4E
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
4D
4C
4B
4A
49
47
46
45
43
3C
3A
39
36
35
34
33
32
31
2E
2D
2C
2B
2A
29
27
26
25
23
1F
1E
1D
1B
18
17
10
0F
08
04
02
01
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
182
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.6.8
Device Behavior page (C3h)
The Device Behavior page (VPD page C3h) is used by regression tests to determine what behavior should be
expected from a particular firmware package.
Table 117: Device Behavior page (C3h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Peripheral Qualifier
Peripheral Device Type
Page Code (C3h)
Reserved
Page Length
Version Number
Behavior Code
Behavior Code Version Number
7
:
22
ASCII Model Number (16 bytes)
Maximum Interleave
23
24
Default Number of Cache Segments
Feature flags and additional byte fields will go here but are undefined at this time.
25+
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
ASCII Model Number
Identical to the Product Identification Number given in the standard Inquiry command data (see Table 105).
Behavior Code and Behavior Code Version Number
Jointly assigned by the Firmware Engineering Managers of all SCSI design locations.
Default Number of Cache Segments
Feature flags and additional byte fields...
These bytes are not yet defined.
Maximum Interleave
The maximum value which the drive can support in the least significant byte of Interleave in the Format Unit command (see
Table 96). The actual interleave which has been used during the last Format, providing it has not been changed by an inter-
vening Mode Select command is reported in the Interleave bytes of the Format Device bytes of the Format Device page
Page Code
C3h
Provides the behavior code information for the drive.
Page Length
32h
The length of the Device Behavior page (in bytes).
Peripheral Qualifier and Peripheral Device Type
00h
A direct-access device (magnetic disc) is connected to this logical unit.
Version Number
A 1-byte short form notation for the 24-byte assignment in the Firmware Numbers page. Version Numbers are registered by
engineering services.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36h
Lock-Unlock Cache (10) command
12.7
The Lock-Unlock Cache (10) command requests that the device server disallow or allow logical blocks within
the specified range to be removed from the cache memory by the device server's cache replacement algo-
rithm. Locked logical blocks may be written to the medium when modified, but a copy of the modified logical
block shall remain in the cache memory.
Multiple locks may be in effect from more than one application client. Locks from different application clients
may overlap. An unlock of an overlapped area does not release the lock of another initiator.
Table 118: Lock-Unlock Cache (10) command (4Ch)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (36h)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
Lock
RelAdr
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
Number of Blocks
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Lock
0
All logical blocks in the specified range that are currently locked into the cache memory shall be unlocked, but may
not be removed.
1
Any logical block in the specified range that is currently present in the cache memory shall be locked into cache
memory. Only logical blocks that are already present in the cache memory are actually locked.
Number of Blocks
The number of contiguous logical blocks to be written.
0
indicates that all remaining logical blocks on the block device shall be within the range.
Operation Code
4Ch The operation code for the Lock-Unlock Cache (10) command.
RelAdr (Relative Addressing)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
184
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92h
Lock-Unlock Cache (16) command
12.8
The Lock-Unlock Cache (16) command requests that the device server disallow or allow logical blocks within
the specified range to be removed from the cache memory by the device server's cache replacement algo-
rithm. Locked logical blocks may be written to the medium when modified, but a copy of the modified logical
block shall remain in the cache memory.
Multiple locks may be in effect from more than one application client. Locks from different application clients
may overlap. An unlock of an overlapped area does not release the lock of another initiator.
Table 119: Lock-Unlock Cache (16) command (92h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (92h)
0
1
Reserved
Lock
RelAdr
2
(MSB)
3
4
5
Logical Block Address
6
7
8
9
(LSB)
(LSB)
10
11
12
13
14
15
(MSB)
Number of Blocks
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Lock
0
All logical blocks in the specified range that are currently locked into the cache memory shall be unlocked, but may
not be removed.
1
Any logical block in the specified range that is currently present in the cache memory shall be locked into cache
memory. Only logical blocks that are already present in the cache memory are actually locked.
Number of Blocks
The number of contiguous logical blocks to be written.
0
indicates that all remaining logical blocks on the block device shall be within the range.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4Ch
Log Select command
12.9
The Log Select command provides a means for an initiator to manage statistical information about the drive
operation. This information is logged within the drive and can be sent to the initiator in response to a Log
Sense command from the initiator. The Log Select command format is shown in Table 120. The initiator sends
zero or more pages of control parameters in the Log Page format of Table 123. These log pages contain
parameters that command the drive to change selected threshold, or cumulative values of any or all drive logs.
The following tables in Section 12.9 apply for the Log Select command as indicators of functions that command
the drive to perform or enable for performance, control parameter bits the drive sets/resets/saves, log counts
that are kept, etc. For the Log Sense command, these tables apply as indicators of functions the drive reports
back to the host that it is enabled to perform, control parameter bits that are set/reset/saved, log counts that are
being kept, etc. Though the language of the descriptions is for the Log Select case, the application to the Log
Sense case should also be considered. Section 12.10 describes the Log Sense command, but the tables of
this section that apply are not repeated there.
The drives represented by this Interface Manual do not support keeping independent sets of log parameters
(one set for each initiator in the system). If at some point log parameters are changed (by a Log Select com-
mand) that affect initiators other than the initiator that sent the Log Select command, the drive generates a unit
attention condition for those other initiators, but not for the one that issued the Log Select command. When the
other initiators at a future time connect to the drive, the first command attempted would not execute and a
check condition status would be issued by the drive. A Request Sense command would normally follow and a
unit attention condition sense code be returned to these other initiators with an additional sense code of Log
Parameters Changed (one by one as they connect to the drive). See Section 12.13.1, Unit Attention page.
Table 120: Log Select command (4Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
PCR
SP
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PC
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
PC (Page Control)
This field defines the type of log parameter the initiator selects to change with the Log Select command.
00b
01b
10b
11b
Log current threshold values
Log current cumulative values
Log default threshold values
Log default cumulative values
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The drive only updates the cumulative values to reflect the number of events experienced by the drive, but the initiator can
set the threshold or cumulative log (00 or 01) parameter values using the Log Select command with the PC field set as
applicable.
The drive sets the current log values to default values in response to a Log Select command with the parameter list length
set to zero and the PC field set to the applicable value (10b or 11b).
If an initiator attempts to change a current threshold value that is not available or not implemented for that log parameter,
the drive terminates the Log Select command with a Check Condition status, the sense key set to Illegal Request and an
additional sense code set to Invalid Field In Parameter List. The saving of current threshold parameters and the criteria for
the current threshold being met are controlled by bits in the Parameter Control Byte (PCB) (byte 2 of each of the Log
Parameter pages).
PCR (Parameter Code Reset)
1
1
0
And Parameter List Length value = 0—causes all implemented parameters to be set to the drive-defined default val-
ues (most likely zero).
And Parameter List Length value >0—causes the command to terminate with a Check Condition status. The sense
key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code is set to Invalid Field in CDB.
The log parameters are not reset.
Parameter List Length
This specifies the length (in bytes) of the parameter list that is transferred from the initiator to the drive.
0
No pages are transferred. This condition is not considered an error.
If the initiator sends page codes or parameter codes within the parameter list that are reserved or not implemented by the
drive, the drive terminates the Log Select command with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request
and the additional sense code set to Invalid Field In Parameter List.
If a parameter list length results in the truncation of any log parameter, the drive terminates the command with Check Con-
dition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code set to Invalid Field In CDB.
The initiator may send none, one, or more data pages, each of which is in the format specified in Table 123 and which con-
tain control information pertaining to the management and reporting of various drive log parameters. If multiple pages are
sent out following the command CDB, they must be sent in ascending page code value order. Also, log parameters in each
log page must be sent in log parameter code ascending order (see Table 123). The Page code (byte 0) specifies which log
the page pertains to. The page code assignments are listed in Table 126. Initiator cannot send page zero (0).
SP (Save Parameters)
1
After performing the specified log select operation, the drive saves to nonvolatile memory all log select parameters
identified as savable by the DS bit in the log parameter sections of the log page (see Tables 123 and 124).
0
Specifies that parameters are not saved immediately.
Log parameters are also saved after each thermal calibration if the TSD bit in the Log Parameters page (see Table 124) is
zero (0).
It is not an error to set the SP bit to one and to set the DS bit of a log parameter to one. In this case, the parameter value for
that log parameter is not saved.
188
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 121 summarizes the Log Select Command field settings used when updating the cumulative/threshold value settings
and the resulting action that will occur based on these field settings.
Table 121: Log Select Command field setting summary
Parameter
List Length
PCR
PC
Resulting action
All cumulative counter and threshold log page values will be set to “zero” on all
log pages.
1
xx
0
All cumulative counter log page values will be set to “zero” on all log pages.
All threshold log page values will be set to “zero” on all log pages.
0
0
0
11
10
01
0
0
The cumulative counter for a specific parameter code will be set to the stipu-
lated value on a specified log page as found in the Log Parameter Page data.
nn
The threshold for a specific parameter code will be set to the stipulated value
on a specified log page as found in the Log Parameter Page data.
0
00
nn
The Log Select and Log Sense commands use the same log page format. See Section 12.10.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4Dh
Log Sense command
12.10
The Log Sense command provides a means for an initiator to retrieve statistical information maintained by the
drive about the drive operation. It is a complementary command to the Log Select command. This information
is stored in logs (counters) in the drive and is sent to the initiator as inbound data of the Log Sense command.
The Log Sense command format that the initiator sends is shown in Table 122. The format of the data pages
Table 122: Log Sense command (4Dh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (4Dh)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
0
Reserved
PPC
SP
PC
Page Code
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter Pointer
Allocation Length
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
This field informs the drive of the amount of space available for returning log parameter data. If the allocation length is too
small, the drive sends as much data as can fit in the allocation length. The initiator can retrieve the rest of the log page
information by setting the parameter pointer to the last returned parameter code and reissuing the log sense command.
This process may be repeated as necessary to retrieve all the available information.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Operation Code
4Dh The operation code for the Log Sense command.
Page Code
The page of data requested by the command (see Table 126). If a page code is sent that is not implemented, the drive ter-
minates the command with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request with the additional sense code
set to Invalid Field In CDB.
Table 127 (Page Code 00h) returns the list of log pages that the drive supports. This page is not defined for the Log Select
command.
PC (Page Control)
This field defines the type of log parameter the initiator selects to change with the Log Select command.
00b
01b
10b
11b
Log current threshold values
Log current cumulative values
Log default threshold values
Log default cumulative values
190
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parameter values returned are from one of the following:
• The specified parameter values in the log counters as of the last update (updated by Log Select command, Log Sense
command or done automatically by the drive for cumulative values).
• If saved values are available, the saved values are used after the last LIP reset.
• If saved values are not available, the default values are used after the last LIP reset.
Parameter Pointer
A parameter code (see Table 128) that specifies that log parameter data be returned to the initiator starting with the Param-
eter Pointer code and continuing to the maximum allocation length or to (and including) log parameter data of the maximum
parameter code supported by the drive, whichever is less. If the value of the Parameter Pointer field is larger than the larg-
est available parameter code that can be returned by the drive on the specified page, the drive terminates the command
with a Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code is set to Invalid Field
In CDB.
PPC (Parameter Pointer Control)
1
0
The drive returns a log page with only those log parameters that have changed since the last Log Select or Log
Sense command. The drive returns log parameter codes according to (in ascending numerical order) the parameter
code specified in the Parameter Pointer field (bytes 5 & 6).
All of the log parameter data requested from the drive, whether changed or not, is sent and it begins with the log
specified by the parameter code given in the Parameter Pointer field and returns the number of bytes specified by
the allocation length field, in ascending order of parameter codes starting at the parameter code given in the Param-
eter Pointer field.
A PPC bit of zero and a Parameter Pointer field of zero causes all available log parameters for the specified log
page to be returned to the initiator subject to the allocation length.
SP (Save Parameters)
0
The drive performs the specified Log Sense command and does not save any log parameters to nonvolatile mem-
ory.
1
The drive first saves parameters identified as savable (by the DS bit in Table 124) to a nonvolatile location, and then
performs the rest of the Log Sense command.
Table 123: Log Page format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
2
3
Reserved
Page Code
Reserved
(MSB)
Page Length (n–3)
(LSB)
Log parameter structure(s)
4 to
x + 3
Log Parameter (First)
(Length X bytes)
.
.
.
.
.
.
n–Y
Log Parameter (last)
(Length Y bytes)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Log Parameter
Table
number
Each Log Parameter structure begins with a four-byte parameter header followed by one or more bytes of parameter value
Log Parameter Structures
Most log pages contain one or more special data structures called Log Parameters. Log Parameters may be data counters
that record a count of a particular event (or events) or list parameters (strings) that contain a description of a particular
event. List parameters are not currently supported by the drives represented by this manual.
Page Code
Page Length
The total number of bytes of Log Parameter structures that follow these first four control block bytes. If the initiator sends a
page length that results in the truncation of any parameter, the target terminates the command with Check Condition status.
The sense key is set to Illegal Request with the additional sense code set to Invalid Field In Parameter List.
Table 124: Log Parameter structure
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
(MSB)
Parameter Code
ETC
1
2
3
(LSB)
LP
DU
DS
TSD
TMC
LBIN
Parameter Length (n–3 bytes)
4
:
Parameter Value
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DS (Disable Save)
0
The drive supports Log Select and Log Sense data saving for that log parameter. The drive saves the current cumu-
lative and the current threshold parameter values in response to a Log Select or Log Sense command with a SP bit
of one.
1
The drive does not support saving that log parameter in response to a Log Select or Log Sense command with a SP
bit of one.
DU (Disable Update)
0
1
The drive updates the log parameter value to reflect all events that should be logged by that parameter.
The drive does not update the log parameter value except in response to a Log Select command that specifies a
new value for the parameter.
For the Log Select command, this applies only to the cumulative log parameter values (indicated by 01 in the PC field of the
Log Select and Log Sense command descriptor block).
The DU flag is set to one when the current cumulative value of the parameter counter it controls reaches its maximum value
(see Parameter Length definition for this table). Upon reaching this maximum value, the data counter does not wrap around
and start over at zero. Incrementing of other counters within the same log pages ceases. Counters do not restart automati-
cally if the overflowed counter is re-initialized. If the data counter reaches its maximum value during the execution of a com-
mand, the drive completes the command. Drive counter updates are performed in the background. This means a counter
may overflow long after a command has completed, so the drive must treat this condition as a Unit Attention with the addi-
tional sense code set to Log Counter at max for all initiators if RLEC=1 (Report Log exception condition bit of the Control
Mode Page 0Ah).
192
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Since the drive uses volatile memory to hold cumulative values, they will be lost when a power cycle occurs. Unless the ini-
tiator commands the drive to save them to nonvolatile memory using a Log Select or Log Sense command with the SP bit
set to one.
The DU bit is not defined for threshold values (indicated by the PC field of the Log Sense command descriptor block) nor
for list parameters (indicated by the LP bit). The drive ignores the value of DU bits in a Log Select command applicable to
threshold values or list parameters.
ETC (Enable Threshold Comparison)
1
0
A comparison to the threshold value is performed whenever the cumulative value is updated.
The comparison is not performed. The value of the ETC bit is the same for both the threshold and cumulative
parameters.
LBIN (List Binary)
0
1
The parameter list contains a string of ASCII characters.
The parameter list is in a binary format.
LP (List Parameter)
0
1
The parameter is a data counter.
The parameter is a list parameter.
This bit only has meaning for the Log Sense command Data In pages.
Data counters are associated with one or more events. The data counter is updated whenever one of these events occurs
by incrementing the counter value, provided the DU bit is zero. See the DU field description above.
An LP bit of one indicates that the parameter is a list parameter. List parameters are not counters and thus the ETC and
TMC fields are set to zero. A list parameter is a string of ASCII graphic codes (i.e., code values 20h through 73h). List
parameters are not supported by the drive at this time.
Parameter Code
The specific parameter that is being transferred with the Log Page. These codes are listed and explained in the individual
Byte 2 is referred to as the Parameter Control byte. For a Log Select command these bits perform a control function, but on
a Log Sense command they only report the drive settings of these bits in this same format on the data-in part of the Log
Sense command.
Parameter Length
This field specifies the length (in bytes) of the parameter that follows. If the initiator sends a parameter length value that
results in the truncation of the parameter value, the drive terminates the command with a Check Condition status. The
sense key is set to Illegal Request with the additional sense code set to Invalid Field In Parameter List.
Parameter Value
This field uses one, two, four, or eight bytes to transmit an unsigned counter value. The initiator sends these counts to set
the counter values in the drive. The initiator is responsible to issue a Log Sense command to learn the parameter length the
target has selected.
When any counter in a log page reaches its maximum value, the drive ceases incrementing all counters in that log page. If
the RLEC bit of the Control Mode page is one, then the drive reports the exception condition as described in Disable
Update definition for this table.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TMC (Threshold Met Criteria)
This field defines the basis for comparison of the cumulative and threshold values. See Table 125 for meanings of values in
this field. The TMC field is only valid when the ETC bit is one.
Table 125: Threshold Met Criteria
Code
Basis for Comparison
Notify of every update of cumulative value
Cumulative value equal to threshold value
Cumulative value not equal threshold value
Cumulative value greater than threshold value
00b
01b*
10b*
11b*
* Comparison made at every update of cumulative value.
If the ETC bit is one* and the result of the comparison is true, a unit attention condition is generated for all initiators. When
reporting the unit attention condition the drive sets the sense key to Unit Attention, and the additional sense code to Thresh-
old Condition Met.
TSD (Target Save Disable)
0
The drive saves frequently enough to insure statistical significance. The drive’s method is to save after each thermal
calibration, which is once every ten minutes.
1
The drive does not use its save method.
The page code assignments for the log pages are listed in Table 126. Detailed descriptions follow the table.
Table 126: Log Page codes
Page Code
Description
Section
Cache Statistics page
Device Self-Test Results page
Drive dump (contents are vendor unique)
Error Counter page (Read)
Error Counter page (Verify)
Error Counter page (Write)
Factory Log page
37h
10h
3Dh
03h
05h
02h
3Eh
Non-medium Error page
Supported Log pages
Temperature page
06h
00h
0Dh
Reserved
08h-0Ah
0Ch
Reserved
Reserved
11h - 2Fh
3Fh
Reserved
Vendor-specific (37h, 3Dh, and 3Eh are used above)
30h - 3Eh
194
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 127: Supported log pages
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
Reserved
Page Code (00h)
Reserved
1
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (n–3)
(LSB)
4
:
Supported Page List
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
00h
Supported log pages page code.
Page Length
The length (in bytes) of the Supported Log Pages page. If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the
page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Supported Page List
A list of all log page codes implemented by the target in ascending order beginning with Page Code 00h.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.1
Error Counter pages, Write, Read, Read Reverse, and Verify (code 02, 03, 04, and 05h)
Table 128 defines the parameter code field for the write, read, read reverse, and verify error counter pages.
Table 128: Write, Read, Read Reverse, and Verify Error Parameter Code field
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parameter Code
1
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
Parameter codes 00h through 06h specify six counters each for write, read, read reverse, and verify errors (24 counters). A
description of the type (category of error) counters specified by codes 00h through 06h are described following.
0000h
Error Corrected Without Substantial Delay. An error correction was applied to get perfect data (like ECC on-
the-fly). “Without substantial delay” means the correction did not postpone reading of later sectors (e.g., a
revolution was not lost). The counter is incremented once for each logical block that requires correction. Two
different blocks corrected during the same command are counted as two events.
0001h
Error Corrected With Possible Delay. An error code or algorithm (e.g., ECC, checksum) is applied in order to
get perfect data with substantial delay. “With possible delay” means the correction took longer than a sector
time so that reading/writing of subsequent sectors was delayed (e.g, a lost revolution). The counter is incre-
mented once for each logical block that requires correction. A block with a double error that is correctable
counts as one event and two different blocks corrected during the same command count as two events.
0002h
Total (e.g., re-writes or re-reads). This parameter code specifies the counter counting the number of errors
that are corrected by applying retries. This counts errors recovered, not the number of retries. If five retries
were required to recover one block of data, the counter increments by one, not five. The counter is incre-
mented once for each logical block that is recovered using retries. If an error is not recoverable while apply-
ing retries and is recovered by ECC, it isn’t counted by this counter; it will be counted by the counter
specified by parameter code 01h – Error Corrected With Possible Delay.
0003h
0004h
Total Errors Corrected. This counter counts the total of all correctable errors encountered. It is the sum of the
counters specified by parameter codes 01h and 02h. There is no double counting of data errors among
these two counters and all correctable data errors are counted in one of these counters.
Total Times Correction Algorithm Processed. This parameter code specifies the counter that counts the total
number of retries or the number of times the retry algorithm is invoked. If after five attempts a counter 02h
type error is recovered, then five is added to this counter. If three retries are required to get a stable ECC
syndrome before a counter 01h type error is corrected, then those three retries are also counted here. The
number of retries applied to unsuccessfully recover an error (counter 06h type error) are also counted by this
counter.
0005h
0006h
Total Bytes Processed. This parameter code specifies the counter that counts the total number of bytes
either successfully or unsuccessfully read, written, or verified (depending on the log page) from the drive. If a
transfer terminates early because of an unrecoverable error, only the logical blocks up to and including the
one with the unrecoverable error are counted.
Total Uncorrected Errors. This parameter code specifies the counter that contains the total number of blocks
for which an unrecoverable data error has occurred.
196
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.2
Non-Medium Error page (code 06h)
Log page code 06h specifies non-medium errors.
Table 129: Non-Medium Error page (code 06h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (06h)
Parameter Code
0
1
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
06h
Parameter Code
0000h
Non-Medium Error page code.
The number of recoverable error events other than write, read, or verify errors (0000h is the only code sup-
ported for this page).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.3
Temperature page (code 0Dh)
Log page code 0Dh provides the temperature of the drive and Fibre Channel link error and initialization counts.
Table 130: Temperature log page (code 0Dh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
PS
Reserved
Page Code (0Dh)
Reserved
Page Length (92h)
2
3
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
06h
Temperature page.
Page Length
92h
Length of the page.
PS (Parameter Savable)
1
0
Page contains savable parameters.
None of the parameters within the page are savable.
Table 131: Temperature Parameter Format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Parameter Code
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
02h
Temperature Data
4
5
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
0000h
Temperature data. The temperature sensed in the device at the time the Log Sense command is performed
is returned in the Parameter field defined by this parameter code. The one-byte binary value specified the
temperature of the device in degrees Celsius. Temperatures equal to or less than zero degrees Celsius is
indicated by a value of zero.
If the device server is unable to detect a valid temperature because of a sensor failure or other condition, the
value returned is FFh. The temperature should be reported with an accuracy of plus or minus three Celsius
degrees while the device is operating at a steady state within the environmental limits specified for the drive.
No comparison is performed between the temperature value specified in parameter 0000h and the reference
temperature specified in parameter 0001h.
0001h
Reference temperature data. A reference temperature for the drive may optionally be provided by the drive
using parameter code 0001h. If no reference temperature is provided, the parameter may not be provided in
the log page or alternatively, the reference temperature value may be set to the value of FFh. The one-byte
binary value reflects the maximum reported sensor temperature in degrees Celsius at which the drive will
operate continuously without degrading the drive’s operation or reliability outside the limits specified by the
manufacturer of the drive. The reference temperature may change for vendor-specific reasons.
198
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 132: Command Initiate Parameter Format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Parameter Code (80FFh)
0
2
3
4
5
0
1
1
00
1
1
02h
Reserved
Reserved
CIP
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
80FFh
Command Initiate Port Code. This field identifies the port on the drive that receives the Log Sense command
and requested transfer of this page.
0 = Port A.
1 = Port B.
Table 133: Fibre Channel Link Format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Parameter Code
2
3
0
1
1
0
00
1
1
04h
4
5
6
7
Counter Data
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
Code
Length
4 bytes
Description
8100h
Link Failure Count, Port A. Count of the number of Loss of Sync conditions that have occurred on
Port A which exceeded 100 msecs in duration.
8101h
8104h
8105h
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
Loss of Synchronization Count, Port A. Count of the number of short (< 100 msecs) Loss of Syn-
chronization conditions that have occurred on Port A.
Invalid Transmission Word Count, Port A. Count of the number of invalid transmission words/Run-
ning Disparity errors that have been detected on Port A.
Invalid CRC Count, Port A. Count of the number of write data frames that have been received
with invalid CRCs on port A. These errors are only detected when this drive is the target of the
data transfer.
8106h
8107h
8108h
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
LIP F7 Initiated Count, Port A. Count of the number of LIP F7s (Initialize LIP) which the drive has
initiated on Port A.
LIP F7 Received Count, Port A. Count of the number of LIP F7s (Initialize LIP) which the drive has
received on Port A.
LIP F8 Initiated Count, Port A. Count of the number of LIP F8s (Failure LIP) which the drive has
initiated on Port A.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8109h
8110h
8111h
8114h
8115h
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
LIP F8 Received Count, Port A. Count of the number of LIP F8s (Failure LIP) which the drive has
received on Port A.
Link Failure Count, Port B. Count of the number of Loss of Sync conditions that have occurred on
Port B which exceeded 100 msecs in duration.
Loss of Synchronization Count, Port B. Count of the number of short (< 100 msecs) Loss of Syn-
chronization conditions that have occurred on Port B.
Invalid Transmission Word Count, Port B. Count of the number of invalid transmission words/Run-
ning Disparity errors that have been detected on Port B.
Invalid CRC Count, Port B. Count of the number of write data frames that have been received
with invalid CRCs on port B. These errors are only detected when this drive is the target of the
data transfer.
8116h
8117h
8118h
8119h
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
LIP F7 Initiated Count, Port B. Count of the number of LIP F7s (Initialize LIP) which the drive has
initiated on Port B.
LIP F7 Received Count, Port B. Count of the number of LIP F7s (Initialize LIP) which the drive has
received on Port B.
LIP F8 Initiated Count, Port B. Count of the number of LIP F8s (Failure LIP) which the drive has
initiated on Port B.
LIP F8 Received Count, Port B. Count of the number of LIP F8s (Failure LIP) which the drive has
received on Port B.
200
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.4
Device Self-Test Results Log page (code 10h)
This page provides the results from the 20 most recent device self-tests. Results from the most recent test or
the test currently in progress is reported in the first self-test log parameter; results from the second most recent
self-test is reported in the second self-test log structure parameter and so on. If fewer than 20 device self-tests
have occurred, the unused entries are zero filled.
The following table describes the Device Self-Test Results Log page returned by the device server upon
request by the application client.
Table 134: Self-Test Results Log page format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
Page Code (10h)
Reserved
(MSB)
1
2
3
Page Length (0190h)
(LSB)
Self-Test Results Log Parameters
4
.
.
.
23
First Self-Test Results Log Parameter (Most Recent)
(2nd through 19th Self-Test Results Log Parameters)
20th Self-Test Results Log Parameter (Least Recent)
.
.
.
384
.
.
.
403
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
10h
Page Length
0190h The length (in bytes) of the parameter list that is transferred from the device server to the application client.
Self-Test Results Log page code.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Self-Test Results Log Parameter fields
Table 135: Device Self-Test Results Log parameter data format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
(MSB)
Parameter Code (0001h to 0014h)
(LSB)
1
2
0
DU
0
DS
0
TSD
0
1
1
TMC
ETC
LBIN
LP
Parameter Control Bits
Reserved
Parameter Length (10h)
3
4
5
6
7
8
Self-Test Code
Self-Test Results Value
Self-Test Segment Number
(MSB)
Timestamp
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
.
.
.
LBA of First Failure
15
16
17
18
19
Reserved
Additional Sense Code
Sense Key
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
Vendor Specific
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional Sense Code
This field may contain a hierarchy of additional information relating to error or exception conditions that occurred during the
self-test represented in the same format used by the sense data (see Request Sense command).
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
This field may contain a hierarchy of additional information relating to error or exception conditions that occurred during the
self-test represented in the same format used by the sense data (see Request Sense command).
LBA of First Failure
This field contains information that helps you locate the failure on the media. If the logical unit implements logical blocks,
the content of this field is the first logical block address where a self-test error occurred. This implies nothing about the qual-
ity of any other logical block on the logical unit, since the testing during which the error occurred may not have been per-
formed in a sequential manner. This value does not change (e.g., as the result of block reassignment). The content of this
fields will be FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh if no errors occurred during the self-test or if the error that occurred is not related to an
identifiable media address.
Parameter Code
This field identifies the log parameter being transferred. The Parameter Code field for the results of the most recent self-test
contains 0001h; the Parameter Code field for the results of the second most recent test contains 0002h, etc.
202
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Control Bits
DU
0
0
0
0
Value provided by device server
DS
Device server supports saving of parameter
Device server manages saving of parameter
No threshold comparison is made on this value
Ignored when ETC is 0
TSD
ETC
TMC xxx
LBIN
LP
1
1
The parameter is in binary format
The parameter is a list parameter
Parameter Length
10h
This value is always 10h.
Self-Test Code
This field contains the value in the Self-Test Code field of the Send Diagnostics command that initiated this device self-test
(see Send Diagnostics command).
Self-Test Results Value
00h
01h
The self-test routine completed without error.
The background self-test routine was aborted by the application client using a Send Diagnostics command
with the Self-Test Code field set to 100b (Abort background self-test).
02h
03h
The self-test routine was aborted by an application client using a method other than a Send Diagnostics
command with the Self-Test Code field set to 100b (e.g., by a task management function, by a reset, or by
issuing an exception command).
An unknown error occurred while the device server was executing the self-test routine and the device server
was unable to complete the self-test routine.
04h
The self-test completed with a failure in a test segment, and the test segment that failed is not known.
05h
The first segment of the self-test failed.
The second segment of the self-test failed.
Another segment of the self-test failed.
Reserved.
06h
07h
08-0Eh
0Fh
Self-test is in progress.
Self-Test Segment Number
This field identifies the number of the segment that failed during the self-test.
00h
The segment that failed cannot or need not be identified.
Sense Key
This field may contain a hierarchy of additional information relating to error or exception conditions that occurred during the
self-test represented in the same format used by the sense data (see Request Sense command).
Timestamp
This field contains the total accumulated power-on hours of the device server at the time the self-test operation was com-
pleted. If the test is still in progress, the content of this field is 0. If the power-on hours for the device server at the time the
self-test operation was completed is greater than FFFFh, the content of this field is FFFFh.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.5
Cache Statistics page (code 37h)
Log Page code 37h specifies Cache Statistics page.
Table 136: Cache Statistics page
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parameter Code
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
The number of logical blocks that have been sent to an initiator.
The number of logical blocks that have been received from an initiator.
The number of logical blocks read from the cache memory that have been sent to an initiator.
The number of read and write commands that had data lengths equal or less than the current segment size.
The number of read and write commands that had data lengths greater than the current segment size.
204
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.10.6
Factory Log page (code 3Eh)
Log Page code 3Eh specifies factory status parameters.
Table 137: Factory Log page
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Parameter Code
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Parameter Code
0000h
Power-on Time. The number of drive power-on minutes. Currently, the Power-on Time parameter is the only
parameter in this Log Page that is visible to OEM/customers.
0008h
The time, in minutes, to the next scheduled interrupt for a S.M.A.R.T. measurement.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15h
Mode Select (6) command
12.11
The Mode Select command provides a means for the initiator to specify medium, logical unit, or peripheral
device parameters to the disc drive. The drive also implements the Mode Sense command (see 12.13). Initia-
tors should issue Mode Sense prior to Mode Select to determine supported pages, page lengths, and other
parameters.
The drive maintains a common set of mode parameters shared by all initiators. If an initiator sends a Mode
Select command that changes any parameters, the drive generates a Unit Attention condition for all initiators
except the one that issued the Mode Select command. The drive sets the additional sense code to Mode
Parameters Changed.
Table 138: Mode Select (6) command (15h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved
PF
Reserved
SP
Reserved
Reserved
Parameter List Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Parameter List Length
The length (in bytes) of the Mode Select parameter list that is transferred during the Data Out phase.
No data will be transferred. This condition is not considered an error.
0
PF (Page Format)
1
The data sent by the initiator after the Mode Select header and the block descriptors (if any) complies with the Page
Format mode.
0
The data sent by the initiator after the Mode Select header and the block descriptors (if any) are vendor unique. The
disc drive does not interpret the PF bit. It assumes the Page Format mode.
SP (Save Pages)
1
The disc drive saves the savable pages. The format related parameters in the block descriptor, pages 3 and 4 are
saved during a Format command as well as a Mode Select command with SP = 1. The disc drive must update the
Current mode values with parameters included with this command, save the Current values of the savable parame-
ters, and report Good status only after the save operation is completed. The saved parameters are not changed if
an error is detected during the Mode Select command.
0
The saved parameter values are not changed.
The Mode Select parameter list (Table 139) contains a four-byte header, followed by zero or one block descrip-
tors, followed by the pages of Mode Select Parameters.
206
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The target terminates all the Mode Select commands with Check Condition status, sets the sense key to Illegal
Request and sets the additional sense code to Invalid Field In Parameter List, and does not change any mode
parameters for the following conditions:
• If the Strict mode is enabled (see Table 146) and the initiator attempts to change any field that is not change-
able by the host as reported by the target. In this case, no parameters are changed by this command. The
target compares the parameters against the values as they were prior to this Mode Select command. (The
host is not penalized by values not changeable by the host, which have a target “ripple change” as a result of
this Mode Select).
• If the initiator attempts to send an unsupported value or, a nonzero value to a reserved field in the Mode
Select header, block descriptor, or any page header.
• If an initiator attempts to send a page with a length not equal to the parameter length reported for that page
by the Mode Sense command.
• If the initiator attempts to send a value for a changeable parameter that is outside the range supported by
• If the initiator sends a page descriptor with an unsupported page code value and the Strict mode is enabled.
• If the initiator sends a value in the Number of Blocks field (see Table 139) that is greater than the maximum
Number of Blocks (rounding is used if the maximum Number of Blocks might change). This is also an excep-
tion for FFFFFFFFh.
If the initiator sends a value for a changeable parameter that is outside the range supported by the target and
rounding is implemented for that parameter, the target will either:
• round the parameter to an acceptable value and if Round is one, terminate the command, or
• round the parameter to an acceptable value and if Round equals zero, terminate the command as if an
acceptable value had been sent from the initiator.
A target may alter any mode parameter in any mode page (even parameters reported as nonchangeable) as a
result of changes to other mode parameters.
.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 139: Mode Select (6) parameter list
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Medium Type
0
0
Reserved
Block Descriptor Length Either 00h or 08h
Block descriptor
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Density Code
0
0
Number of Blocks (MSB)
0
0
Number of Blocks
0
0
Number of Blocks (LSB)
4
5
6
7
0
0
Block Length (MSB)
Block Length
Block Length (LSB)
Parameter information
0–n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Block Descriptor Length
The length (in bytes) of the Block Descriptor. It is equal to the number of bytes in the Block Descriptor (either 0 or 8) and
does not include the page headers and mode parameters.
0
No block descriptors are included in the parameter list. This condition is not considered an error.
Block Length
The length (in number of bytes) for each logical block described by the Block Descriptor. Set to desired sector size before a
Format. Valid values are even numbered sizes from 180 (B4h) to 4,096 (1000h). Not all drives can format down to 180;
some have a minimum of 256. A typical block length value is 512 (200h).
Density Code
Must be 00h to define the default density of the medium.
Note. For drives with capacities over 5 Gbytes, this byte is used for the Most Significant Byte (MSB) of the Number of
Blocks field.
Medium Type
00h
Define the default type direct access device.
208
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode Select Page Headers And Their Parameters
Number of Blocks
This field contains the number of accessible logical blocks on the logical unit. The maximum Number of Blocks depends on
the Block Length in the Block Descriptor, the Format parameters, and the Rigid Disc Drive Geometry parameters. A drive
not having the capacity programming feature will ignore the Number of Blocks field and will always have the maximum
Number of Blocks.
Drives that have the capacity programming feature set the Number of Blocks to the maximum value if the Number of Blocks
field contains FFFFFFFFh. The Number of blocks field is taken to be zero if the Block Descriptor is omitted from the Param-
eter List. If the Number of Blocks field contains zero, the capacity of the drive will not change, unless the maximum Number
of blocks change (due to changed Block Length, etc.) If the maximum Number of Blocks change, a zero in the Number of
Blocks field is processed as FFFFFFFFh. If the value in the Number of Blocks field is not greater than the maximum, the
drive will set its capacity to the value in the Number of Blocks field. A change in the Number of Blocks will not cause the
Format Corrupt condition.
Note. For drives with capacities over 5 Gbytes, the Density Code field byte is used for the Most Significant Byte (MSB) of
the Number of Blocks field.
The rest of the Mode Select parameters are organized into pages that group the parameters by function. The
parameter definitions are the same as those described in the Mode Sense command (Section 12.13) and are
not repeated here.
Table 140: Mode Select page descriptor header
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
Page Code
Page Length
Mode Parameters
1
2–n
Each page of mode parameters begins with a two-byte Page Descriptor header. The Page Code identifies the
page of mode parameters that is being transferred (see Table 145). The Page Length indicates the number of
additional bytes of mode parameters contained in this page. The number of additional bytes sent must always
match the Page Length value.
The disc drive only verifies Mode Select data that is defined as changeable by the drive. The various disc
drives support the following page codes.
Note. See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, SCSI Interface commands supported section for
a table showing the mode pages that a particular drive implements. The table shows the default
parameters for pages that are implemented, and shows which mode parameters are changeable by
that drive model.
The detailed information can be obtained by issuing the Mode Sense command requesting changeable values.
Note. There may be implicit associations between parameters defined in the pages and block descriptors.
The block length affects the optimum values (the values that achieve best performance) for the sec-
tors per track, bytes per physical sector, track skew factor, and cylinder skew factor fields in the for-
mat parameters page. In this case, the drive may change parameters not explicitly sent with the
Mode Select command. A subsequent Mode Sense command would provide information on these
changes.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
55h
Mode Select (10) command
12.12
The Mode Select (10) command provides a means for the initiator to send a list of drive operating mode
parameters to the drive.
Table 141: Mode Select (10) command (55h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
PF
Reserved
SP
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
(LSB)
Control
See the Mode Select (6) command (Section 12.11) for a description of the fields in this command. Initiators
should issue Mode Sense prior to Mode Select to determine supported pages, page lengths, and other param-
eters.
210
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Ah
Mode Sense (6) command
12.13
The Mode Sense command provides a means for the disc drive to report its medium, logical unit, or peripheral
device parameters to the initiator. It is a command complementary to the Mode Select command.
Table 142: Mode Sense command (1Ah)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
DBD
Reserved
2
3
4
5
PCF
Page Code
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Allocation Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes that the initiator has allocated for returned Mode Sense data. Any value other than zero indicates the
maximum number of bytes transferred.
0
No Mode Sense data is transferred. This condition is not considered an error.
The disc drive terminates the data when allocation length bytes have been transferred or when all available Mode Sense
data has been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DBD (Disable Block Descriptors)
0
The drive may return zero or more block descriptors in the returned Mode Sense data, at the drive’s discretion.
Seagate FC-AL products return one block descriptor if the DBD bit is zero.
1
The drive does not return any block descriptors in the returned Mode Sense data. The Block Descriptor Length field
of the Mode Sense header contains 00h to indicate a block descriptor length of zero.
Page Code
This field allows the initiator to select one or all of the pages of Mode parameters supported by the target. Page codes that
may be supported by the disc drive are summarized in Table 145 on page 215 (also see the individual drive’s Product Man-
ual, Volume 1).
PCF (Page Control Field)
The content of mode parameter bytes is determined by the value of this field. The disc drive returns the same Page Length
for each supported page regardless of the value of PCF. The block descriptor contains its normal values regardless of the
value of the PCF. Unsupported fields or bits within a page are returned as zeros for all PCF values. PCF is defined below.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Page control description
0
0
Return Current values. The Current values are the values currently being used by the disc drive to control its
operation. After a Power On Reset, a hard Reset, or a Bus Device Reset message the Current values are
equal to the Saved values (if Saved values can be retrieved) or the Default values (if Saved values cannot be
retrieved). The Current value of a parameter is updated by a Mode Select command if the Mode Select com-
mand ends with Good status returned.
0
1
Return Changeable values. The changeable values of any page is a mask that indicates the parameters that
are changed via a Mode Select command and the parameters that are not. Each returned parameter byte
contains ones where a field or bit may be changed and zeros where a field or bit may not be changed.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
0
1
Return Default values. The Default values are the values to which the disc drive sets the Current values after
a reset condition unless valid Saved values are available.
Return Saved values. The saved values are the values the disc drive stores in nonvolatile memory. The
Saved values of any changeable parameter can be set to new values via a Mode Select command with the
SMP bit set to 1. For nonchangeable parameters, the Default value is used.
212
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 143: Mode Sense (6) parameter list
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Sense Data Length
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
2
3
0
0
WP
0
DPO-FUA
0
Reserved
Reserved
Block Descriptor Length (8 decimal)
Block descriptor data
0
1
2
3
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Number of Blocks (MSB)
0
0
Number of Blocks
0
0
Number of Blocks
0
0
Number of Blocks (LSB)
0
0
Reserved
Block Length (MSB)
Block Length
5
6
7
Block Length (LSB)
Parameter information
Mode Sense Page Headers and Their Parameters
0–n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Block Descriptor Length
The length (in bytes) of the Block Descriptor. It is equal to the number of bytes in the Block Descriptor (8) and does not
include the page headers and mode parameters, if any. The disc drive sends one Block Descriptor.
Each Block Descriptor specifies the medium characteristics for all or part of a logical unit. Each Block Descriptor contains a
Density Code, a Number of Blocks, and a Block Length.
Block Length
As defined after a format function, specifies the length (in bytes) of each logical block described by the Block Descriptor.
Default is 512 if no Mode Select command is received before the Format command. The disc drive may be formatted from
180 to 4,096 bytes per sector in multiples of four bytes.
DPO-FUA (Disable Page Out–Force Unit Access)
0
When used with the Mode Sense command, the target does not contain a cache memory or does not support the
DPO and FUA bits.
1
The target supports the DPO and FUA bits.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode Sense Page Headers and Their Parameters
Number of Blocks
The number of logical blocks of the medium that meets the Block Length in the Block Descriptor.
0
All of the remaining logical blocks of the logical unit have the medium characteristics specified by the Block Descrip-
tor.
Sense Data Length
The length (in bytes) of the following Mode Sense data that is available to be transferred to the initiator. The Sense Data
Length does not include itself.
WP (Write Protect)
0
1
The medium is write enabled.
The medium is write protected.
Mode Sense page descriptor header
Table 144: Mode Sense page descriptor header
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
PS
0
Page Code
Page Length
Mode Parameters
2–n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Mode Parameters
The contents of the mode pages being transferred. The number of bytes is indicated in the Page Length field.
Page Code
Each page of mode parameters (for the Mode Sense command) begins with a two-byte Page Descriptor Header. The Page
Code identifies the page of mode parameters that is being transferred (see Table 145). The parameter bit values are left
blank herein, because they may be different for each drive model.
Note. See the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, for a table giving the Mode Sense parameter values that are
applicable to the disc drive model of interest. The tables in Volume 1 also show which parameters are changeable
in the drive model of interest and which are not.
Multiple pages of mode parameters may be transferred in one Mode Sense Data In phase (using Page Code 3Fh). If a non-
supported page code is requested by the Initiator, the disc drive terminates the command with Check Condition status, sets
the sense key to 05, Illegal Request, and sets the additional sense code to 24, Invalid Field In Parameter List.
214
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 145: Mode sense page code section reference
Page code
Page description
Reference table
Unit Attention page
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
07h
08h
0Ah
0Ch
10h
19h
1Ah
1Ch
Error Recovery
Disconnect/Reconnect Control
Format Parameters
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry
Verify Error Recovery page
Caching page
Control Mode page
Notch and Partition page
XOR Control Mode page
Fibre Channel Interface Control page
Power Condition page
Informational Exceptions Control page
Page Length
The length of the mode parameters that follow (in bytes). If the initiator does not set this value to the value that is returned
for the page by the Mode Sense command, the drive terminates the command with Check Condition status. The sense key
is set to Illegal Request with the additional sense code set to Invalid Field in Parameter List. The drive is permitted to imple-
ment a mode page that is less than the full page length defined by this specification, provided no field is truncated and the
page length field correctly specifies the actual length implemented. If the Strict bit equals zero and if the page length speci-
fied by the initiator is shorter than the actual page length, then the parameters are transferred and the command ends with
Good status if no other items cause the command to be rejected.
Caution: Data integrity may be adversely affected if an initiator uses this forgiving option without analyzing the impact of
the truncation.
See the individual page code descriptions for specific page lengths.
PS (Parameter Savable)
1
0
Page contains savable parameters.
None of the parameters within the page are savable.
Since the parameters within pages 3 and 4 are always saved during Format commands (but not by a Mode Select com-
mand with the SMP bit set to 1), these pages return a 1 for the PS bit.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.1
Unit Attention page (00h)
The Unit Attention page is the last page reported by the drive. See your individual drive’s Product Manual, Vol-
ume 1, Mode Sense Data section, for a table showing codes that indicate which of these bits are changeable
by the host using the Mode Select command.
Table 146: Unit Attention page (00h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
PS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Page Code (00h)
Page Length
1
2
0
0
PM
IL
Unit Attn
Rnd
JIT2
Strict
JIT1
SCSI-2
JIT0
Default
Reserved
3
Self
Seek
Reserved
Reserved
JIT3
Default
4
5
6
7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
IL (Inquiry Length)
1
0
The standard Inquiry data available to a host is limited to the 36 bytes required by the SCSI-2 specification.
148 bytes of standard Inquiry data are available. The Additional Length field in byte 4 of the Inquiry data is updated
to reflect the actual number of additional bytes available.
JIT (Just In Time)
These bits allow you to enable and disable certain seek speeds. JIT0 represents the fastest seek type used by the drive,
JIT1 represents the second fastest, JIT2 represents the third fastest, and JIT3 represents the slowest seek type.
You can use these bits to reduce acoustics by disabling the fastest seeks. This can also reduce power consumption (from
seek activity). These JIT settings only affect user read and write operations. Background drive operations and user seek
commands will always use the fastest seek type.
1
0
The drive is allowed to use this seek type in its seek speed algorithm.
The drive is not allowed to use this seek type in its seek speed algorithm.
Note. If all JIT bits are set to zero, the drive enables JIT0 only.
Page Code
00h
Unit Attention page code.
Page Length
02h or 06h
The length of the Unit Attention page (in bytes).
PM (Performance Mode)
This bit is used to control the drive’s cache management algorithm to allow best performance in different types of systems.
It is the initiator’s responsibility to determine which setting is best for that system.
1
0
The number of cache segments is fixed to the value set in mode page 8.
The drive will optimize the number of segments depending on the command activity observed by the drive. The
number of segments value (in mode page 8) is ignored.
216
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is only used with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The drive is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
Rnd (Round)
1
0
The drive treats and reports rounded parameters as described in Section 11.6.
The drive rounds the parameter and handles command completion reporting as if the parameter had not been
rounded.
SCSI-2
1
The following SCSI-3 features are changed from their SCSI-3 definition to the SCSI-2 definition:
Control Mode Page (0Ah) Length from 0Ah to 06h.
Caching Page (08h) Length from 12h to 0Ah.
0
The SCSI-3 features remain as specified in other portions of this specification.
Self Seek
1
The drive will enter self seek mode for testing purposes. Such testing could include, but is not limited to, power dis-
sipation and acoustics. While in this mode, the drive will accept SCSI commands and will process them in between
the self seek operations, including a mode select to turn this bit back off. As such, this bit should be off for normal
drive operations.
0
The drive will not self seek; normal operating mode.
Strict
1
The drive checks for Initiator attempts to change unchangeable parameters. If the drive detects an attempt it rejects
the command in the standard way, i.e., Check Condition status from drive, Request Sense from the Initiator, Illegal
Request sense key (5h) back from the drive.
0
The drive ignores the values of the unchangeable parameters in a Mode Select command. The drive does not reject
the command trying to change unchangeable parameters.
Unit Attn (Unit Attention)
1
0
Unit Attention is logged in sense only; no Check Condition status is presented following any reset.
Check Condition is presented for all affected Initiators following a reset until Request Sense is issued by each Initia-
tor (as per current operation).
Note. Byte 3 is reserved for future compatibility with Seagate host adapters. Though presently may be
changeable (see S2 field definition), this byte does not control anything unless the individual drive’s
Product Manual indicates that it does and defines its use in the Mode Sense Data section.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.2
Error Recovery page (01h)
The disc drive Error Recovery page implementation is defined in Table 147. This table summarizes the function
and default for each byte/bit.
See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, section showing changeable values. A value of zero (0)
means this bit function is not directly changeable by an initiator; a value of 1 means the bit function is directly
changeable by an initiator (see Mode Select command).
Table 147: Error Recovery page (01h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
PS
Page Code (01h)
Page Length (0Ah bytes)
Error recovery parameters
2
AWRE
ARRE
TB
RC
EER
PER
DTE
DCR
Default
3
Read Retry Count
Correction Span (bits)
Head Offset Count
Data Strobe Offset Count
Reserved
Default
4
Default
5
Default
6
Default
7
Default
8
Write Retry Count
Default
9
Reserved
Default
10
11
(MSB)
Recovery Time Limit
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
ARRE (Automatic Read Reallocation of defective data blocks Enabled)
1
Allows the disc drive to automatically reallocate bad blocks detected during read operations. Automatic reallocation
is performed only if the drive successfully recovers the data and is able to place it in the reallocated block.
0
The disc drive will not perform automatic reallocation but will create Check Condition status with sense key of
Medium Error instead.
AWRE (Automatic Write Reallocation of defective data blocks Enabled)
1
Allows the disc drive to automatically reallocate bad blocks detected during write operations. The drive performs the
automatic write reallocation only if the drive has the valid data (e.g., original data in the buffer or recovered from the
medium). The valid data is placed in the reallocated block. This function doesn’t apply to the Format Unit command.
0
The disc drive will not perform automatic reallocation but will create Check Condition status with sense key of
Medium Error instead.
218
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Correction Span
The size of the largest read data error (in bits) which ECC correction can correct. If errors longer than or equal to 255 (FFh)
bits can be corrected, 255 (FFh) shall be reported in this field.
Data Strobe Offset Count
0
Zero is the default value and is not changeable. This feature is not programmable by the initiator. Data Strobe Off-
sets are performed as part of the disc drive’s retry algorithms.
DCR (Disable Correction)
1
0
ECC correction will not be applied to the data even if correction is possible.
ECC correction will be applied if correction is possible.
DTE (Disable Transfer on Error)
The DTE bit is valid only when the PER bit is set to one.
1
The disc drive terminates data transfer even for recoverable errors (the drive will transfer the data for the recovered
error before terminating the transfer).
0
Data transfer continues if recoverable errors are encountered. Recoverable errors are reported after all data has
been transferred.
EER (Enable Early Recovery)
1
The drive is allowed to apply maximum T level ECC correction on the fly before attempting other retry mechanisms.
Seek error retries are not affected by this bit. Successful correction on the fly is not reported to the host as an error.
0
The drive applies ECC correction before other retry mechanisms, but performs only normal T level ECC corrections
on the fly (normal T level is product specific, but is typically max T - 1). The DCR bit must also be set to 0. Success-
ful correction on the fly is not reported to the host as an error.
Head Offset Count
Zero is the default value and is not changeable. This feature is not programmable by the initiator. Head offsets are
performed as part of the disc drive’s retry algorithms.
0
Page Code
01h
Error Recovery page code.
Page Length
0Ah The length of the Error recovery page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the
page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PER (Post Error)
1
The disc drive reports Check Condition status and appropriate sense key for any recovered errors encountered.
Reporting of unrecoverable errors has priority over reporting of recoverable errors.
0
Any errors recovered within the limits established by the other Error Recovery Flags are not reported. Any unrecov-
erable errors are reported.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
Page 01h parameter data is savable.
RC (Read Continuous)
1
Requests the disc drive to transfer the requested data length without adding delays (for retries or ECC correction)
that may be required to ensure data integrity. The disc drive may send erroneous data in order to maintain the con-
tinuous flow of data. This bit overrides the DTE bit if it is set. RC bit also has priority over EER, DCR, and PER bits.
0
Recovery actions during data transfer are allowed.
Note. This bit is set to zero (0) and is not changeable in most, if not all, of the drive models covered by this manual. See
individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, section showing changeable values.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read Retry Count
The maximum number of times the disc drive attempts its read recovery algorithms. A Retry Count of zero inhibits non-ECC
retries from being performed.
Recovery Time Limit
The maximum number of milliseconds that is allowed for recovery time. A hex FFFF indicates that the Recovery Time Limit
is unlimited.
TB (Transfer Block)
1
0
The data block that is not recovered will be transferred to the initiator.
The failing data block will not be transferred.
Write Retry Count
The maximum number of times that the target attempts its recovery algorithm during write operations.
220
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.3
Disconnect/Reconnect Control page (02h)
The Disconnect/Reconnect Control page implementation is defined in Table 148. This table summarizes the
function and defines the default values.
See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, section showing changeable values. A value of zero (0)
means this bit function is not directly changeable by an initiator; a value of 1 means the bit function is directly
changeable by an initiator (see Mode Select command).
Table 148: Disconnect/Reconnect Control page (02h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
PS
Page Code (02h)
Page Length (0Eh)
Disconnect/reconnect control parameters
2
Buffer Full Ratio
Default
3
Buffer Empty Ratio
Default
4
Bus Inactivity Limit (MSB)
Bus Inactivity Limit (LSB)
Disconnect Time Limit
Default
5
Default
6,7
Default
8,9
Default
Connect Time Limit
10,11
MSB
Default
Maximum Burst Size
LSB
12
Default
0
0
0
EMDP
DImm
DTDC
Reserved
13–15
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer Empty Ratio
This number is the numerator of a fractional multiplier that has 256 (100h) as its denominator. This field indicates, on Write
commands, how empty the disc drive’s buffer will be before attempting to arbitrate from control of the loop. The disc drive,
rounds the requested ratio down to the nearest whole logical block. This value is changeable by an initiator.
Buffer Full Ratio
This number is the numerator of a fractional multiplier that has 256 (100h) as its denominator. This field indicates, on Read
commands, how full the disc drive’s buffer will be before attempting to arbitrate for control of the loop. The disc drive rounds
the requested ratio up to the nearest whole logical block. This value is changeable by an initiator.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The buffer full ratio is taken to be a percentage of the smaller of:
the buffer size
or
the remaining transfer length.
For example, if the buffer full ratio is 80h (128 Decimal) (indicating a 128/256 or 50% value), the transfer length of a read
command is 20h blocks, and the buffer size is 30h blocks, the arbitration begins when 10h blocks (50% of the transfer
length of 20h blocks) is in the buffer.
Bus Inactivity Limit
Not supported (bytes 4 and 5).
Connect Time Limit
Not supported (bytes 8 and 9).
DImm (Disconnect Immediate)
Not supported.
Disconnect Time Limit
Not supported (bytes 6 and 7).
DTDC (Data Transfer Disconnect Control)
Not supported.
EMDP (Enable Modify Data Pointers)
Not supported.
Maximum Burst Size
The maximum amount of data that the drive will transfer in a Fibre Channel sequence. For performance, the maximum
burst size should be a size that fits in a cache segment.
The disc drive defaults to an integer multiple of 512 that is less than or equal to a segment size. The length of the sequence
is an integer multiple of the frame size that is less than or equal to the maximum burst size.
This value is expressed in increments of 512 bytes (e.g., a value of one means 512 bytes, two means 1024 bytes, etc.).
The data length for a command may span multiple sequences.
Page Code
02h
Disconnect/Reconnect Control page code.
Page Length
0Eh The length of the Disconnect/Reconnect Control page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of
the page, the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The page 02h parameter data is savable.
222
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.4
Format Parameters page (03h)
The Format Parameters page implementation is defined in Table 149. This table summarizes the function and
defines the default values for each bit. See the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, Mode Sense Data
section for changeable values.
The only time this page of parameters may be sent is immediately before sending a Format Unit command to
the disc drive. The current parameters for this page are updated immediately but any changes between these
current parameters and the existing media format are not in effect until after the Format Unit command is com-
pleted.
The actual implementation of reserving spare areas for defect management takes place during the Format Unit
command.
track capacity recording) zone. ZBR zones are referred to as notches (page 0Ch is the Notch
page).
Table 149: Format Parameters page (03h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
PS
Page Code (03h)
Page Length (16h)
Format parameters
2,3
Default
Tracks Per Zone (MSB)
Alternate Sectors Per Zone
Alternate Tracks Per Zone
Alternate Tracks Per Volume
Sectors Per Track
4,5
Default
6,7
Default
8,9
Default
10,11
Default
12,13
Default
Data Bytes Per Physical Sector
Interleave
14,15
Default
16,17
Default
Track Skew Factor
18,19
Default
Cylinder Skew Factor
20
Default
SSEC
HSEC
RMB
SURF
Reserved
Drive Type
21–23
Default
Reserved
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Table
number
Alternate Sectors Per Zone
The number of spare sectors to be reserved for the defined defect management zone.
0
No sectors are to be reserved in each zone for defect management. This is to accommodate hosts that want to
manage the defects themselves.
Alternate Tracks Per Volume
The number of spare tracks to be reserved at the end of the drive volume. The disc drive uses these locations for replacing
defective sectors.
Typically the disc drive defaults to two times the number of read/write heads in the drive, which amounts to two spare cylin-
ders. A value of zero (0) indicates that no spare tracks are to be reserved at the end of the unit for defect management. The
initiator may change this value for a number between 0 and 255 that is a multiple of the total number of Data Read/Write
heads installed.
Alternate Tracks Per Zone
The number of spare tracks to be reserved at the end of each defect management zone.
0
No spare tracks are to be reserved in each zone for defect management by the disc drive.
Cylinder Skew Factor
The average number of physical sectors between the last logical block of one cylinder and the first logical block of the next
cylinder. A value of zero indicates no skew. Cylinder skew will be utilized by a disc drive but is not changeable by an initia-
tor.
Data Bytes Per Physical Sector
The number of data bytes the disc drive allocates per physical sector. This value equals the block length reported in the
Mode Sense block descriptor. The bytes per physical sector is not directly changeable by the initiator and is not verified on
a Mode Select command.
Drive Type
The Hard Sectoring (HSEC) bit (bit 6) set to one indicates the disc drive uses hard sector formatting.
The Soft Sectoring (SSEC) bit (bit 7) when set to one indicates the drive uses soft sectoring.
Bits 0–5, and 7 are not implemented by the disc drive and are always zero. Bits 0 – 7 are not changeable.
Interleave
The interleave value sent to the disc drive during the last Format Unit command.
Note. This field is valid only for Mode Sense commands. The disc drive ignores this field during Mode Select com-
mands.
Page Code
03h
Format Parameters page code.
Page Length
16h
The length of the Format Parameters page (in bytes).
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The page 03h parameter data is savable.
RMB (Removable)
0
1
Indicates that the logical unit supports removable media.
Indicates that the logical unit does not support removable media.
The status of this bit is reflected in the Inquiry command, removable media bit (RMB).
224
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sectors Per Track
The average number of physical sectors the disc drive has per disc track. This value depends on the selected sector size
and ZBR zones. The number of user accessible sectors per track may be fewer than the reported value, since sectors per
track includes sectors set aside for defect management. This value cannot be used to calculate drive user-accessible
capacity.
Note. The value cannot be directly selected with the Mode Select command, but is a report of how the drive is config-
ured.
SURF (Surface)
0
The target allocates progressive addresses to all logical blocks within a cylinder prior to allocating addresses on the
next cylinder
1
The target allocates progressive addresses to all logical blocks on a surface prior to allocating sector addresses on
the next surface.
Track Skew Factor
The average number of physical sectors between the last logical block on one track and the first logical block on the next
sequential track of the same cylinder. A value of zero indicates no skew.
Note. This value is not changeable by an initiator.
Tracks Per Zone
The number of tracks the disc drive allocates to each defect management zone. Seagate drives define a defect manage-
ment zone as one track or one cylinder. A programmed value of 1 defines one track per zone (i.e. spare sectors per track).
Any other recorded value results in the drive defining one cylinder as the defect management zone and the drive automati-
cally inserts the number of read/write heads (i.e., number of tracks per cylinder) in this field. Default value is usually 1, but
see individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.5
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page (04h)
The Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page implementation is defined in Table 150. This table summa-
rizes the function and defines the default value.
See the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, Mode Sense Data section, for changeable values.
Table 150: Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page (04h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
PS
Page Code (04h)
Page Length (16h)
Rigid disc drive geometry parameters
Number of Cylinders (MSB)
Number of Cylinders
2 Default
3 Default
4 Default
5 Default
Number of Cylinders (LSB)
Number of Heads
6–8
Default
Startling Cylinder–Write Precomp.
Starting Cylinder–Reduced Write Current
Drive Step Rate
9–11
Default
12,13
Default
14–16
Default
Landing Zone Cylinder
17
Default
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RPL
18
Default
Rotational Offset (XXh)
19
Default
20
0
0
0
0
Reserved
(MSB)
Medium Rotation Rate
21
(LSB)
0
22
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
23
Reserved
Reserved
0
Default
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Drive Step Rate
Not applicable.
226
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Landing Zone Cylinder
Not applicable.
Medium Rotation Rate
On Mode Sense commands, these bytes return drive nominal rotation rate in revolutions per minute for synchronous spin-
dle operation. The bytes have no meaning for Mode Select.
Number of Cylinders
The number of physical cylinders used for data storage. This may or may not include spare cylinders set aside for flaw real-
location. See individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, which specifies what the drive reports.
The disc drive uses some additional cylinders for storing disc drive parameters, defect lists, or for diagnostic purposes.
These are not accessible by the user.
Number of Heads
The maximum number of data (read/write) heads on the disc drive.
Page Code
04h
Page Length
16h The length of the Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to trans-
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page code.
fer all of the page, the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
See applicable drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, for features supported. This bit is not used with the Mode Select com-
mand.
1
Page 04 parameter data is savable and is saved when a Format function is performed. In some drives an exception
exists that applies to bytes 17 and 18. In the exception drives, bytes 17 and 18 are only saved if the SMP bit in the
Rotational Offset
Rotational skew in the lagging direction used for spindle synchronization.
XXh Represents a XXh/FFh fractional part of a revolution lagging offset. One revolution lag is maximum.
RPL (Rotation Position Locking)
Used for spindle synchronization.
00b
Automatic spindle synchronization (automatic master arbitration is used to determine which device in the chain is to
be the master).
01b
10b
11b
The target operates as a synchronized spindle slave.
The target operates as a synchronized spindle master.
The target operates as a synchronized spindle master control (not supported by the disc drive).
Starting Cylinder–Reduced Write Current
Not applicable.
Starting Cylinder–Write Precomp
Not applicable.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.6
Verify Error Recovery page (07h)
The Verify Error Recovery page specifies the error recovery parameters the target uses during the Verify com-
mand and the verify operation of the Write and Verify command.
Table 151: Verify Error Recovery page (07h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
Page Code (07h)
0
1
1
0
PS
Reserved
Page Length (0Ah)
Verify error recovery parameters
2
Default
3 Default
4 Default
5
0
0
0
0
0
PER
DTE
DCR
Reserved
EER
Verify Retry Count
Verify Correction Span (bits)
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Default
6
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
0
0
Default
7
0
0
Default
8
0
0
Default
9
0
(MSB) 1
1
0
1
Default
10
Default
11
Verify Recovery Time Limit
1
1
1 (LSB)
Default
Verify Recovery Time Limit
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DCR (Disable Correction)
1
0
ECC correction will not be applied to the data even if correction is possible.
ECC correction will be applied if correction is possible.
DTE (Disable Transfer on Error)
The DTE bit is valid only when the PER bit is set to 1.
1
The disc drive terminates data transfer even for recoverable errors (the drive will transfer the data for the recovered
error before terminating the transfer).
0
Data transfer continues if recoverable errors are encountered. Recoverable errors are reported after all data has
been transferred.
228
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EER (Enable Early Recovery)
1
The disc drive applies on-the-fly T>1 ECC correction as soon as possible, before attempting other retry mecha-
nisms, and without reporting successful corrections to the host as recovered error. Seek error retries and message
system errors are not affected by this bit. When this bit is set to 1, the DCR bit must be zero (0).
0
The disc drive applies ECC correction before other retry mechanisms, but does not perform T>1 corrections on the
fly; any successful correction will be reported to the host as a recovered error.
Page Code
07h
Verify Error Recovery page code.
Page Length
0Ah This field specifies the length of the parameter that follows (in bytes).
PER (Post Error)
1
The disc drive reports Check Condition status and appropriate sense key for any recovered errors encountered.
Reporting of unrecoverable errors has priority over reporting of recoverable errors.
0
Any errors recovered within the limits established by the other Error Recovery Flags are not reported. Any unrecov-
erable errors are reported.
PS (Parameter Savable)
Used only with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The target is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
Verify Correction Span
The size (in bits) of the largest burst data error for which data error correction may be attempted. If the drive does not imple-
ment this field, a value of zero (0) is returned in Mode Sense data.
Verify Recovery Time Limit
The maximum time (in increments of one millisecond) that the drive uses error recovery procedures to recover data for an
individual logical block. If the verify retry count and the verify recovery time limit are both specified, the one that requires the
least time for a data error recovery actions has priority. The drive may round this value.
Verify Retry Count
The number of times the drive will attempt its recovery algorithm during a verify operation. If the verify retry count and the
verify recovery time limit are both specified, the one that requires the least time for data error recovery actions has priority.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.7
Caching Parameters page (08h) for Mode Sense/Mode Select
The Caching Parameters page defines the parameters that affect the use of the cache.
Table 152: Caching Parameters page (08h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page descriptor header
Page Code (08h)
0
1
PS
Reserved
Page Length (12h)
2
IC
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
ABPF
CAP
DISC
SIZE
WCE
MF
RCD
3
Demand Read Retention Priority
Write Retention Priority
4
Disable Prefetch Transfer Length
Minimum Prefetch
(LSB)
5
6
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
7
8
Maximum Prefetch
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Maximum Prefetch Ceiling
FSW
LBCSS
DRA
Reserved
Number of Cache Segments
(MSB)
Cache Segment Size
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
(MSB)
Non-Cache Segment Size
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
ABPF (Abort Prefetch)
1
With the DRA bit equal to zero (0), requests that the SCSI device abort the prefetch upon selection.
The ABPF set to 1 takes precedence over the Minimum Prefetch bytes.
0
With the DRA bit equal to zero (0), the termination of any active prefetch is dependent upon Caching Page bytes 4
through 11 and is operation and/or vendor specific.
Cache Segment Size
The requested segment size (in bytes). This standard assumes that the Cache Segment Size field is valid only when the
SIZE bit is 1.
CAP (Caching Analysis Permitted)
1
0
Caching analysis enabled.
Caching analysis disabled.
230
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Demand Read Retention Priority
The cache replacement algorithm does not distinguish between retention in the cache of host-requested data and prefetch
data. Therefore, this half byte is always zero (0).
Disable Prefetch Transfer Length
Prefetch is disabled for any SCSI Read command whose requested transfer length exceeds this value.
DISC (Discontinuity)
1
The SCSI device continues the prefetch across time discontinuities, such as across cylinders or tracks up to the lim-
its of the buffer, or segment, space available for prefetch.
0
Prefetches are truncated at time discontinuities.
DRA (Disable Read-Ahead)
1
0
The target will not read any logical blocks into the buffer beyond the addressed logical block(s).
The target may continue to read logical blocks into the buffer beyond the addressed logical block(s).
FSW (Force Sequential Write)
1
Multiple block writes are to be transferred over the interface and written to the media in an ascending, sequential,
logical block order.
0
The target is allowed to reorder the sequence of writing addressed logical blocks in order to achieve a faster com-
mand completion.
IC (Initiator Control)
1
0
Adaptive read look-ahead (ARLA) is disabled.
Adaptive read look-ahead (ARLA) is enabled.
Since Seagate drives covered by this manual never organize the cache according to size of segment, but rather by number
of segments, this bit is used to enable or disable adaptive RLA.
Note. ARLA cannot be disabled in some Seagate drives using the ASA II code. See individual drive’s Product Manual,
Volume 1.
LBCSS (Logical Block Cache Segment Size)
Not used at this time.
Maximum Prefetch
The maximum number of logical blocks that may be prefetched. The prefetch operation may be aborted before the maxi-
mum prefetch value is reached, but only if the minimum prefetch value has been satisfied.
Maximum Prefetch Ceiling
The upper limit on the number of logical blocks computed as the maximum prefetch. If the Maximum Prefetch value is
greater than the Maximum Prefetch Ceiling value, the value is truncated to the Maximum Prefetch Ceiling value.
MF (Multiplication Factor)
0
1
The Minimum Prefetch and Maximum Prefetch fields are interpreted as a number of logical blocks.
The target interprets the minimum and maximum prefetch fields to be specified in terms of a scalar number which,
when multiplied by the number of logical blocks to be transferred for the current command, yields the number of log-
ical blocks for each of the respective types of prefetch.
Minimum Prefetch
The minimum number of sectors to prefetch, regardless of the delay it may cause to other commands.
Non-Cache Segment Size
If the Non-Cache Buffer Size field (Bytes 17–19) is greater than zero (0), this field specifies to the target the number of
bytes the initiator requests that the target allocate for a buffer function when all other cache segments are occupied by data
to be retained. If the number is at least 1, caching functions in the other segments need not be impacted by cache misses
to perform the SCSI buffer function.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the Non-Cache Segment Size field = 0
or
the Non-Cache Segment Size field value + Cache Segment Size field > buffer size,
then
the vendor determines the cache function.
Number of Cache Segments
The number of segments into which the host requests the drive divide the cache.
Page Code
08h
Page Length
12h The length of the Caching Parameters page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page,
Caching Parameters page for Mode Sense/Mode Select page code.
the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
Page 01h parameter data is savable and the bit function is directly changeable by an initiator (see Mode Select
command).
0
This bit function is not directly changeable by an initiator, a value of 1 means the bit function is directly changeable
by an initiator. See the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, for changeable values.
RCD (Read Cache Disable)
0
1
SCSI Read commands may access the cache or the media.
SCSI Read commands must access the media. Data cannot come from the cache.
SIZE (Size Enable)
For Seagate drives covered by this manual, this bit is always zero (0).
1
0
The Cache Segment Size is to be used to control caching segmentation.
The Initiator requests that the Number of Cache Segments is to be used to control caching segmentation.
WCE (Write Cache Enable)
0
1
SCSI Write commands will not return Completion Status until all data has been written to the media.
SCSI Write commands may return Completion Status as soon as all data has been received from the host.
Write Retention Priority
The cache replacement algorithm does distinguish between retention in the cache of host-requested data and prefetch
data. Therefore, this half byte is always 0.
Note. In addition to the caching control provided by the Caching Mode page, some 10-byte commands contain control
bits DPO and FUA—the intent of which is to override the cache page control bits.
232
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.8
Mode Sense/Mode Select Control Mode page (0Ah)
The Control Mode page provides controls over several SCSI-2 features which are applicable to all device types
such as tagged queuing, extended contingent allegiance, asynchronous event notification, and error logging.
See the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, Mode Sense Data table for changeable values.
Table 153: Control Mode page (0Ah)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
Reserved
Page Code (0Ah)
PS
Page Length (0Ah)
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
GLTSD
QErr
RLEC
Default
3
Reserved
Queue Algorithm Modifier
DQue
0
Default
4
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
0
RAC
SWP
Default
5
Reserved
Not Supported
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
6 & 7
Default
8 & 9
Default
10
Reserved
0
0
0
Not Supported
Busy Timeout Period
MSB
Extended Self-Test Routine Completion Time
11
LSB
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Busy Timeout Period
The maximum time, in 100 millisecond increments, that the initiator allows for the target to remain busy for unanticipated
conditions that are not a routine part of commands from the initiator. This value may be rounded down as defined in Section
4.8 of this manual.
0000h
FFFFh
Undefined.
Unlimited period.
DQue (Disable Queuing)
Drives supported by this manual require this bit to be set to zero (0).
1
0
Tagged queuing is disabled on the disc drive. This is not a valid value for the drives supported by this manual.
Tagged queuing is enabled.
Extended Self-Test Routine Completion Time
This field contains an advisory parameter that the application client may use to determine the time, in seconds, that the
device server requires to complete the extended device self-test when the device server is not interrupted by an application
client and no errors occur during execution of the device self-test. The application client should expect this time to increase
significantly if other commands are sent to the logical unit while a test is in progress or if errors occur during execution of
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the test. Device servers supporting Self-Test Code field values other than 000b for the Send Diagnostic command (see
GLTSD (Global Logging Target Save Disable)
0
1
The target provides a target-defined method for saving log parameters (Logged to disk).
Either the target has disabled the target-defined method for saving log parameters or, when set by the initiator,
specifies that the target-defined method will be disabled.
Page Code
0Ah Control Mode page code.
Page Length
0Ah The length of the Control Mode page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the
page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
Page 0Ah parameter data is savable in nonvolatile memory.
QErr (Queue Error Management)
0
1
Commands still queued after the device has entered an auto contingent allegiance condition continue execution in a
normal manner when that condition has terminated.
Commands still queued after the device has entered an auto contingent allegiance condition will be aborted when
that condition has terminated. A unit attention condition is created for each initiator that had commands in the
queue, but not for the initiator detecting the original error.
Queue Algorithm Modifier
Specifies restrictions on the algorithm used for reordering commands that are tagged with the Simple Queue Tag message.
0h
Guarantee data integrity. The device must order the actual execution sequence of the queued command such that
data integrity is guaranteed at any time. This requires that, if the data transmission of a command was halted at any
time, the final value of all data must have exactly the same value it would have had if the command had been exe-
cuted without queuing. The guaranteed data integrity value (0h) of the queue algorithm modifier bits is the usual
default value.
1h
Unrestricted reordering allowed. The device is allowed to order the actual execution sequence of the queued com-
mands in any manner it selects. Any data integrity problems related to command sequence ordering are explicitly
handled by the host operating system software.
2h–7h Reserved.
08h–FhVendor specific.
RAC (Report A Check)
Not used at this time.
RLEC (Report Log Exception Condition)
1
0
The drive reports log exception conditions.
The drive does not report log exception conditions.
SWP (Software Write Protect)
0
1
The medium is write enabled.
The medium is write protected.
This bit is not changeable.
234
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.9
Notch page (0Ch)
The Notch page contains parameters for direct access devices that implement a variable number of blocks per
cylinder and support this page. Each section of the drive with a different number of blocks per cylinder is
referred to as a notch.
Note. These values are not changeable.
Table 154: Notch page (0Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
PS
Reserved
Page Code (0Ch)
Page Length (16h)
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ND
Default
3
LPN
0
Reserved
0
Default
4,5
Reserved
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Maximum Number of Notches
Active Notch
Default
6,7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
Default
8–11
Starting Boundary
Ending Boundary
Pages Notched
Default
12–15
Default
16–23
Default
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Active Notch
The notch to which this and subsequent Mode Select and Mode Sense commands refers, until the active notch is changed
by a later Mode Select command. The value of the active notch is greater than or equal to zero (0) and less than or equal to
the Maximum Number of Notches field value.
0
This and subsequent Mode Select and Mode Sense commands refer to the parameters that apply across all
notches.
Ending Boundary
The ending of the active notch or, if the active notch is zero (0), the ending of the drive. If the LPN bit is 1, then the four
bytes represent the logical block address. If the LPN bit is zero (0), the three most significant bytes represent the cylinder
number and the least significant byte represents the head number. When used with the Mode Select command this field is
ignored.
Each notch will span a set of consecutive logical blocks on the drive, the notches will not overlap, and no logical block will
be excluded from a notch.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LPN (Logical or Physical Notch)
0
The notch boundaries are based on the physical parameters of the drive. The cylinder is considered most signifi-
cant, the head least significant.
1
The notch boundaries are based on logical blocks on the drive.
Maximum Number of Notches
The maximum number of notches supported by the drive.
ND (Notched Drive)
0
1
The device is not notched. All other parameters in this page will be returned as zero (0) by the drive.
The drive is notched. For each supported active notch value, this page defines the starting and ending boundaries
of the notch.
Page Code
0Ch Notch page code.
Page Length
16h
The length of the Notch page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the page
length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Pages Notched
A bit map of the mode page codes that indicates which pages contain parameters that may be different for different
notches. The most significant bit of this field corresponds to Page Code 3Fh and the least significant bit corresponds to
Page Code 00h. If a bit is 1, the corresponding mode page contains parameters that may be different for different notches.
If a bit is zero (0), the corresponding mode page contains parameters that are constant for all notches.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is only used with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The drive is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
Starting Boundary
The beginning of the active notch or, if the active notch is zero (0), the beginning boundary of the drive. If the LPN bit is 1,
then the four bytes represent a logical block address. If the LPN bit is zero (0), then the three most significant bytes repre-
sent the cylinder number and the least significant byte represents the head number. When used with the Mode Select com-
mand this field is ignored.
236
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.10
XOR Control Mode page (10h)
The XOR Control Mode page provides the initiator with the means to obtain or modify certain XOR target oper-
ating parameters.
Table 155: XOR Control Mode page (10h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
PS
Reserved
Page Code (10h)
Page Length (16h)
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XORDis
0
Reserved
0
Default
3
Reserved
0
Default
4–7
Reserved
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Maximum XOR Write Size
Reserved
Default
8–11
Default
12–15
Default
16–19
Default
20
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
Maximum Regenerate Size
Maximum Rebuild Read Size
Reserved
21
22
Rebuild Delay
23
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Maximum Rebuild Read Size
The maximum rebuild length (in blocks) that the target will use for Read commands during a rebuild operation. This field
does not limit the rebuild size.
Maximum Regenerate Size
The maximum regenerate length (in blocks) that the target accepts for the Regenerate command.
Maximum XOR Write Size
The maximum transfer length (in blocks) that the target accepts for a single XDWrite Extended, XDWrite, or XPWrite com-
mand.
Page Code
10h
Page Length
16h The length of the XOR Control Mode page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page,
XOR Control Mode page code.
the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is only used with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The drive is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
Rebuild Delay
The minimum time (in milliseconds) between successive Read commands during a rebuild operation.
XORDis
This bit enables and disables XOR operations within a device.
0
1
Enables XOR operations.
Disables XOR operations. If an XOR command is sent to the target, the command is terminated with Check Condi-
tion status. The sense data will be set to Illegal Request: Invalid Command Operation Code.
238
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.11
Fibre Channel Interface Control page (19h)
The Fibre Channel Interface Control page controls options relevant to Fibre Channel protocol. It is intended for
the control of features unique to Fibre Channel protocol that are not suitable for control by login or other tech-
niques defined for Fibre Channel.
Both the current and saved values of Mode page 19h, byte 3, are changeable using the Mode Select com-
mand. When the saved value of Byte 3 is changed, a new value is stored in nonvolatile (flash) memory, not on
disc, and is reported during a Mode Sense command when either the current or saved value is requested.
The current value of Byte 3 may be modified using Mode Select command any number of times. The saved
value of Byte 3 may be modified using the Mode Select command up to 32 times. After 32 modifications, addi-
tional attempts to modify will result in a response of Illegal Request (05) with Error Code of 2600 (Invalid field in
parameter list) and the Sense Key pointing to byte 3 as the offending parameter. Additional updates of Byte 3
saved value may be accomplished by downloading new microcode that supports Fibre Channel Interface Con-
trol page 19h. After a download, the saved value of Byte 3 may be updated 31 more times or 32 times if the
value is 0 at the time of download.
The saved and current value of Byte 3 is preserved through the download.
Table 156: Fibre Channel Interface Control page (19h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
PS
Reserved
Page Code (19h)
Page Length (06h)
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
Reserved
3
Default
4
DTFD
0
PLPB
0
DDIS
0
DLM
0
DSA
0
ALWLI
0
DTIPE
0
DTOLI
0
Default
5
Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Default
6
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Default
7
Default
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
ALWLI (Allow Login Without Loop Initialization)
1
The target uses the Select_ID address available in the SCA connector and accepts logins without verifying the
address with loop initialization.
0
The target must verify the address through loop initialization before accepting a login.
DDIS (Disable Discovery)
1
The target does not require receipt of Address or Port Discovery ELS following loop initialization. The target
resumes processing of tasks upon completion of loop initialization.
0
The target must wait to receive an Address or Port Discovery ELS before it resumes processing tasks for that initia-
tor.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DLM (Disable Loop Master)
1
Indicates that a target attached to an FC-AL-2 loop shall not participate in loop master arbitration and shall not
become loop master. The target shall only repeat LISM frames it receives.
0
The target may participate in loop master arbitration in the normal manner and, if successful, may become loop
master during the loop initialization process. Targets not attached to an arbitrated loop shall ignore the DLM bit.
DSA (Disable Soft Address)
1
The target does not select a soft address if there is a conflict for the Select_ID address available in the SCA connec-
tor during loop initialization. If there is a Select_ID address conflict, the target enters the non-participation state. If
the target detects loop initialization while in the non-participation state, the target again attempts to get the Select_ID
address.
0
The target attempts to obtain a soft address during loop initialization if the Select_ID address is not available or if the
Select_ID address indicates the use of a soft address (7Fh).
If ESI activity is underway when the request for the hard address is received, the drive shall use the last known value of the
hard address before the current ESI activity started. For more information on ESI, refer to Section 10.5.
DTFD (Disable Target Fabric Discovery)
1
The target attached by an FC-AL loop will not recognize the presence of a fabric loop port (FL_Port) on the loop.
The target will only perform the private loop functions defined for FC-PLDA targets.
0
The target attached by an FC-AL loop will discover the FL_Port if present on the loop and will perform the public
loop functions defined for FC-FLA targets. Targets attached to an N_Port or to an F_Port will ignore this bit.
DTIPE (Disable Target Initiated Port Enable)
1
The target waits for an initiator to send the Loop Port Enable primitive before inserting itself into the loop. The target
uses the Select_ID address available in the SCA connector to determine if primitives are addressed to it.
Note. Do not set the PLPB bit to one (1) and the DTIPE bit to one (1) at the same time as this is an illegal bit combina-
tion. When an illegal bit combination is sent by the application client, the device server returns Check Condition
status and sets the sense key to Illegal Request with the additional sense code set to Invalid Field in the Parame-
ter List.
0
After completing self test, the target enables the port in the loop without waiting for a Loop Port Enable primitive.
DTOLI (Disable Target Originated Loop Initialization)
1
0
The target does not originate the initializing LIP following insertion into the loop. The target responds to an Initializ-
ing LIP when it is received. The target originates the Loop Failure LIP if it detects loop failure at its input. The target
originates the Initializing LIP when the loop failure is corrected.
After completing self test, the target originates the Initializing LIP when it enables a port in a loop.
Page Code
19h
Fibre Channel Interface Control page code.
Page Length
06h
The length of the Fibre Channel Interface Control page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of
the page, the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is only used with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The drive is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
PLPB (Prevent Loop Port Bypass)
1
The target ignores any Loop Port Bypass (LPB) and Loop Port Enable (LPE) primitive sequences. The loop port
remains enabled.
Note. Do not set the PLPB bit to one (1) and the DTIPE bit to one (1) at the same time as this is an illegal bit combina-
tion. When an illegal bit combination is sent by the application client, the device server returns Check Condition
status and sets the sense key to Illegal Request with the additional sense code set to Invalid Field in the Parame-
ter List.
0
The target allows the Loop Port Bypass and Port Bypass Enable primitive sequences to control the port bypass cir-
cuit.
240
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.12
Power Condition page (1Ah)
The Power Condition page provides the initiator the means to control the length of time a logical unit will delay
before changing its power requirements. There is no notification to the initiator that a logical unit has entered
into one of the power conditions. On receipt of this command, the device adjusts itself to the power condition
which allows the command to execute. The timer which maps to this power condition and any lower power con-
dition timers is reset on receipt of the command. The timer associated with this power condition is restarted
when the condition that forces the change in power completes.
Table 157: Power Condition page (1Ah)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
PS
Reserved
Page Code (1Ah)
Page Length (0Ah)
Reserved
2
3
Reserved
Idle
Standby
(LSB)
4
(MSB)
(MSB)
5
Idle Condition Timer
6
7
8
9
Standby Condition Timer
10
11
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Idle
1
The drive will use the Idle Condition Timer to determine the length of inactivity time to wait before entering the Idle
condition.
0
The drive will not enter the Idle condition.
Idle Condition Timer
The inactivity time (in 100 millisecond increments) that the logical unit will wait before entering the Idle condition. Minimum
time is 500 milliseconds.
Page Code
1Ah Power Condition page code.
Page Length
0Ah The length of the Power Condition page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all of the page, the
page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is only used with the Mode Sense command. This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
1
The drive is capable of saving the page in a nonvolatile vendor-specific location.
Standby
1
0
The drive will use the Standby Condition Timer value to determine the length of inactivity time to wait before entering
the Idle condition.
The drive will not enter the Idle condition.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.13.13
Informational Exceptions Control page (1Ch)
The Informational Exceptions Control page (see Table 158) defines the methods used by the target to control
the reporting and the operations of specific informational exception conditions. This page only applies to infor-
mational exceptions that report an additional sense code of Failure Prediction Threshold Exceeded to the
application client.
Mode page 1Ch may be used by the drive to implement the S.M.A.R.T. system. S.M.A.R.T. is an acronym for
Self-monitoring Analysis and reporting Technology. The intent of the S.M.A.R.T. system is to recognize condi-
tions that indicate imminent drive failure, and provide sufficient warning to the host system of impending failure.
Informational exception conditions occur as the result of vendor specific events within a target. An information
exception condition may occur asynchronous to any commands issued by an application client.
Table 158: Informational Exceptions Control page (1Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
PS
Reserved
Page Code (1Ch)
Page Length (0Ah)
1
2
3
4
:
Perf
EWasc
Reserved
Reserved
DExcpt
Test
Reserved
LogErr
MRIE
(MSB)
Interval Timer
7
8
:
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Report Count
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
DExcpt (Disable Exception Control)
0
Information exception operations are enabled and the Method of Reporting Informational Exceptions field
determines the reporting of information exception conditions.
1
Information exception operations are disabled by target and the Method of Reporting Informational Excep-
tions field is ignored.
EWasc
0
1
The target shall disable reporting of the warning of temperature limit exceeded.
The target shall enable reporting of the warning of temperature limit exceeded.
Interval Timer
Indicates the period (in 100 millisecond increments) for reporting that an informational exception condition has occurred.
The target does not report informational exception conditions more frequently than the time specified by the Interval Timer
field and as soon as possible after the timer interval has elapsed. After the informational exception condition has been
reported, the Interval Timer is restarted.
0
Target only reports the informational exception condition one time.
FFFFFFFFh Timer interval is vendor specific.
Maintaining of the Interval Timer field’s access power cycle and/or reset by the target is vendor specific.
LogErr (Log Errors)
0
1
The logging of informational exception conditions within a target is vendor specific.
The target logs informational exception conditions.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MRIE (Method of Reporting Informational Exceptions)
Indicates the methods that are used by the target to report informational exception conditions (see Table 159). The priority
of reporting multiple information exceptions is vendor specific.
Table 159: Method of Reporting Informational Exceptions field
MRIE
Description
No reporting of informational exception condition. This method instructs the target to not report information
exception conditions.
0h
Asynchronous event reporting. This method instructs the target to report informational exception conditions
by using the rules for asynchronous event reporting as described in the SCSI-3 Architecture Model and the
relevant Protocol Standard. The sense key is set to Recovered Error and the additional sense code indi-
cates the cause of the informational exception condition.
1h
2h
Generate unit attention. This method instructs the target to report informational exception conditions by
returning a Check Condition status on any command. The sense key is set to Unit Attention and the addi-
tional sense code indicates the cause of the informational exception condition.
The command that has the Check Condition is not executed before the informational exception condition is
reported.
Conditionally generate recovered error. This method instructs the target to report informational exception
conditions, dependent on the value of the per bit of the error recovery parameters mode page, by returning
a Check Condition status on any command. The sense key is set to Recovered Error and the additional
sense code indicates the cause of the informational exception condition.
The command that has the Check Condition completes without error before any informational exception
condition may be reported.
3h
4h
Unconditionally generate recovered error. This method instructs the target to report informational exception
conditions, regardless of the value of the per bit of the error recovery parameters mode page, by returning
a Check Condition status on any command. The sense key is set to Recovered Error and the additional
sense code indicates the cause of the information exception condition.
The command that has the Check Condition completes without error before any informational exception
condition may be reported.
Generate no sense. This method instructs the target to report informational exception conditions by return-
ing a Check Condition status on any command. The sense key is set to No Sense and the additional sense
code indicates the cause of the informational exception condition.
The command that has the Check Condition completes without error before any informational exception
condition may be reported.
5h
6h
Only report informational exception condition on request. This method instructs the target to preserve the
informational exception information. To find out about information exception conditions, the application cli-
ent polls the target by issuing an unsolicited Request Sense command. The sense key is set to No Sense
and the additional sense code indicates the cause of the informational exception condition.
Reserved.
7h-Bh
Ch-Fh
Vendor specific.
Page Code
1Ch Informational Exceptions Control page code.
Page Length
0Ah The length of the Informational Exceptions Control page (in bytes). If the allocation length is too small to transfer all
of the page, the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
PS (Parameter Savable)
This bit is not used with the Mode Select command.
244
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Perf (Performance)
0
1
Informational exception operations that are the cause of delays are acceptable.
The target does not cause delays while doing informational exception operations. A Perf bit set to one may cause
the target to disable some or all of the informational exceptions operations, thereby limiting the reporting of informa-
tional exception conditions.
Report Count
Indicates the number of times to report an informational exception condition to the application client. Maintaining of the
Report Count field’s access power cycle and/or reset by the target is vendor specific.
0
Indicates there is no limit on the number of times the target reports an informational exception condition.
Test
This field specifies whether the drive will create false drive failure notifications.
0
1
The drive does not create false drive failure notifications.
The drive creates false drive failures at the next interval time, provided that the DExcpt bit is not set. The MRIE and
Report Count fields apply as specified in this document. A false drive failure will be reported as sense code/qualifier
5DFF (FF for false failure versus a true failure 5D00).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5Ah
Mode Sense (10) command
12.14
The Mode Sense (10) command provides a means for the drive to report drive operating mode parameters to
the initiator. It is a complementary command to the Mode Select (10) command.
Table 160: Mode Sense (10) command (5Ah)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Reserved
DBD
Reserved
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PCF
Page Code
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
Control
246
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 161: Mode Sense (10) data
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
2
(MSB)
Sense Data Length
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Medium Type
3
0
0
WP
DPO-FUA
Reserved
Reserved
4
5
6
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB) 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Block Descriptor Length (8 decimal)
7
0
0
1
0 (LSB)
0–7
0–n
Mode Sense Page Headers and Their Parameters
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Block Descriptor Data
Block Descriptor Length
The length (in bytes) of the block descriptor. It is equal to the number of bytes in the Block Descriptor (8) and does not
include the page headers and mode parameters, if any. The disc drive sends one Block Descriptor.
Each Block Descriptor specifies the medium characteristics for all or part of a logical unit. Each Block Descriptor contains a
Density Code, a Number of Blocks, and a Block Length.
DPO-FUA (Disable Page Out–Force Unit Access)
0
When used with the Mode Sense command, this value indicates that the target does not contain a cache memory or
does not support the DPO and FUA bits.
1
The target supports the DPO and FUA bits.
Medium Type
00h
(default medium). This is the only valid value.
Mode Sense Page Headers and Their Parameters
Sense Data Length
The length (in bytes) of the Mode Sense data that is available to be transferred to the initiator. The Sense Data Length does
not include itself.
WP (Write Protect)
0
1
The medium is write enabled.
The medium is write protected.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5Eh
Persistent Reserve In command
12.16
Use the Persistent Reserve In command to obtain information about persistent reservations and reservation
keys that are active within a device server. Use this command in conjunction with the Persistent Reserve Out
Note. The actual length of the Persistent Reserve In parameter data is available in a parameter data
field.The Allocation Length field in the CDB indicates how much space has been reserved for the
returned parameter list. If the length is not sufficient to contain the entire parameter list, the first por-
tion of the list is returned (this is not considered an error). If the remainder of the list is required, the
application client should send a new Persistent Reserve In command with an Allocation Length
field large enough to contain the entire list.
Table 162: Persistent Reserve In command (5Eh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
Reserved
Service Action
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes reserved for the returned parameter list.
Control
See Control Byte in Section 11.2.1.6.
Service Action
00h
Read keys. Reads all registered reservation keys. This service action requests that the device server return
a parameter list containing a header and a list of each currently registered initiator’s reservation key. If multi-
ple initiators have registered with the same key, that key value is listed multiple times, once for each registra-
01h
Read reservation. Reads all current persistent reservations. This service action requests that the device
server return a parameter list containing a header and the persistent reservations, if any, present in the
device server. Multiple persistent reservations may be returned only if element reservations are present. See
02h-1Fh
Reserved.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.16.1
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read keys
The format for the parameter data provided in response to a Persistent Reserve In command with the Read
Table 163: Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read keys
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
3
4
7
(MSB)
Generation
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Additional Length (n - 7)
Reservation key list
8
(MSB)
(MSB)
First reservation key
15
(LSB)
(LSB)
.
.
.
.
.
.
n - 7
(MSB)
:
n
Last reservation key
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional Length
This field contains the number of bytes in the reservation key list. If the allocation length specified by the Persistent Reserve
In command is not sufficient to contain the entire parameter list, only the bytes from 0 to the maximum allowed Allocation
length are sent to the application client. The remaining incremental bytes are truncated, although the Additional length field
will still contain the actual number of bytes in the reservation key list without consideration of any truncation resulting from
an insufficient Allocation length (this is not considered an error).
Generation
The Generation field is a 32-bit counter maintained by the device server. It is incremented every time a Persistent Reserve
Out command requests the following service actions:
• Register
• Clear
• Preempt
• Preempt and Abort
The counter is not incremented by the following commands:
• Persistent Reserve In command
• Persistent Reserve Out command that performs a Reserve or Release service action
• Persistent Reserve Out command that is not performed due to an error or reservation conflict
Note. The Generation value is set to 0 as part of the power on reset process regardless of the APTPL bit value.
Reservation keys (first through last)
The Reservation key list contains all the 8-byte reservation keys for all initiators that have registered with the device server
through all ports with the device server.
250
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.16.2
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read reservation
The format for the parameter data provided in response to a Persistent Reserve In command with the Read
Table 164: Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read reservation
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
:
(MSB)
Generation
3
4
:
(LSB)
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
(MSB)
Additional Length (n - 7)
7
8
:
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional Length
This field contains the number of bytes to follow in Reservation descriptors. If the allocation length specified by the Persis-
tent Reserve In command is not sufficient to contain the entire parameter list, only the bytes from 0 to the maximum allowed
allocation length are sent to the application client. The remaining incremental bytes are truncated; however, the Additional
Length field will still contain the actual number of Reservation Descriptor bytes and will not be affected by the truncation
(this is not considered an error).
Generation
The Generation value is as defined for the Persistent Reserve In Read Keys parameter data. See Section 12.16.1, “Persis-
Reservation Descriptors
There is one read reservation descriptor for each persistent reservation, if any, present in the logical unit and a Reservation
Descriptor for each element, if any, having a persistent reservation. If a persistent reservation is present in the logical unit
that does not contain elements, there will be a single reservation descriptor in the list of parameter data returned by the
device server in response to the Persistent Reserve In command with a Read Reservation service action. The Reservation
descriptor for each reservation will contain the Reservation Key under which the persistent reservation is held. The Type
and Scope of each persistent reservation as present in the Persistent Reserve out command that created the persistent
reservation is returned.
If a persistent reservation is present in a logical unit that does contain elements, there will be a Reservation descriptor in
the list of parameter data returned by the device server. This is in response to the Persistent Reserve In command with a
Read Reservation service action for the logical unit persistent reservation that is held, if any, and each element persistent
reservation that may be held. The Reservation descriptor contains the Reservation Key under which the persistent reserva-
tion is held. The Type and Scope of the persistent reservation as present in the Persistent Reserve out command that cre-
ated the persistent reservation is returned.
If the Scope is an Element reservation, the Scope-specific Address field contains the element address, zero filled in the
most significant bytes to fit the field. If the Scope is a Logical Unit reservation, the Scope-specific Address field is set to
zero. The obsolete field (bytes 14 and 15) were defined in a previous standard and no longer used. The format of a single
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 165: Persistent Reserve In Reservation Descriptor
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
:
(MSB)
Reservation Key
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
:
Scope-specific Address
11
12
13
14
15
Reserved
Scope
Type
(MSB)
Obsolete (no longer used)
(LSB)
Reservation Key
The reservation key is the registered reservation key under which the reservation is held. If initiators use unique keys, the
application should be able to associate the reservation key with the initiator that holds the reservation.
Scope
The value in this field specifies whether a persistent reservation applies to an entire logical unit or to an element.
Code
Name and Description
0h
LU (logical unit). Persistent reservation applies to the full logical unit. The LU scope is implemented by all
device servers that implement Persistent Reserve Out.
1h
2h
Obsolete (no longer used).
Element. Persistent reservation applies to the specified element of the logical unit defined by the Scope-spe-
cific Address field in the Persistent Reserve out parameter list. An element is defined by the SCSI-3 Medium
Changer Command (SMC) standard. The Element scope is optional for all device servers that implement
Persistent Reserve out.
3h-Fh
Reserved.
Scope-specific Address
If the Scope is an Element reservation (2h), this field contains the Element address, zero filled in the most significant bytes
to fit the field. If the Scope is a Logical Unit reservation (oh), this field is set to 0.
252
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type
This field determines the characteristics of the persistent reservation being established for all data blocks within the extent
or logical unit. The required device server support descriptions below are divided into two paragraphs. The first paragraph
defines the required handling for read operations. The second paragraph defines the required handling for write operations.
Type
Code
Name
Description
Obsolete (no longer used)
Write Exclusive
0h
1h
Reads Shared
Any application client on any initiator may execute tasks that request transfers
from the storage medium or cache of the logical unit to the initiator.
Writes Exclusive
All tasks from any initiator other than the initiator holding the persistent reserva-
tion that requests a transfer from the initiator to the storage medium or cache of
the logical unit result in a reservation conflict.
Obsolete (no longer used)
Exclusive Access
2h
3h
Reads Exclusive
All tasks from any initiator other than the initiator holding the persistent reserva-
tion that requests a transfer from the storage medium or cache of the logical unit
to the initiator result in a reservation conflict.
Writes Exclusive
All tasks from any initiator other than the initiator holding the persistent reserva-
tion that requests a transfer from the initiator to the storage medium or cache of
the logical unit result in a reservation conflict.
Obsolete (no longer used)
4h
5h
Write Exclusive, Registrants Only
Reads Shared
Any application client on any initiator may execute tasks that request transfers
from the storage medium or cache of the logical unit to the initiator.
Writes Exclusive
All tasks that request a transfer to the storage medium or cache of the logical
unit from an initiator that is not currently registered with the device server result
in a reservation conflict.
Exclusive Access, Registrants Only
6h
Read Exclusive
All tasks that requests a transfer from the storage medium or cache of the logical
unit to an initiator that has not previously requested a Register service action
with the device server result in a reservation conflict.
Writes Exclusive
All tasks that requests a transfer to the storage medium or cache of the logical
unit from an initiator that is not currently registered with the device server result
in a reservation conflict.
Reserved
7h - Fh
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5Fh
Persistent Reserve Out command
12.17
The Persistent Reserve Out command is used to request service actions that reserve a logical unit or element
for the exclusive or shared use of a particular initiator. This command is used in conjunction with the Persistent
Reserve In command and should not be used with the Reserve and Release commands.
Initiators performing Persistent Reserve Out service actions are identified by a reservation key provided by the
application client. An application client may use the Persistent Reserve In command to identify which initiators
are holding a persistent reservation and use the Persistent Reserve Out command to preempt that reservation
if required.
If a Persistent Reserve out command is attempted, but there are insufficient device server resources to com-
plete the operation, the device server returns a Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request
and the additional sense data is set to Insufficient Registration Resources.
The Persistent Reserve Out command contains fields that specify a persistent reservation service action, the
intended scope of the persistent reservation, and the restrictions caused by the persistent reservation. If a
Scope field specifies a scope that is not implemented, the device server returns a Check Condition status. The
sense key is set to Illegal Request and the additional sense data is set to Invalid Field in CDB.
Fields in the Persistent Reserve out parameter list specify the information required to perform a particular per-
sistent reservation service action.
Table 166: Persistent Reserve Out command (5Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
Reserved
Service Action
Scope
Type
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter List Length (18h)
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Byte in Section 11.2.1.6.
Parameter List Length
24 (18h)
If the parameter list length is set to something other than 24, the device server returns a Check Condition
status, the sense key is set to Illegal Request, and the additional sense data is set to Parameter List Length
Error.
Scope
See definition on page 252. If the Scope field specifies a scope that is not implemented, the device server returns a Check
Condition status, the sense key is set to Illegal Request, and additional sense data is set to Invalid Field in CDB.
254
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Action
When processing Persistent Reserve Out service actions, the device server increments the generation value as specified in
Section 12.16.1 (see page 250).
00h
01h
02h
03h
04h
05h
Register. Register a reservation key with the device server.
Reserve. Create a persistent reservation with a specified scope and type.
Release. Release a persistent reservation for the requesting initiator.
Clear. Clear all reservation keys and all persistent reservations.
Preempt. Preempt persistent reservations from another initiator.
Preempt and Abort. Preempt persistent reservations from another initiator and abort the task set for the pre-
empted initiator.
06h-1Fh
Reserved.
Type
See definition on page 252.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.17.1
Persistent Reserve Out parameter list
The parameter list for the Persistent Reserve Out command is defined in Table 167. All fields are sent on all
Persistent Reserve Out commands, even if the field is not required for the specified service action and scope
values.
Table 167: Persistent Reserve Out parameter list
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
:
(MSB)
Reservation Key
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
8
(MSB)
(MSB)
:
Service Action Reservation Key
15
16
:
Scope-specific Address
Reserved
19
20
21
22
23
(LSB)
APTPL
Reserved
(MSB)
Obsolete (no longer used)
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
APTPL (Activate Persist Through Power Loss)
The APTPL bit is valid only for the Register service action. In all other cases, the APTPL is ignored. Support for
an APTPL bit equal to one is optional. If a device server that does not support the APTPL bit value of one
receives that value in a Register service action, the device server returns a Check Condition status. The sense
key is set to Illegal Request, and additional sense data is set to Invalid Field in the Parameter List.
If the last valid APTPL bit value received by the device server is zero, the loss of power in the target releases
all persistent reservations for all logical units and removes all reservation keys.
If the last valid APTPL bit value received by the device server is one, the logical unit retains all persistent reser-
vations that may be present and all reservation keys for all initiators even if power is lost and later returned.
Table 168 summarizes which fields are set by the application client and interpreted by the device server for
each service action and scope value. Two Persistent Reserve Out parameters (Reservation Key and the
APTPL bit) are not summarized below since they are discussed above.
256
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 168: Persistent Reserve Out service actions and valid parameters
Parameters
Service action
reservation key
Element or element
parameters
Service action
Register
Allowed scope
Ignored
Type
Ignored
Valid
Ignored
Reserve
Logical Unit
Element
Valid
Valid
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Valid
Release
Logical Unit
Element
Valid
Valid
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Valid
Clear
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Ignored
Preempt
Logical Unit
Element
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Ignored
Valid
Preempt and Clear
Logical Unit
Element
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Ignored
Valid
Reservation Key
This field contains an 8-byte value provided by the application client to the device server to identify the initiator that is the
source of the Persistent Reserve Out command. The device server verifies that the Reservation Key field in a Persistent
Reserve Out command matches the registered reservation key for the initiator from which the task was received (except for
the Register service action for an unregistered initiator which will have a reservation key value of zero). If a Persistent
Reserve Out command specifies a Reservation Key field other than the reservation key registered for the initiator, the
device server returns a Reservation Conflict status. The reservation key of the initiator will be verified to be correct regard-
less of the Service Action and Scope field values.
Scope-specific Address
If the scope is an Element reservation, the Scope-specific Address field contains the element address, zero
filled in the most significant bytes to fit the field. If the service action is Register or Clear, or if the scope is a
Logical Unit reservation, the Scope-specific Address field is set to zero.
Service Action Reservation Key
The Service Action Reservation key field contains information needed for the three service actions listed below:
Service action
Register
Service action reservation key field contents
The new reservation key to be registered.
Preempt
The reservation key of the persistent reservations that are being preempted.
The reservation key of the persistent reservations that are being preempted.
Preempt and Abort
Note. The Service Action Reservation Key is ignored for all service actions except those described above.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34h
Prefetch (10) command
12.18
The Prefetch (10) command requests that the drive read and transfer the specified logical blocks to the drive's
cache memory. No data shall be transferred to the initiator.
Table 169: PREFETCH (10) command (34h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (34h)
0
1
Reserved
Immed
RelAdr
2
3
4
5
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Transfer Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Immed (Immediate)
0
1
Status shall be returned after the operation is complete.
Status shall be returned as soon as the command descriptor block has been validated.
Logical Block Address
The logical block address field specifies the first logical block of the range of logical blocks for this command.
Operation Code
34h
The operation code for the Prefetch (10) command.
RelAdr (Relative Addressing)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The Transfer Length field specifies the number of contiguous logical blocks of data that shall be transferred to the drive's
cache memory.
0
The contiguous logical blocks up to and including the last logical block of the logical unit shall be transferred to the
drive's cache memory.
Any value other than 0 indicates the number of logical blocks that shall be transferred. The drive may elect to not transfer
logical blocks that already are contained in the cache memory.
If the Immed bit is zero and the specified logical blocks were successfully transferred to the cache memory, the drive shall
return Condition Met status. If the Link bit (see Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6) is one, the drive shall return Intermediate–
Condition Met status.
If Immed is one and the unlocked cache memory has sufficient capacity to accept all of the specified logical blocks, the
drive shall return Condition Met status. If the Link bit is one, the drive shall return Intermediate–Condition Met status.
If Immed is one, and the unlocked cache memory does not have sufficient capacity to accept all of the specified logical
blocks, the drive shall return Good status. The drive shall transfer to cache memory as many logical blocks as will fit. If the
Link bit is one, the drive shall return Intermediate status.
258
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90h
Prefetch (16) command
12.19
The Prefetch (16) command requests that the drive read and transfer the specified logical blocks to the drive's
cache memory. No data shall be transferred to the initiator.
Table 170: PREFETCH (16) command (90h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Operation Code (90h)
0
1
Reserved
Immed
RelAdr
2
(MSB)
3
4
5
Logical Block Address
6
7
8
9
(LSB)
(LSB)
10
11
12
13
14
15
(MSB)
Transfer Length
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Immed (Immediate)
0
1
Status shall be returned after the operation is complete.
Status shall be returned as soon as the command descriptor block has been validated.
Logical Block Address
The logical block address field specifies the first logical block of the range of logical blocks for this command.
Operation Code
90h
The operation code for the Prefetch (16) command.
RelAdr (Relative Addressing)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Length
The Transfer Length field specifies the number of contiguous logical blocks of data that shall be transferred to the drive's
cache memory.
0
The contiguous logical blocks up to and including the last logical block of the logical unit shall be transferred to the
drive's cache memory.
Any value other than 0 indicates the number of logical blocks that shall be transferred. The drive may elect to not transfer
logical blocks that already are contained in the cache memory.
If the Immed bit is zero and the specified logical blocks were successfully transferred to the cache memory, the drive shall
return Condition Met status. If the Link bit (see Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6) is one, the drive shall return Intermediate–
Condition Met status.
If Immed is one and the unlocked cache memory has sufficient capacity to accept all of the specified logical blocks, the
drive shall return Condition Met status. If the Link bit is one, the drive shall return Intermediate–Condition Met status.
If Immed is one, and the unlocked cache memory does not have sufficient capacity to accept all of the specified logical
blocks, the drive shall return Good status. The drive shall transfer to cache memory as many logical blocks as will fit. If the
Link bit is one, the drive shall return Intermediate status.
260
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
08h
Read (6) command
12.21
The Read (6) command requests the disc drive to transfer data to the initiator.
Table 171: Read (6) command (08h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
(MSB)
Reserved
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
(LSB)
Transfer Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the read operation will begin.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data to be transferred. Any number other than 0 indicates the number of logical
blocks that are transferred.
0
Transfer 256 logical blocks.
The data value most recently written in the addressed logical block is returned.
Read data transfers with the initiator do not begin until at least one full sector of data is available in the disc
drive data buffer. For multiple sector reads, the transfer of data continues until the number of blocks specified
in byte 4 of the CDB has been read and transferred or until an unrecoverable error is detected.
Data transfer could stop if the option to stop on recovered error is selected.
The initiator closes the loop after sending one or more commands. For a Read (6) command, the disc drive
arbitrates depending on the value of the Buffer Full Ratio Set in Page 2 of the Mode Select Data (see Section
12.11). After data transfer has been initiated with an initiator, the disc drive does not close the loop unless the
buffer is empty or the transfer length is exhausted.
The initiator must accept all data presented to the initiator after sending this command until the disc drive
sends Completion Status. (The disc drive may close the loop and re-arbitrate depending on the availability of
data in the buffer while executing this command and the initiator may prematurely terminate this command by
creating the Reset condition or by sending an Abort, Clear Queue, Target Reset, or Selective Reset).
Sense Data is valid after this command is executed and Completion Status is sent. If the Address Valid bit in
the Sense Data is true (1), the Sense Data Logical Block Address (Information bytes) points to the last logical
block accessed by the disc drive. If the Address Valid bit in the Sense Data is false (0), the Sense Data Logical
Block Address bytes are not valid.
262
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The disc drive contains a large buffer and implements an optional prefetch and segmented cache function
whereby the requested Read data is read into the buffer, plus an additional amount, depending on the cache
control parameters. See Prefetch and Multisegmented Cache Control section in the individual drive’s Product
Manual, Volume 1, for more information.
This command is terminated with a Reservation Conflict status and no data is read if any reservation access
If any of the following conditions occur, this command is terminated with a Check Condition status, and if
extended sense is implemented, the sense key is set as indicated in the following table. This table does not
provide an exhaustive enumeration of all conditions that may cause the Check Condition status.
Condition
Sense key
Invalid logical block address
Illegal Request. Set the extended sense information bytes to
the logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unrecoverable read error
Unit Attention
Medium Error
Recovered Error
Recovered read error
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28h
Read (10) command
12.22
The Read (10) command requests that the target transfer data to the initiator. This command is implemented
This command operates the same as the Read (6) command (see Section 12.21) except that in the CDB for
this command a four-byte logical block address and a two-byte transfer length may be specified.
The data value most recently written in the addressed logical block is returned to the Host.
This command terminates with a Reservation Conflict status if any reservation access conflict (see Section
12.39) exists, and no data is read.
Table 172: Read (10) command (28h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The disc drive assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. The host knows the logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed
again in the near future and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The host expects that logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
1
The target accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status. Read commands access
the specified logical blocks from the media (i.e., the data is not directly retrieved from the cache). In the case where
the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block than the media, the logical block is first written to the
media.
0
The target satisfies the command by accessing the cache memory. For read operations, any logical blocks that are
contained in the cache memory are transferred to the initiator directly from the cache memory.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the read operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (RelAdr function is not supported by drives
described in this manual).
264
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates that no logical blocks
are transferred. This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates the number of logical blocks that are
transferred.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command returns a Check Condition status and the sense key is
set as indicated. This list does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all conditions that cause the Check
Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Illegal Request. Set the extended sense information bytes to the
logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unrecovered read error
Unit Attention
Medium Error
Recovered Error
Recoverable read error
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A8h
Read (12) command
12.23
The Read (12) command requests that the target transfer data to the initiator.
Table 173: Read (12) command (A8h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
Transfer Length
8
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
9
10
11
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The disc drive assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. The host knows the logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed
again in the near future and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The host expects that logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
1
The target accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status. Read commands access
the specified logical blocks from the media (i.e., the data is not directly retrieved from the cache). In the case where
the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block than the media, the logical block is first written to the
media.
0
The target satisfies the command by accessing the cache memory. For read operations, any logical blocks that are
contained in the cache memory are transferred to the initiator directly from the cache memory.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the read operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (RelAdr function is not supported by drives
described in this manual).
266
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates that no logical blocks
are transferred. This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates the number of logical blocks that are
transferred.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command returns a Check Condition status and the sense key is
set as indicated. This list does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all conditions that cause the Check
Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Illegal Request. Set the extended sense information bytes to the logi-
cal block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator Unit Attention
Unrecovered read error
Recoverable read error
Medium Error
Recovered Error
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.24
Read (16) command (88h)
The Read (16) command requests that the target transfer data to the initiator.
Table 174: Read (16) command (88h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transfer Length
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The disc drive assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. The host knows the logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed
again in the near future and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The host expects that logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
1
The target accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status. Read commands access
the specified logical blocks from the media (i.e., the data is not directly retrieved from the cache). In the case where
the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block than the media, the logical block is first written to the
media.
268
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0
The target satisfies the command by accessing the cache memory. For read operations, any logical blocks that are
contained in the cache memory are transferred to the initiator directly from the cache memory.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the read operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit description).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates that no logical blocks
are transferred. This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates the number of logical blocks that are
transferred.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command returns a Check Condition status and the sense key is
set as indicated. This list does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all conditions that cause the Check
Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Illegal Request. Set the extended sense information bytes to the
logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unrecovered read error
Unit Attention
Medium Error
Recovered Error
Recoverable read error
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Ch
Read Buffer command
12.25
The Read Buffer command is used in conjunction with the Write Buffer command as a diagnostic function for
testing disc drive memory and the integrity of the FC-AL. This command will not alter the medium. Command
Table 175: Read Buffer command (3Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
Mode
Reserved
Buffer ID
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Buffer Offset
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Allocation Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes available for returning read buffer command data.
Buffer ID
0
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Buffer Offset
0
Mode
The interpretation of data bits 0–2 is given in the following table and in paragraphs following the table.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
270
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.25.1
Read Combined Descriptor Header and Data mode (000b)
In this mode, a four-byte Read Buffer header followed by the data bytes are returned to the initiator in a data
transfer. The Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields are not used by drives supported by this manual, and must be
zero.
Table 176: Read Buffer header (000b)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Buffer Capacity
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer Capacity
The number of bytes available in the read buffer.
12.25.2 Read Data mode (010b)
In this mode, the buffer data only is transferred with no header. The Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields are not
used.
12.25.3
Read Buffer descriptor mode (011b)
In this mode, a maximum of four bytes of Read Buffer descriptor information is returned. If there is no buffer
associated with the specified buffer ID, the target returns all zeros in the Read Buffer descriptor. The Buffer Off-
set field is reserved in this mode. The allocation length should be set to four or greater. The target transfers the
lesser of the allocation length or four bytes of Read Buffer descriptor. The Read Buffer descriptor is defined as
shown in the following table.
Implementor’s note: In a multi-tasking system, a buffer may be altered between the Write Buffer and Read
Buffer commands by another task. Buffer testing applications may wish to insure that only a single task is
active. Use of reservations (to all logical units on the device) may also be helpful in avoiding buffer alteration
between these two commands.
Table 177: Read Buffer descriptor mode (011b)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Offset Boundary
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Buffer Capacity
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer Capacity
The total number of data bytes that are available in the disc drive’s data buffer (see 12.64.1 and 12.64.2). This number is
not reduced to reflect the allocation length nor is it reduced to reflect the actual number of bytes written using the Write
Buffer command. Following the Read Buffer header, the disc drive transfers data from its data buffer. The disc drive termi-
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nates the Data In phase when allocation length bytes of header plus data have been transferred or when all available
header and buffer data have been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
Offset Boundary
This field contains the boundary alignment with the selected buffer for subsequent Write Buffer and Read Buffer com-
mands. This is interpreted as a power of two.
272
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25h
Read Capacity (10) command
12.26
The Read Capacity (10) command provides a means for the initiator to request the capacity of the disc drive
information.
Table 178: Read Capacity (10) command (25h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
PMI
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
PMI (Partial Medium Indicator)
0
The information returned in the Read Capacity data is the Logical Block Address and Block Length (in bytes) of the
last logical block of the logical unit. (This value is the same for all drives of the same model number, sector size and
sparing scheme. It is the same regardless of the number of defective blocks the drive has.) The Logical Block
Address in the Command Descriptor Block is set to zero (0) for this option.
1
The information returned is the Logical Block Address and Block Length (in bytes) of the last Logical Block Address
after which a substantial delay (defined as approximately one millisecond for the typical disc drive) in data transfer is
encountered. This returned Logical Block Address is greater than or equal to the Logical Block Address specified in
the Command Descriptor Block. This reported Logical Block Address is the last block prior to a cylinder boundary.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In response to the Read Capacity (10) command, the drive returns eight bytes of Read Capacity data to the
Table 179: Read Capacity data
Byte
Description
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Block Length (MSB)
Block Length
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Block Length
Block Length (LSB)
274
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9Eh
Read Capacity (16) command
12.27
The Read Capacity (16) command provides a means for the application client to request information regarding
the capacity of the block device. This command is implemented as a service action of the Service Action In
operation code.
Table 180: Read Capacity (16) command (9Eh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
Reserved
Service Action (10h)
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Allocation Length (MSB)
Allocation Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Allocation Length
Allocation Length (LSB)
Reserved
RelAdr
PMI
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
Specifies the number of bytes the initiator has allocated for the returned defect data. An Allocation Length of zero indicates
that no Read Defect Data is transferred. Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes to be transferred. The
drive terminates the Data In phase when the Allocation Length bytes have been transferred or when all available defect
data has been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
The logical block address field specifies the first logical block of the range of logical blocks for this command.
PMI (Partial Medium Indicator)
0
The information returned in the Read Capacity data is the Logical Block Address and Block Length (in bytes) of the
last logical block of the logical unit. (This value is the same for all drives of the same model number, sector size and
sparing scheme. It is the same regardless of the number of defective blocks the drive has.) The Logical Block
Address in the Command Descriptor Block is set to zero (0) for this option.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
The information returned is the Logical Block Address and Block Length (in bytes) of the last Logical Block Address
after which a substantial delay (defined as approximately one millisecond for the typical disc drive) in data transfer is
encountered. This returned Logical Block Address is greater than or equal to the Logical Block Address specified in
the Command Descriptor Block. This reported Logical Block Address is the last block prior to a cylinder boundary.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Service Action
10h
The Service Action In service action for the Read Capacity (16) command.
In response to the Read Capacity (16) command, the drive returns 12 bytes of Read Capacity data to the host.
Table 181: Read Capacity data
Byte
Description
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Block Length (MSB)
Block Length
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Block Length
10
11
Block Length (LSB)
276
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
37h
Read Defect Data (10) command
12.28
The Read Defect Data command requests that the target transfer the medium defect data to the initiator. If the
drive is unable to access any medium defect data, it terminates the command with Check Condition status.
The sense key is set to either Medium Error if a medium error occurred or No Sense if the list does not exist
and the additional sense code is set to Defect List Not Found.
Table 182: Read Defect Data command (37h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Reserved
CDB
0 or
2
0
0
0
P
G
1
1
0
1
0
Defect List Format
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Allocation Length (MSB)
Allocation Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes the initiator has allocated for the returned defect data. An Allocation Length of zero indicates that no
Read Defect Data is transferred. Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes to be transferred. The disc drive
terminates the Data In phase when the Allocation Length bytes have been transferred or when all available defect data has
been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
CDB (Command Descriptor Block)
The disc drive interprets the P and G bits (bits 4 and 3 of byte 2 of the CDB) as follows:
Bit P Bit G Interpretation
0
0
1
0
1
0
Return Defect List header only. Target returns only the defect list header.
Return the growth “G” list only. This list reflects the grown or “G” list as defined in Section 12.5.
Return the manufacturer’s original ETF list only. This list reflects the manufacturer’s original ETF list. These
defects may or may not have been reallocated, depending on the last Format command received (the last
format may or may not have requested the P list flaws be reallocated during the format function).
1
1
Return all lists. The returned list contains all of the requested drive’s defect lists (i.e., P, G, C, and D) regard-
less of whether these lists have been reallocated by the drive.
Control
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defect List Format
Bits 2, 1, 0 in the CDB should be 1 0 0, respectively, to signify a defect list in the Bytes from Index format, or 1 0 1, respec-
tively, to signify a defect list in the Physical Sector format. If neither of these two, the disc drive responds with the defect list
in the drive’s default format (physical sector) and creates the Check Condition status with Recovered Error sense key (1h)
and additional sense error code (1C) at the end of the Read Defect Data transfer.
This command is intended to be used only with the Format Unit command (Section 12.5). The initiator should
not interpret or act upon this list except to resend this list as defect data in a Format Unit command. It is not
possible to relate actual physical locations to logical block addresses that are given in connection with other
commands.
The first four bytes returned are the Defect List header. The P bit, G bit, and Defect List Format fields indicate
the defect format actually returned by the disc drive. The definitions are the same as for byte 2 of the Read
The Defect List Length specifies the total length (in bytes) of all the defect descriptors available from the disc
drive. If the Allocation Length of the CDB is too small to transfer all of the defect descriptors, the Defect List
Length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation. The drive does not create the Check Condition status. The
Defect Descriptors are not required to be in ascending order.
278
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 183: Defect List Header description
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
CDB
0 or
1
0
0
0
P
G
1
1
0
1
Reserved
0
Defect List Format
Defect List Length (MSB) (Value is 8 times the number of defects)
Defect List Length (LSB)
2
3
Defect Descriptor Bytes
4–n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
CDB (Command Descriptor Block)
The disc drive interprets the P and G bits (bits 4 and 3 of byte 2 of the CDB) as follows:
Bit P Bit G Interpretation
0
0
1
0
1
0
Return Defect List header only. Target returns only the defect list header.
Return the growth “G” list only. This list reflects the grown or “G” list as defined in Section 12.5.
Return the manufacturer’s original ETF list only. This list reflects the manufacturer’s original ETF list. These
defects may or may not have been reallocated, depending on the last Format command received (the last
format may or may not have requested the P list flaws be reallocated during the format function).
1
1
Return all lists. The returned list contains all of the requested drive’s defect lists (i.e., P, G, C, and D) regard-
less of whether these lists have been reallocated by the drive.
Defect List Format
100
101
A list in the Bytes from Index format.
A list in the Physical Sector format.
Defect List Length and Defect Descriptor Bytes
If the P and G bits are 0 0, the Defect List Length will be 0 and no Defect Descriptor bytes are sent to the initiator. See
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B7h
Read Defect Data (12) command
12.29
The Read Defect Data (12) command requests that the target transfer the medium defect data to the initiator. If
the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when a Read Defect Data (12) command is received
from an initiator other than the one holding a logical unit reservation. This command is rejected with Reserva-
tion Conflict status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. Read Defect Data (12) com-
mands with a reservation conflict are terminated with Reservation Conflict status. The Read Defect Data (12)
command is not evaluated for extent reservation conflicts. For example, extent reservations do not conflict with
the Read Defect Data (12) command.
Table 184: Read Defect Data (12) command (B7h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
P List
G List
Defect List Format
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
MSB
Allocation Length
LSB
Reserved
Control
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes the initiator has allocated for the returned defect data. An Allocation Length of zero indicates that no
Read Defect Data is transferred. Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes to be transferred. The disc drive
terminates the Data In phase when the Allocation Length bytes have been transferred or when all available defect data has
been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less.
Control
Defect List Format
Bits 2, 1, 0 in the CDB should be 1 0 0, respectively, to signify a defect list in the Bytes from Index format, or 1 0 1, respec-
tively, to signify a defect list in the Physical Sector format. If neither of these two, the disc drive responds with the defect list
in the drive’s default format (physical sector) and creates the Check Condition status with Recovered Error sense key (1h)
and additional sense error code (1C) at the end of the Read Defect Data transfer.
P List and G List bits
The disc drive interprets the P and G bits as follows:
Bit P Bit G Interpretation
0
0
0
1
Return Defect List header only. Target returns only the defect list header.
Return the growth “G” list only. This list reflects the grown or “G” list as defined in Section 12.5.
280
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
1
0
1
Return the manufacturer’s original ETF list only. This list reflects the manufacturer’s original ETF list. These
defects may or may not have been reallocated, depending on the last Format command received (the last
format may or may not have requested the P list flaws be reallocated during the format function).
Return all lists. The returned list contains all of the requested drive’s defect lists (i.e., P, G, C, and D) regard-
less of whether these lists have been reallocated by the drive.
This command is intended to be used only with the Format Unit command (Section 12.5). The initiator should
not interpret or act upon this list except to resend this list as defect data in a Format Unit command. It is not
possible to relate actual physical locations to logical block addresses that are given in connection with other
commands.
The first four bytes returned are the Defect List header. The P bit, G bit, and Defect List Format fields indicate
the defect format actually returned by the disc drive. The definitions are the same as for byte 2 of the Read
The Defect List Length specifies the total length (in bytes) of all the defect descriptors available from the disc
drive. If the Allocation Length of the CDB is too small to transfer all of the defect descriptors, the Defect List
Length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation. The drive does not create the Check Condition status. The
Defect Descriptors are not required to be in ascending order.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 185: Defect List (12) Header description
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
CDB
0 or
1
0
0
0
P
G
1
1
0
1
Reserved
0
Defect List Format
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
2
3
4
5
6
7
Defect List Length
(LSB)
Defect Descriptor Bytes
0–n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
CDB (Command Descriptor Block)
The disc drive interprets the P and G bits (bits 4 and 3 of byte 2 of the CDB) as follows:
Bit P Bit G Interpretation
0
0
1
0
1
0
Return Defect List header only. Target returns only the defect list header.
Return the growth “G” list only. This list reflects the grown or “G” list as defined in Section 12.5.
Return the manufacturer’s original ETF list only. This list reflects the manufacturer’s original ETF list. These
defects may or may not have been reallocated, depending on the last Format command received (the last
format may or may not have requested the P list flaws be reallocated during the format function).
1
1
Return all lists. The returned list contains all of the requested drive’s defect lists (i.e., P, G, C, and D) regard-
less of whether these lists have been reallocated by the drive.
Defect List Format
100
101
A list in the Bytes from Index format.
A list in the Physical Sector format.
Defect List Length and Defect Descriptor Bytes
If the P and G bits are 0 0, the Defect List Length will be 0 and no Defect Descriptor bytes are sent to the initiator. See
282
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Eh
Read Long command
12.31
The Read Long command requests that the target transfer data to the initiator. The data passed during the
Read Long command shall include the data bytes and the ECC bytes recorded on the medium. The most
recent data written, or to be written, in the addressed logical block shall be returned. Read Long is independent
of the Read-Write Error Recovery mode page but does allow retries.
Table 186: Read Long command (3Eh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CORRECT
RelAdr
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Byte Transfer Length (MSB)
Byte Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Byte Transfer Length
The number of bytes of data that will be transferred. A transfer length of zero indicates that no bytes are transferred. This
condition is not considered an error.
The byte transfer length requested must be equal to the current block size plus all ECC bytes for a data transfer to occur. If
an incorrect number of bytes is stated in the command block, this command terminates with a Check Condition status. The
correct number of bytes can be determined from the information returned in the extended sense data bytes after issuing the
Request Sense command. The Request Sense command results in the Illegal Field In CDB condition with the Illegal
Request sense key. The extended sense ILI bit is set. The extended sense information bytes contain the difference (resi-
due) of the requested length minus the actual length (in bytes). (Negative values are indicated by two’s complement nota-
tion.)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
CORRECT (Corrected)
0
1
A logical block will be read without any correction made by the target.
The data will be corrected by ECC, if necessary, before being transferred to the initiator.
If the DCR bit of the Read-Write Error Recovery page is equal to 1 and the CORRCT bit equals 1, the Read Long command
terminates with Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Illegal Request with an additional sense code of Invalid
Field in CDB.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the read operation will occur. The most recent data written in the addressed logical block is
returned.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
284
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
07h
Reassign Blocks command
12.32
The Reassign Blocks command requests the target to reassign the defective logical blocks to an area on the
logical unit reserved for this purpose.
After sending the Reassign Blocks command, the initiator transfers a defect list that contains the logical block
addresses to be reassigned. The disc drive reassigns the physical medium used for each logical block address
in the list. The data contained in the logical blocks specified in the defect list is not preserved, but the data in all
other logical blocks on the medium is preserved. It is recommended that the initiator recover the data from the
logical blocks to be reassigned before issuing this command. After completion of this command, the initiator
can write the recovered data to the same logical block addresses.
The effect of specifying a logical block to be reassigned that has previously been reassigned is to reassign the
block again. Thus, over the life of the medium, a logical block can be assigned to multiple physical addresses
(until no more spare locations remain on the medium).
This command should be used by an initiator to immediately reallocate any block (sector) which requires the
disc drive to recover data by data correction via ECC if the automatic reallocation feature of the disc drive is not
Table 187: Reassign Blocks command (07h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Byte in Section 11.2.1.6.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reassign Blocks defect list
The Reassign Blocks defect list contains a four-byte header followed by one or more defect descriptors. The
length of each defect descriptor is four bytes.
If the logical unit has insufficient capacity to reassign all of the defective logical blocks, the command termi-
nates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Hardware Error and the additional sense code
set to No Defect Spare Location Available. The logical block address of the first logical block not reassigned is
returned in the information bytes of the sense data. If information about the first defect descriptor not reas-
signed is not available, or if all the defects have been reassigned, this field is set to FFFFFFFFh.
If the Reassign Blocks command failed due to an unexpected unrecoverable read error that would cause the
loss of data in a block not specified in the defect list, the logical block address of the unrecoverable block is
returned in the information field of the sense data and the valid bit is set to one.
Implementor’s Note: If the Reassign Blocks command returns Check Condition status and the sense data com-
mand-specific information field contains a valid logical block address, the initiator removes all defect descrip-
tors from the defect list prior to the one returned in the command-specific information field. If the sense key is
Medium Error and the valid bit is one (the information field contains the valid block address) the initiator inserts
that new defective logical block address into the defect list and reissues the Reassign Blocks command with
the new defect list. Otherwise, the initiator performs any corrective action indicated by the sense data and then
reissues the Reassign Blocks command with the new defect list.
Table 188: Reassign Blocks defect list
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Defect list header
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
Defect List Length (MSB)
Defect List Length (LSB)
Defect descriptors
Defect logical block address (MSB)
Defect logical block address
0
1
2
3
Defect logical block address
Defect logical block address (LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Defect Logical Block Address
Specifies a four-byte defect logical block address that contains the defect. The defect descriptors are in ascending order.
Defect List Length
The total length (in bytes) of the defect descriptors that follow. The Defect List Length is equal to four times the number of
defect descriptors.
286
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Ch
Receive Diagnostic Results command
12.33
The Receive Diagnostic Results command requests analysis data after completion of a Send Diagnostic com-
mand or SCSI-3 Enclosure Services (SES) pages be sent to the initiator. The disc drive supports the optional
Page format, wherein the initiator sends additional pages after a Send Diagnostic command. These additional
pages have a page code that specifies to the disc drive the format of the data to be returned after it receives a
Receive Diagnostic Results command.
If the Send Diagnostic command requested either page 00h or page 40h (the only two optional, non-ESI-,
pages supported by the disc drive), data returned is in the format shown in Table 191 or 194, respectively. If the
If the Send Diagnostic command requested the Supported Diagnostic Pages list (PF bit = 1), the disc drive
returns data in the format shown in Table 191 after receiving the Receive Diagnostic Results command. It lists
all of the diagnostic pages supported by the disc drive.
If the Receive Diagnostic command is sent with the PCV bit set to a 1, the drive sends back the page selected
by the Page Code field (see Table 190). It is not necessary to have first issued a Send Diagnostic command to
receive these pages.
Table 189: Receive Diagnostic Results command (1Ch)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
PCV
Reserved
Page Code
2
3
4
5
Allocation Length (in bytes) (MSB)
Allocation Length (in bytes) (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The number of bytes the initiator has allocated for returned data.
No data is transferred.
0
Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes that will be transferred. The disc drive terminates the data transfer
when allocation length bytes have been transferred or when all available data has been transferred to the initiator, which-
ever is less.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Page Code
The Page Code number of the Diagnostic page to be received. See Table 190 for page code numbers and descriptions.
Table 190: Receive Diagnostics page code descriptions
Page Code
00h
Description
Reference Table
List of Supported Diagnostic Pages
SCSI Enclosure Services Pages
Address Translation Page
Default Self Test Diagnostic Results
01h - 0Fh
40h
none
PCV (Page Code Valid)
0
The Page Code is ignored. The data received is the page of data prepared by the drive as the result of the most
recently completed Send Diagnostic command. This data could also be the Self Test Diagnostic results which has
1
The Page Code in the Page Code field is valid. The contents of the Page Code field defines the data returned by
this command.
Table 191: Supported Diagnostic Pages format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (00h)
Reserved
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (n–3)
(LSB)
4
:
Supported Page List
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
00h
Provides the supported diagnostic pages information for the drive.
Page Length
n - 3 The length (in bytes) of the Supported Diagnostic page.
Supported Page List
A list of all diagnostic page codes implemented by the disc drive in ascending order beginning with page code 00h. The
Table 192: Supported Send Diagnostic pages
Page Code
00h
Description
Reference
Supported Diagnostic pages
SCSI Enclosure Services Information (ESI) pages
Translate Address page
01h - 0Fh
40h
288
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enclosure Services Information (ESI)
The drives supported by the manual do not process the contents of the SCSI Enclosure Service (SES) pages. The drive
attempts to transfer the page contents to or from the enclosure using the Enclosure Services Interface (ESI) as directed by
the command. Errors detected in the transfer are returned to the initiator in response to the command. See ANSI document
X3T10 NCITS 305-199x regarding the SCSI-3 Enclosure Services Command Set (SES) for descriptions of the data pre-
sented in the SES pages.
Table 193: SCSI Enclosure Services Information (ESI) page format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
2
3
n
Page Code (01h - 0Fh)
Page Specific
(MSB)
Page Length (n - 3)
(LSB)
Page Specific
Table
number
Field Definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
01h - 0Fh Enclosure Services Information (ESI) pages.
Page Length
n - 3
Page Specific
Content defined in the SCSI-3 Enclosure Services (SES) standard.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Translate Address page
The Translate Address page allows the initiator to translate a logical block address into a physical sector
address or a physical sector address to a logical block address. The address to be translated is passed to the
target during the data transfer associated with the Send Diagnostic command and the results are returned to
the initiator during the Data In phase following the Receive Diagnostic Results command. The translated
address is returned in Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic.
Table 194: Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (40h)
Reserved
0
1
2
3
4
5
(MSB)
Page Length (000Ah)
(LSB)
Reserved
ALTTRK
Supplied Format
Translated Format
RAREA
ALTSEC
Rsvd
Rsvd
6
:
13
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
ALTSEC (Alternate Sector)
1
The translated address is physically located in an alternate sector of the medium. If the disc drive cannot determine
if all or part of the translated address is located in an alternate sector it sets this bit to zero.
0
No part of the translated address is located in an alternate sector of the medium or that the disc drive is unable to
determine this information.
ALTTRK (Alternate Track)
1
All or part of the translated address is located on an alternate track of the medium or the disc drive cannot determine
if all or part of the translated address is located on an alternate track.
0
No part of the translated address is located on an alternate track of the medium.
Page Code
40h
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic page code.
Page Length
000Ah The length (in bytes) of the Translate Address–Receive Diagnostic page. If the allocation length is too small to trans-
fer all of the page, the page length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation.
RAREA (Reserved Area)
1
0
All or part of the translated address falls within a reserved area of the medium (e.g. speed tolerance gap, alternate
sector, vendor reserved area, etc.). If the entire translated address falls within a reserved area the target may not
return a translated address.
No part of the translated address falls within a reserved area of the medium.
Supplied Format
Translated Address
The address the target translated from the address supplied by the initiator in the Send Diagnostic command. This field is in
the format specified in the translate format field. The supported formats are shown in Tables 195 and 196.
290
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Translated Format
The value from the Send Diagnostic command translate format field (see Table 209). The values are 000 (Logical block for-
mat) or 101 (Physical sector address format).
Table 195: Address field logical block address format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block.
Table 196: Address field physical sector address format
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Cylinder Number
(LSB)
Head Number
Sector Number
4
5
6
7
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Cylinder Number
This field contains the drive cylinder number.
Head Number
This field contains the drive head number.
Sector Number
This field contains the drive sector number.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 197: Default self-test diagnostic data bytes
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
(MSB)
Additional Length
(LSB)
FRU Code (most probable)
FRU Code
2
3
FRU Code
4
FRU Code (least probable)
(MSB)
5
6
Error Code
Additional Vendor-Unique Fault Information
7
(LSB)
8 - n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional Length
This 2-bytes value indicates the number of additional bytes included in the diagnostic data list. For example, if no product-
unique byte (byte 7) is available, this value would be 0006h.
000h
There are no additional bytes.
The most significant byte (MSB) is typically 000h or 0006h. The least significant byte (LSB) is typically 02AEh or nnnnh.
Additional Vendor-Unique Fault Information
Vendor-unique data.
FRU Code (Field Replaceable Unit Code)
These bytes identify an assembly that may have failed. The codes will be listed in probability order, with the most probable
assembly listed first and the least probable listed last.
00h
01h
There is no FRU information. Seagate drives return this value in these bytes.
The entire unit should be replaced.
Error Code
This value designates which part of a diagnostic operation has failed. These bytes are vendor-unique.
0081h
00C1h
Buffer RAM diagnostic error.
Data miscompare while doing drive diagnostics.
292
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
17h
Release (6) command
12.34
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
57h
Release (10) command
12.35
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A3h
Report Device Identifier command
12.36
The Report Device Identifier command (see Table 198) requests that the drive send device identification infor-
mation to the initiator.
Table 198: Report Device Identifier command (A4h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Operation Code (A3h)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
Reserved
Service Action (05h)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
Reserved
Control
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
This field indicates how much space has been reserved for the returned parameter data. If the length is not sufficient to
contain all the parameter data, the first portion of the data is returned. This is not considered an error. The actual length of
the parameter data is available in the Identifier Length field in the parameter data. If the remainder of the parameter data is
required, the initiator should send a new Report Device Identifier command with an Allocation Length field large enough to
contain all the data.
Control
Operation Code
A3h The operation code for the Report Device Identifier command.
Service Action
05h
As defined in the SCC-2 standard (SCSI Controller Command set T10/1225), the Report Device Identifier command
is the Report Peripheral Device/Component Device Identifier service action of the Maintenance In command (also
Op. code A3h, but for initiators). Additional Maintenance In service actions (that apply to SCC-2 devices and
devices that set the SCCS bit in their Standard Inquiry data) are defined in SCC-2, Section 6.3.
The data returned from this command is formatted as described in the Report Device Identifier parameter list
294
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Report Device Identifier Parameter List
This list contains the length (in bytes) of the parameter list and the logical unit’s identifier.
The execution of a Report Device Identifier command may require you to enable nonvolatile memory within the
logical unit. If the nonvolatile memory is not ready, the device server returns Check Condition status rather than
wait for the device to become ready. The sense key is set to Not Ready and the additional sense data is set as
described in the Test Unit Ready command. This information should allow the application client to determine
the action required to cause the device server to become ready.
Table 199: Report Device Identifier parameter list
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
(MSB)
0
1
2
3
Identifier Length (n - 4)
Identifier
(LSB)
4
:
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Identifier
This field contains a vendor-specific value. The value reported is the last value written by a successful Set Device Identifier
command. The value of the identifier is changed only by a Set Device Identifier command. The identifier value persists
through resets, power cycles, media format operations, and media replacement. The target returns the same identifier to all
initiators on all ports.
Identifier Length
This field specifies the length (in bytes) of the Identifier field. If the Allocation Length field in the CDB is too small to transfer
all of the identifier, the length is not adjusted to reflect the truncation. The identifier length is initially equal to zero and is
changed only by a successful Set Device Identifier command.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A0h
Report LUNs command
12.37
The Report LUNs command requests that the peripheral device logical unit numbers of known logical units in
the target be sent to the application client. The Report LUNs command returns information about only those
logical units to which commands may be sent. When the HiSupport bit is one (see Table 105, Disc drive inquiry
data format), the device server supports the Report LUNs command. A SCSI device that is capable of support-
ing a LUN address other than zero should support the Report LUNs command on logical unit zero.
The Report LUNs command is not affected by reservations or persistent reservations.
Table 200: Report LUNs command (A0h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Allocation Length
(LSB)
Reserved
Control
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The Allocation Length shall be at least 16 bytes. If the Allocation Length is less than 16 bytes, the device server shall return
Check Condition status. The sense key shall be set to Illegal Request and the additional sense data shall be set to Invalid
Field in CDB.
The Allocation Length is not sufficient to contain the Logical Unit Number values for all configured logical units, the device
server shall report as many Logical Unit Number values as will fit in the specified Allocation Length. This shall not be con-
sidered an error.
The allocation length in byte four of the format shown specifies the number of bytes the initiator has allocated for returned
sense data. The allocation length should always be at least 18 bytes for disc drive devices for the initiator to receive all of
the disc drive sense data. Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes that will be transferred.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
296
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The device server shall report the Logical Unit Numbers of configured logical units using the format shown in
Table 201: Report LUNs parameter list format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
(MSB)
LUN List Length (n-7)
Reserved
3
4
7
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
LUN List
8
(MSB)
First LUN
15
(LSB)
(LSB)
.
.
.
n–7
n
(MSB)
Last LUN
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
LUN List Length
The LUN List Length field contains the length in bytes of the LUN list that is available to be transferred. The LUN List
Length is the number of logical unit numbers reported multiplied by eight. If the allocation length in the command descriptor
block is too small to transfer information about all configured logical units, the LUN List Length value is not adjusted to
reflect the truncation.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
03h
Request Sense command
12.38
The Request Sense command requests that the disc drive transfer sense data to the initiator in the format
shown in Table 202. The sense data is valid after a Check Condition status returned on the prior command.
Sense data is returned in the Fibre Channel Protocol Response frame with the Check Condition bypassing the
need for the Request Sense command. Sense data must be cleared upon execution of any subsequent com-
mand. For Fibre Channel, data returned in response to a Request Sense command is only valid if commands
are not queued in the drive.
If a disc drive sends a Check Condition status as a response to a Request Sense command being in error, it
will do so only if the error was a fatal error. For example:
1. The disc drive receives a nonzero reserved bit in the command descriptor block.
2. A disc drive malfunction prevents return of sense data.
If any nonfatal error occurs during execution of Request Sense, the disc drive returns sense data with Good
status. Following a fatal error on a Request Sense command, sense data may be invalid.
The disc drive terminates the data when the number of bytes indicated in the Allocation Length field have been
transferred or when all available sense data have been transferred to the initiator, whichever is less. The disc
drive always returns sense data in the extended sense data format shown in Section 11.5.1.
Table 202: Request Sense command (03h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Reserved
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Allocation Length (in bytes)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Allocation Length
The allocation length in byte four of the format shown specifies the number of bytes the initiator has allocated for returned
sense data. The allocation length should always be at least 18 bytes for disc drive devices for the initiator to receive all of
the disc drive sense data. Any other value indicates the maximum number of bytes that will be transferred.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
298
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16h
Reserve (6) command
12.39
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
56h
Reserve (10) command
12.40
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.40.1
Logical unit reservation
When the Extent bit is zero, this command requests the entire disc drive to be reserved for exclusive use of the
initiator until the reservation is superseded by another valid Reserve command from the initiator that made the
reservation, released by a Release command from the same initiator, by a LIP Reset from any initiator, or be a
hard Reset condition. A logical unit reservation is not granted if the logical unit is reserved by another initiator.
It is permissible for an initiator to reserve a logical unit that is currently reserved by the initiator. If the Extent bit
is zero (0), the Reservation Identification and the Extent List Length are ignored. If the Extent bit is a 1, the disc
drive generates Check Condition status and sets the sense key to Illegal Request.
If, after honoring the reservation, any other initiator subsequently attempts to perform a command other than a
Release command (which will be ignored), or an Inquiry command (which will be executed), or a Request
Sense command (which will be executed), the command is rejected with Reservation Conflict status.
12.40.2
Third-party reservation
The third-party reservation option of the Reserve command allows an initiator to reserve a logical unit for
another SCSI device. If the drive supports the third-party Reserve command, the disc drive also implements
the third-party Release option (see Section 12.35). This feature is intended for use in multiple-initiator systems
that use the Copy command.
If the third-party (3rdPty) bit is zero (0), the third-party reservation option is not requested. If the 3rdPty bit is
one, the Reserve command reserves the specified logical unit for the SCSI device specified in the parameter
list. The disc drive preserves the reservation until it is superseded by another valid Reserve command from the
initiator which made the reservation or until it is released by the same initiator, by a LIP Reset from any initiator,
or a hard Reset condition. The disc drive ignores any attempt to release the reservation made by any other ini-
tiator.
12.40.3
Superseding reservations
An initiator which holds a current reservation may modify that reservation by issuing another Reserve com-
mand to the same logical unit. The superseding Reserve command releases the previous reservation state
when the new reservation request is granted. The previous reservation is not modified if the new reservation
request cannot be granted.
300
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.40.4
Parameter list format for third-party addressing
The parameter list for the ten-byte Reserve and Release commands. Third-party addressing is eight bytes in
length. The following table defines the format for the parameter list.
Table 203: Parameter list format for third-party addressing
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reserved
PA_VAL
(MSB)
FCP_Port Identifier
Process Associator
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
FCP_Port Identifier (Fibre Channel Protocol Port Identifier)
Bytes 1–3, the 24-bit address used in the D_ID and S_ID fields of the Fibre Channel frame header.
PA_VAL (Process Associator Valid)
The disc drive does not support process associators and requires this bit to be zero (0). This field indicates whether the
Process Associator field (bytes 4–7) is valid.
Process Associator
Not supported and not checked.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
01h
Rezero Unit command
12.41
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
31h
Search Data Equal command
12.42
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
30h
Search Data High command
12.43
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
32h
Search Data Low command
12.44
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
0Bh
Seek (6) command
12.45
Obsolete. If the drive receives this command, a Check Condition status is sent.
302
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2Bh
Seek (10) command
12.46
The Seek (10) command requests that the disc drive seek to the specified Logical Block Address. This com-
Table 204: Seek (10) command (2Bh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
This command operates the same as the Seek command (Section 12.45) except that a four-byte Logical Block Address is
specified.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Dh
Send Diagnostic command
12.47
This command requests that the disc drive perform diagnostic tests on itself, or perform other optional opera-
tions. Table 205 shows the format of the Send Diagnostic command as implemented by the disc drive. When
the Self Test bit is zero, this command is usually followed by a Receive Diagnostic Results command and a
subsequent data transfer that returns data to the initiator. Using this latter procedure of Send Diagnostic/
Receive Diagnostic Results commands the initiator can ask the drive to return a list of optional operations it
supports (see Table 208) and then request a supported additional operation. The disc drive supports the pages
For systems which support disconnection, the disc drive will disconnect while executing this command.
Table 205: Send Diagnostic command (1Dh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
Self-Test Code
PF
Rsvd
Self-Test
DEVOFL
Unit OFL
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DEVOFL (SCSI Device Off Line)
1
Enables diagnostic operations that may adversely affect operations to other Logic Units on the same target. This bit
is not interpreted by the disc drive.
Parameter List Length
The length (in bytes) of the parameter list that is transferred during the data transfer.
The disc drive presently supports the pages listed in Table 206. If the initiator transfers more bytes than the disc drive sup-
ports, the disc drive rejects the command.
00h
04h
06h
No additional parameter pages to be sent with this command (this is not considered an error).
304
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 206: Supported Send Diagnostic pages
Page Code
00h
Description
Reference
Supported Diagnostic pages
SCSI Enclosure Services Information (ESI) pages
Translate Address page
01h - 0Fh
40h
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Enclosure Services Information (ESI)
The drives supported by the manual do not process the contents of the SCSI Enclosure Service (SES) pages. The
drive attempts to transfer the page contents to or from the enclosure using the Enclosure Services Interface (ESI) as
directed by the command. Errors detected in the transfer are returned to the initiator in response to the command.
See ANSI document X3T10 NCITS 305-199x regarding the SCSI-3 Enclosure Services Command Set (SES) for
descriptions of the data presented in the SES pages.
Table 207: SCSI Enclosure Services Information (ESI) page format
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
2
3
n
Page Code (01h - 0Fh)
Page Specific
(MSB)
Page Length (n - 3)
(LSB)
Page Specific
Table
number
Field Definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
01h - 0Fh
Enclosure Services Information (ESI) pages.
Page Length
n - 3
Page Specific
Content defined in the SCSI-3 Enclosure Services (SES) standard.
Table
number
Field Definitions (listed alphabetically)
PF (Page Format)
1
The data returned by the subsequent Receive Diagnostic Results command use the diagnostic page format
described in the ANSI SCSI-2 specification. PF needs to be on, set to 1, for ESI pages 01h through 0Fh and
requires no subsequent Receive Diagnostic command. Further, ESI requests for page 01h through 0Fh are sent
without any prior Send Diagnostic request. See Tables 208 and 209 which show formats of the two pages supported
by disc drive.
Self-Test
Requests that the device server perform the Device Self-Test operation specified by the Self-Test Code field or in
0
the parameter list. The diagnostic operation might or might not require the device server to return parameter data
that contains diagnostic results. If the return of parameter data is not required, the return of Good status indicates
successful completion of the diagnostic operation. If the return of parameter data is required, the device server
either:
- performs the requested diagnostic operation, prepare the parameter data to be returned and indicate completion
by returning Good status. The application client issues a Receive Diagnostic Results command to recover the
parameter data; or
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- accept the parameter list, and if no errors are detected in the parameter list, return Good status. The requested
diagnostic operation and the preparation of the parameter data to be returned are performed upon receipt of a
Receive Diagnostic Results command.
1
Directs the device server to complete the target’s Default Self-Test. If the test passes successfully, the command is
terminated with Good status; otherwise, the command is terminated with Check Condition status and the sense key
is set to Hardware Error.
Self-Test Code
1
0
The Self-Test Code field shall contain 000b.
The contents of the Self-Test Code field are as specified below:
Value Function name
Description
000b
001b
010b
N/A
This value is used when the Self Test bit is 1 or if one of the other supported diagnos-
tic pages is being transferred.
Background Short
Self-Test
Background
Extended Self-Test
011b
100b
Reserved.
Abort Background
Self-Test
The device server aborts the current self-test running in background mode. The
Parameter List Length field contains 0. This value is only valid if a previous Send
Diagnostic command specified a background self-test function and that self-test has
not completed. If either of these conditions is not met, the device server returns a
Check Condition status with a Sense Key of Illegal Request and an Additional Sense
Code of Invalid Field in CDB.
101b
110b
111b
Foreground Short
Self-Test
Not supported.
Foreground Extended Not supported.
Self-Test
Reserved
Reserved.
Unit OFL (Logical Unit Off Line)
0
Disables write operations on user medium or operations that affect user visible medium positioning. This bit is not
interpreted by the disc drive.
306
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.47.1
Supported Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic
This page instructs the disc drive to make available the list of all supported diagnostic pages to be returned by
a subsequent Receive Diagnostic Results command. The definition of this page for the Send Diagnostic com-
mand includes only the first four bytes (Receive Diagnostic version given in Table 191). If the page length field
is not zero, the disc drive terminates the Send Diagnostic command with a Check Condition status. The Sense
Key will be set to Illegal Request with an additional sense code of Invalid Field Parameter List.
Table 208: Supported Diagnostic Pages page
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Page Code (00h)
Reserved
0
1
2
3
(MSB)
Page Length (0000h)
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
00h
Supported Diagnostic Pages code.
Page Length
0000h
Must be zero.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.47.2
Translate Address page–Send Diagnostic
The translate address page allows the initiator to translate a logical block address into a physical sector
address or a physical sector into a logical block address. The address to be translated is passed to the disc
drive with Send Diagnostic command and the results are returned to the initiator during the data in phase fol-
lowing the Receive Diagnostic Results command. The translated address is returned in the Translate Address
Table 209: Translate Address page–Send Diagnostic command
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (40h)
Reserved
0
1
2
3
4
5
(MSB)
Page Length (000Ah)
(LSB)
Reserved
Reserved
Supplied Format
Translate Format
6
:
Address To Translate
13
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Address To Translate
A single address the initiator is requesting the disc drive to translate. The format of this field is defined by the Supplied For-
Page Code
40h
Translate Address page-Send Diagnostic command page code.
Page Length
000Ah
The length (in bytes) of the Translate Address—Send Diagnostic page.
Supplied Format
The format of the address to translate field. If the disc drive does not support the requested format, it terminates the Send
Diagnostic command with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and an additional sense code is
set to Invalid Field In Parameter List.
000b Logical block address format.
101b Physical sector address format.
Translate Format
The format to which the initiator would like the address to be translated. The Translate Format field must be different than
the Supplied Format field. If the disc drive does not support the requested format it terminates the command with Check
Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal Request and an additional sense code is set to Invalid Field In Parameter
List.
000b Logical block address format.
101b Physical sector address format.
308
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.47.3
Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic
The Diagnostic page instructs the drive to turn the drive fault LED on or off. This page is used only by the Send
Table 210: Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic command
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Page Code (A0h)
Reserved
0
1
2
3
4
5
(MSB)
Page Length (0002h)
Reserved
(LSB)
SBDL
Reserved
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Page Code
A0h
Diagnostic page-Send Diagnostic command page code.
Page Length
000Ah
The length (in bytes) of the Diagnostic—Send Diagnostic page.
SBDL (Set Bad Device Light)
1
0
Turn on the drive fault LED.
Turn off the drive fault LED.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A4h
Set Device Identifier command
12.48
The Report Device Identifier command (see Table 211) requests that the device identifier information in the log-
ical unit be set to the value received in the Set Device Identifier parameter list. On successful completion of the
command, a Unit Attention is generated for all initiators except the one that issued the service action. When
reporting the Unit Attention condition, the additional sense code is set to Device Identifier Changed.
Table 211: Set Device Identifier command (A4h)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
Operation Code (A4h)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
Reserved
Service Action (06h)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
Parameter List Length
(LSB)
Reserved
Control
10
11
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Parameter List Length
This field indicates the length in bytes of the identifier that will be transferred from the initiator to the drive. The maximum
value for this field is 512 bytes. A parameter list length of zero indicates that no data will be transferred and that subsequent
Report Device Identifier commands will return an identifier length of zero. Logical units that implement this command will be
capable of accepting a parameter list length of 64 bytes or less. If the parameter list length exceeds 64 bytes and the logical
unit is not capable of storing the requested number of bytes, the device server returns Check Condition status with the
sense key set to Illegal Request and an additional sense code of Invalid Field in CDB.
Operation Code
A4h The operation code for the Report Device Identifier command.
Service Action
06h
The Service Action Code for the Set Peripheral Device/Component Device Identifier.
The Set Device Identifier parameter list contains the identifier to be set by the addressed logical unit (see Table
199).
310
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set Device Identifier Parameter List
Table 212: Report Device Identifier parameter list
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
:
Identifier
n
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Identifier
This field contains the vendor-specific value to be returned in Report Device Identifier commands.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1Bh
Start/Stop Unit command
12.50
The Start/Stop Unit command requests that the target enable the logical unit for further operations (start), or
stop spindle rotation (stop).
The disc drive is able to execute the following commands when the drive spindle is not rotating, or in a simu-
lated stopped condition.
• Reserve
• Release
• Motor
Start
• Test Unit
Ready
• Request
Sense
• Receive
Diagnostic
Results
• Write Buffer
• Read
Buffer
• Inquiry
The remaining commands (see SCSI Interface commands supported section in individual drive’s Product Man-
ual for list of all commands supported) cannot be executed until after the drive has spindled up. If the disc drive
receives one of these commands before it can be executed, a Check Condition status is returned (with sense
key of Not Ready). The initiator closes the loop after a Start Unit is commanded. The disc drive arbitrates for
the loop when the unit is up to speed and Ready or when operation is initiated if the Immed bit is 1.
Table 213: Start/Stop Unit command (1Bh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
Immed
Reserved
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Start
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Immed (Immediate)
0
1
Status is returned after the operation is completed.
Status is returned as soon as the operation is initiated.
Start
1
0
Requests that the logical unit be made ready for use.
Requests that the drive to either actually stop the spindle or to simulate the drive spindle stopped condition. In this
latter situation the drive spindle actually continues to spin and the drive reports Not Ready in response to media
access commands. Power consumption is as when in idle mode. The type of stop implemented is given in the drive
Product Manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
35h
Synchronize Cache (10) command
12.51
The Synchronize Cache (10) command ensures that logical blocks in the cache memory, within the specified
range, have their most recent data value recorded on the physical medium. If a more recent data value for a
logical block within the specified range exists in the cache memory than on the physical medium, then the logi-
cal block from the cache memory is written to the physical medium. Logical blocks are not necessarily removed
from the cache memory as a result of the synchronize cache operation.
Table 214: Synchronize Cache (10) command (35h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
Reserved
Immed
RelAdr
(MSB)
2
:
Logical Block Address
Number of Blocks
(LSB)
5
6
7
8
9
Reserved
(MSB)
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Immed (Immediate)
1
0
1
The drive returns status as soon as the command descriptor block has been validated.
The status is not returned until the operation has been completed.
If the target does not support it, the command terminates with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal
Request and the additional sense code is set to Invalid Field in CDB.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the Synchronize Cache operation begins.
Number of Blocks
The total number of contiguous logical blocks within the range. A number of blocks of zero indicates that all remaining logi-
cal blocks on the logical unit are within the range.
A logical block within the specified range that is not in cache memory is not considered an error. Multiple locks may be in
effect from more than one initiator. Locks from different initiators may overlap. An unlock of an overlapped area does not
release the lock of another initiator.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
314
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91h
Synchronize Cache (16) command
12.52
The Synchronize Cache (16) command ensures that logical blocks in the cache memory, within the specified
range, have their most recent data value recorded on the physical medium. If a more recent data value for a
logical block within the specified range exists in the cache memory than on the physical medium, then the logi-
cal block from the cache memory is written to the physical medium. Logical blocks are not necessarily removed
from the cache memory as a result of the synchronize cache operation.
Table 215: Synchronize Cache (16) command (91h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Reserved
Immed
RelAdr
(MSB)
(MSB)
2
:
Logical Block Address
Number of Blocks
(LSB)
9
10
:
(LSB)
13
14
15
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Immed (Immediate)
1
0
1
The drive returns status as soon as the command descriptor block has been validated.
The status is not returned until the operation has been completed.
If the target does not support it, the command terminates with Check Condition status. The sense key is set to Illegal
Request and the additional sense code is set to Invalid Field in CDB.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the Synchronize Cache operation begins.
Number of Blocks
The total number of contiguous logical blocks within the range. A number of blocks of zero indicates that all remaining logi-
cal blocks on the logical unit are within the range.
A logical block within the specified range that is not in cache memory is not considered an error. Multiple locks may be in
effect from more than one initiator. Locks from different initiators may overlap. An unlock of an overlapped area does not
release the lock of another initiator.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
00h
Test Unit Ready command
12.53
The Test Unit Ready command provides a means to verify the logical unit is ready. This is not a request for a
self test. If the logical unit (drive) can accept an appropriate medium access command without returning Check
Condition status, the drive returns a Good status.
If the drive cannot become operational or is in a state such that an initiator action (e.g., Start command) is
required to make the unit ready, the drive returns Check Condition status with a sense key of Not Ready. One
of several possible additional sense codes indicates the reason for the Not Ready condition.
Table 216: Test Unit Ready command (00h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reserved
2
3
4
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
316
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2Fh
Verify (10) command
12.54
The Verify (10) command requests that the target verify the data written on the medium. This command is
implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 217. The drive disconnects while this com-
mand is being executed if the initiator supports disconnect/reconnect.
Table 217: Verify (10) command (2Fh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Verification Length (MSB)
Verification Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
217
0
1
The verification will be a medium verification (CRC, ECC, etc.).
A byte-by-byte compare of data on the medium and the data transferred from the initiator. If the compare is unsuc-
cessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Miscompare.
217
217
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
Logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
217
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the verify operation begins, if RelAdr is zero (0).
217
217
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Verification Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are verified. A Verification Length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are verified (an Implied Seek is still performed). This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates
the number of logical blocks that are verified.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFh
Verify (12) command
12.55
The Verify (12) command requests that the target verify the data written on the medium. This command is
implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 218. The drive disconnects while this com-
mand is being executed if the initiator supports disconnect/reconnect.
Table 218: Verify (12) command (AFh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Verification Length (MSB)
Verification Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Verification Length
Verification Length (LSB)
Reserved
10
11
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
0
1
The verification will be a medium verification (CRC, ECC, etc.).
A byte-by-byte compare of data on the medium and the data transferred from the initiator. If the compare is unsuc-
cessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Miscompare.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
Logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the verify operation begins, if RelAdr is zero (0).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
318
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Verification Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are verified. A Verification Length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are verified (an Implied Seek is still performed). This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates
the number of logical blocks that are verified.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8Fh
Verify (16) command
12.56
The Verify (16) command requests that the target verify the data written on the medium. This command is
implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 218. The drive disconnects while this com-
mand is being executed if the initiator supports disconnect/reconnect.
Table 219: Verify (16) command (8Fh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Verification Length (MSB)
Verification Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Verification Length
Verification Length (LSB)
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
0
1
The verification will be a medium verification (CRC, ECC, etc.).
A byte-by-byte compare of data on the medium and the data transferred from the initiator. If the compare is unsuc-
cessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Miscompare.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
Logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the verify operation begins, if RelAdr is zero (0).
320
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Verification Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are verified. A Verification Length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are verified (an Implied Seek is still performed). This condition is not considered an error. Any other value indicates
the number of logical blocks that are verified.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
321
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0Ah
Write (6) command
12.57
The Write (6) command requests that the disc drive write the data transferred by the initiator to the medium
(discs).
Table 220: Write (6) command (0Ah)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
(MSB)
Reserved
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
(LSB)
Transfer Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data to be transferred. Any value other than 0 indicates the number of logical
blocks that are transferred.
0
Transfer 256 logical blocks
The disc drive closes the loop when any internal error recovery procedure is required, or if the disc drive’s
internal data buffer is full. After the disc closes, the initiator must re-arbitrate to send the remaining data.
The initiator must send requested write data to the drive until the drive sends Completion status or until the ini-
tiator resets/aborts the command or clears the queue. (The initiator may close and re-arbitrate at any time
while executing this command).
Sense Data is valid after this command is executed and Completion status is sent (refer to the Read (6) Com-
If the RCD bit is set to zero on the Caching Mode page 08h (cache is enabled), the data that is written by this
command remains in the cache buffer, if no write errors are encountered. This allows a Read command to
access the same data from the cache buffer instead of accessing the media, if the same LBA is requested by
the Read command.
This command is terminated with a Reservation Conflict status and no data is written if any reservation access
322
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command is terminated with a Check Condition status, and if
extended sense is implemented, the sense key is set as indicated in the following table. This table does not
provide an exhaustive enumeration of all conditions that may cause the Check Condition status.
Condition
Sense key
Invalid logical block address
Volume Overflow. Set the extended sense information bytes to
the logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unit Attention.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2Ah
Write (10) command
12.58
The Write (10) command requests that the disc drive write to the medium the data transferred by the initiator.
This command is implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 221. Refer also to the
Write Caching section in the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 2, for information on write cache con-
trol.
Table 221: Write (10) command (2Ah)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
1
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select page 08h is set false (caching
enabled).
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command will not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media. The
FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense page 08h is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
324
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This command operates the same as the Write (6) command (Section 12.57) except that in the CDB for this
command a four-byte logical block address and a two-byte transfer length may be specified.
This command terminates with a Reservation Conflict status if any reservation access conflict (see Section
12.39) exists, and no data is written.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense
key is set as indicated in the following table. This table does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all con-
ditions that cause the Check Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Volume Overflow. Set the extended sense information bytes to
the logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unit Attention
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AAh
Write (12) command
12.59
The Write (12) command requests that the disc drive write to the medium the data transferred by the initiator.
This command is implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 221. Refer also to the
Write Caching section in the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 2, for information on write cache con-
trol.
Table 222: Write (12) command (AAh)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transfer Length
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
10
11
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
1
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select page 08h is set false (caching
enabled).
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command will not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media. The
FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense page 08h is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
326
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This command operates the same as the Write (6) command (Section 12.57) except that in the CDB for this
command a four-byte logical block address and a four-byte transfer length may be specified.
This command terminates with a Reservation Conflict status if any reservation access conflict (see Section
12.39) exists, and no data is written.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense
key is set as indicated in the following table. This table does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all con-
ditions that cause the Check Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Volume Overflow. Set the extended sense information bytes to
the logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unit Attention
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8Ah
Write (16) command
12.60
The Write (16) command requests that the disc drive write to the medium the data transferred by the initiator.
This command is implemented with the disc drive specific parameters listed in Table 221. Refer also to the
Write Caching section in the individual drive’s Product Manual, Volume 2, for information on write cache con-
trol.
Table 223: Write (16) command (8Ah)
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
DPO
FUA
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transfer Length
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
1
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select page 08h is set false (caching
enabled).
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command will not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media. The
FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense page 08h is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins, if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
328
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A Transfer Length of zero (0) indicates no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
This command operates the same as the Write (6) command (Section 12.57) except that in the CDB for this
command a eight-byte logical block address and a four-byte transfer length may be specified.
This command terminates with a Reservation Conflict status if any reservation access conflict (see Section
12.39) exists, and no data is written.
If any of the following conditions occur, this command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense
key is set as indicated in the following table. This table does not provide an exhaustive enumeration of all con-
ditions that cause the Check Condition status.
Condition
Sense Key
Invalid logical block address
Volume Overflow. Set the extended sense information bytes to
the logical block address of the first invalid address.
Target reset since last command from this initiator
Unit Attention
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2Eh
Write and Verify (10) command
12.61
The Write and Verify (10) command requests that the target write the data transferred from the initiator to the
medium and then verify that the data is correctly written. The data is only transferred once from the initiator to
the drive.
Table 224: Write and Verify (10) command (2Eh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
0
1
Verification will be a medium verification (ECC) with no data comparison.
A byte-by-byte compare of data written on the peripheral device and the data transferred from the initiator. If the
compare is unsuccessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Mis-
compare.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A transfer length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
For systems that support disconnection, the disc drive disconnects during the execution of this command.
330
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AEh
Write and Verify (12) command
12.62
The Write and Verify (12) command requests that the target write the data transferred from the initiator to the
medium and then verify that the data is correctly written. The data is only transferred once from the initiator to
the drive.
Table 225: Write and Verify (12) command (AEh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
Transfer Length
8
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
9
10
11
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
0
1
Verification will be a medium verification (ECC) with no data comparison.
A byte-by-byte compare of data written on the peripheral device and the data transferred from the initiator. If the
compare is unsuccessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Mis-
compare.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A transfer length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
For systems that support disconnection, the disc drive disconnects during the execution of this command.
332
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8Eh
Write and Verify (16) command
12.63
The Write and Verify (16) command requests that the target write the data transferred from the initiator to the
medium and then verify that the data is correctly written. The data is only transferred once from the initiator to
the drive.
Table 226: Write and Verify (16) command (8Eh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
BytChk
RelAdr
Reserved
DPO
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transfer Length
Transfer Length (LSB)
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
BytChk (Byte Check)
0
1
Verification will be a medium verification (ECC) with no data comparison.
A byte-by-byte compare of data written on the peripheral device and the data transferred from the initiator. If the
compare is unsuccessful, the command terminates with a Check Condition status and the sense key is set to Mis-
compare.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The target assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or retained
by the cache. The logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed again in the near future
and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
Logical Block Address
The logical block at which the write operation begins if RelAdr bit is zero (see RelAdr bit definition).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Transfer Length
The number of contiguous logical blocks of data that are transferred. A transfer length of zero indicates that no logical
blocks are transferred. This condition is not considered an error and no data is written. Any other value indicates the num-
ber of logical blocks that are transferred.
For systems that support disconnection, the disc drive disconnects during the execution of this command.
334
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Bh
Write Buffer command
12.64
The Write Buffer command may be used in conjunction with the Read Buffer command as a diagnostic function
for testing the disc drive’s data buffer memory and the FC-AL integrity. When used in a diagnostic mode, the
medium is not accessed during the execution of this command. Additional modes are provided for downloading
and saving executable microcode. The function of this command and the meaning of the fields within the Com-
mand Descriptor Block depend on the Mode field.
Table 227: Write Buffer command (3Bh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Mode
Reserved
Buffer ID
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Buffer Offset
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
Byte Transfer Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Buffer ID
Implemented only by drives that support modes 110b and 111b.
Buffer Offset
Implemented only by drives that support modes 110b and 111b.
Byte Transfer Length
Use a Read Buffer command with mode bits set to 011b to get the drive buffer capacity to use with the Write Buffer com-
mand.
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Mode
Defined in the following table and in the referenced sections.
Check with your drive’s Product Manual, Volume 1, to see which modes are supported by the drive.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 228: Mode definitions
Bit Bit Bit
Mode Definition
2
1
0
Write data (Section 12.64.2)
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
Download microcode
Download microcode and save (Section 12.64.3)
Download microcode with offsets
Download microcode with offsets and save (Section 12.64.4)
336
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.64.1
Combined Header and Data mode (000b)
In this mode, data to be written to the disc drive’s data buffer is preceded by a four-byte header.
The Byte Transfer Length includes a four-byte header and the Write Buffer data. A transfer length of zero indi-
cates that no data transfer takes place. This condition does not create the Check Condition status. If the trans-
fer length is greater than the Buffer Capacity reported by the Read Buffer header, the disc drive creates the
Check Condition status with the sense key of Illegal Request. In this case no data is transferred from the initia-
tor.
It is not considered an error to request a transfer length less than the Buffer Capacity.
Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields are all zero.
The write data following the Write Buffer CDB consists of a four-byte Write Buffer header (which always pre-
cedes the data) plus the data to be written to the data buffer as follows:
Table 229: Write Buffer header
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
Data to be written into disc drive buffer
4 - n
12.64.2
Write Data Only mode (010b)
The byte transfer length specifies the maximum number of bytes that are transferred and stored in the drive
buffer. No header bytes are included. The Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields are all zero.
12.64.3
Download Microcode and Save mode (101b)
In this mode, vendor-unique executable microcode (which is not preceded by a four-byte header) is transferred
to the control memory space of the target and, if the download is completed successfully, will also be saved.
The downloaded code is then effective after each power cycle and reset until it is replaced using another down-
load microcode and save operation. When the download microcode and save command has been completed
successfully, the target generates a Unit Attention condition for all initiators with an extended sense of Power
On, Reset, or Bus Device Reset Occurred (Sense Data Error Code 29 03h). Following the downloading of new
microcode, the drive may need to be reformatted before it can perform properly.
Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields (CDB bytes 2–5):
These bytes are all zero.
Byte Transfer Length (CDB bytes 6, 7 and 8):
The transfer length (in bytes) of the downloadable code. This value must be the exact length of the download
data. A value of one signifies one byte of download data, etc.
Control Bytes (CDB byte 9):
All bits zero.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12.64.4
Download Microcode with Offsets and Save mode (111b)
In this mode, the initiator may split the transfer of the vendor-specific microcode or control information over two
or more write buffer commands. If the logical unit cannot accept this command because of some device condi-
tion, the logical unit terminates each write buffer command with this mode (111b) with a Check Condition sta-
tus, a sense key of Illegal Request, and sets the additional sense code to Command Sequence Error.
If the last write buffer command of a set of one or more commands completes successfully, the microcode or
control information is saved in a nonvolatile memory space (semiconductor, disk or other). The saved down-
loaded microcode or control information is then effective after each power-cycle and reset until it is supplanted
by another download microcode with save operation or download microcode with offsets and save operation.
In this mode, the data transfer contains vendor-specific, self-describing microcode or control information.
Since the downloaded microcode or control information may be sent using several commands, when the logi-
cal unit detects the last download microcode with offsets and save Write Buffer command has been received,
the logical unit performs any logical unit required verification of the complete set of downloaded microcode or
control information prior to returning Good status for the last command. After the last command completes suc-
cessfully, the logical unit generates a unit attention condition for all initiators except the one that issued the set
of write buffer commands. When reporting the unit attention condition, the logical unit sets the additional sense
code to Microcode Has Been Changed.
If the complete set of write buffer commands required to effect a microcode or control information change (one
or more commands) are not received before a reset or power-on cycle occurs, the change is not effective and
the microcode or control information is discarded.
The Buffer ID field identifies a specific buffer within the logical unit. The vendor assigns buffer ID codes to buff-
ers within the logical unit. A Buffer ID field value of zero is supported. If more than one buffer is supported,
additional buffer ID codes are assigned contiguously, beginning with one. If an unsupported buffer ID code is
identified, the logical unit returns Check Condition status and sets the sense key to Illegal Request with an
additional sense code of Invalid Field In CDB.
The microcode or control information are written to the logical unit buffer starting at the location specified by the
buffer offset. The initiator conforms to the offset boundary requirements. If the logical unit is unable to accept
the specified buffer offset, it returns Check Condition status and it sets the sense key to Illegal Request with an
additional sense code of Invalid Field In CDB.
The parameter list length specifies the maximum number of bytes that are transferred during the data transfer
to be stored in the specified buffer beginning at the buffer offset. The initiator attempts to ensure that the
parameter list length plus the buffer offset does not exceed the capacity of the specified buffer. If the Buffer Off-
set and Parameter List Length fields specify a transfer that would exceed the buffer capacity, the logical unit
returns Check Condition status and sets the sense key to Illegal Request with an additional sense code of
Invalid Field In CDB.
338
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3Fh
Write Long command
12.65
The Write Long command requests that the target write to the medium the data transferred by the initiator. The
data passed during the WRITE LONG command is implementation specific, but shall include the data bytes
and the ECC bytes to be written to the single logical block addressed in the command. The Read Long com-
mand is usually issued before issuing a Write Long command. The Write Long data passed must be in the
same order and must be the same number of bytes as the Read Long command.
Table 230: Write Long command (3Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
RelAdr
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Byte Transfer Length (MSB)
Byte Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Byte Transfer Length
The number of bytes of data that will be transferred. A transfer length of zero (0) indicates that no bytes will be transferred.
This condition is not considered an error.
The byte transfer length requested must be equal to the current block size plus all ECC bytes for a data transfer to occur. If
an incorrect number of bytes is stated in the command block, this command terminates with a Check Condition status. The
correct number of bytes can be determined from the information returned in the extended sense data bytes after issuing the
Request Sense command. The Request Sense command results in the Illegal Field In CDB condition with the Illegal
Request sense key. The extended sense ILI bit will be set. The extended sense information bytes contain the difference
(residue) of the requested length minus the actual length (in bytes). (Negative values are indicated by two’s complement
notation.)
Control
See Control Bytes in Section 11.2.1.6.
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
41h
Write Same (10) command
12.66
The Write Same (10) command requests that the target write the single block of data transferred by the initiator
to the medium multiple times.
Table 231: Write Same (10) command (41h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Reserved
PBdata
LBdata
RelAdr
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Reserved
Number of Blocks (MSB)
Number of Blocks (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
LBdata (Logical Block data)
Seagate fibre channel drives do not support this bit.
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
Number of Blocks
The number of contiguous logical blocks to be written.
0
A value of 0 requests that all the remaining logical blocks on the medium be written.
PBdata (Physical Block data)
Seagate fibre channel drives do not support this bit.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
340
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
93h
Write Same (16) command
12.67
The Write Same (16) command requests that the target write the single block of data transferred by the initiator
to the medium multiple times.
Table 232: Write Same (16) command (93h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
Reserved
(MSB)
PBdata
LBdata
RelAdr
2
3
4
5
Logical Block Address
6
7
8
9
(LSB)
(LSB)
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Number of Blocks
Reserved
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
LBdata (Logical Block data)
Seagate fibre channel drives do not support this bit.
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
Number of Blocks
The number of contiguous logical blocks to be written.
0
A value of 0 requests that all the remaining logical blocks on the medium be written.
PBdata (Physical Block data)
Seagate fibre channel drives do not support this bit.
RelAdr (Relative Address)
This function is not supported by drives described in this manual.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52h
XDRead (10) command
12.68
The XDRead (10) command requests that the target transfer the xor data generated by an XDWrite or Regen-
erate command to the initiator.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when an XDRead command is received from an ini-
tiator other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Con-
flict status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XDRead command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XDRead commands with a reservation conflict is terminated with Check Condition
status and the sense key is set to Data Protect if any part of the XDRead operation is prohibited by an extent
reservation.
The xor data transferred is identified by the logical block address and transfer length. The logical block address
and transfer length is the same as, or a subset of, those specified in a prior XDWrite or Regenerate command.
If a match is not found, the command is terminated with a Check Condition status. The sense data is set to Ille-
gal Request: Invalid Field in CDB.
Table 233: XDRead (10) command (52h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Reserved
Byte Transfer Length (MSB)
Byte Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Byte Transfer Length
The number of bytes of data that will be transferred. A transfer length of zero (0) indicates that no bytes will be transferred.
This condition is not considered an error.
Control
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
342
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7Fh
XDRead (32) command
12.69
The XDRead (32) command requests that the target transfer the xor data generated by an XDWrite or Regen-
erate command to the initiator.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when an XDRead command is received from an ini-
tiator other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Con-
flict status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XDRead command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XDRead commands with a reservation conflict is terminated with Check Condition
status and the sense key is set to Data Protect if any part of the XDRead operation is prohibited by an extent
reservation.
The xor data transferred is identified by the logical block address and transfer length. The logical block address
and transfer length is the same as, or a subset of, those specified in a prior XDWrite or Regenerate command.
If a match is not found, the command is terminated with a Check Condition status. The sense data is set to Ille-
gal Request: Invalid Field in CDB.
Table 234: XDRead (32) command (7Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control
2
:
Reserved
6
Additional CDB Length (18h)
7
8
(MSB)
Service Action (0003h)
9
(LSB)
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
20
:
Reserved
27
28
29
30
31
(MSB)
Byte Transfer Length
(LSB)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional CDB Length (18h)
Table
number
The Additional CDB Length field indicates the number of additional CDB bytes. This value in the Additional CDB Length
field shall be a multiple of 4. If the number of CDB bytes delivered by the service delivery subsystem is not sufficient to con-
tain the number of bytes specified by the Additional CDB Length field, the command shall be terminated with a Check Con-
dition status. The sense key shall be set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code shall be set to Invalid Field in
CDB.
Byte Transfer Length
The number of bytes of data that will be transferred. A transfer length of zero (0) indicates that no bytes will be transferred.
This condition is not considered an error.
Control
Logical Block Address
The 32-bit address of the logical block affected by this command.
Service Action
0003h
The Service Action Code for the XDRead (32) command.
344
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50h
XDWrite (10) command
12.70
The XDWrite (10) command requests that the target xor the data transferred with the data on the medium. The
resulting xor data is stored by the target until it is retrieved by an XDRead command.
The resulting xor data is retrieved by an XDRead command with starting logical block address and transfer
length fields that match, or is a subset of, the starting logical block address and transfer length of this com-
mand.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when an XDWrite command is received from an ini-
tiator other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Con-
flict status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XDWrite command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XDWrite commands with a reservation conflict are terminated with Check Condi-
tion status and the sense key is set to Data Protect if any part of the XDWrite operation is prohibited by an
extent reservation.
Table 235: XDWrite (10) command (50h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
Disable
Write
Reserved
DPO
FUA
Reserved
Logical Block Address (MSB)
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address
Logical Block Address (LSB)
Reserved
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transfer Length (MSB)
Transfer Length (LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
Disable Write
0
1
The data transferred from the initiator is written to the medium after the xor operation is complete.
The data is not written to the medium.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
0
The priority is determined by the retention priority fields in the caching page. All other aspects of the algorithm imple-
menting the cache memory replacement strategy are not defined.
1
The device server assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. This value overrides any retention priority specified in the caching page.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The device server may satisfy the command by accessing the cache memory.
0
For read operations, any or all of the logical blocks that are contained in the cache memory may be transferred to
the application client directly from the cache memory.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For write operations, logical blocks may be transferred directly to the cache memory. Good status may be returned
to the application client prior to writing the logical blocks to the medium. Any error that occurs after the Good status
is returned is a deferred error, and information regarding the error is not reported until a subsequent command.
1
The device server accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status.
Read commands access the specified logical blocks from the media (the data is not directly retrieved from the
cache). In the case where the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block that the media, the logical
block writes to the media first.
Write commands do not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media (the data
is not write cached).
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address of the data to be affected by the xor operation.
Transfer Length
The number of logical blocks that will be transferred to the XDWrite target and the number of logical blocks that will be
affected by the xor operation.
346
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7Fh
XDWrite (32) command
12.71
The XDWrite (32) command requests that the target xor the data transferred with the data on the medium. The
resulting xor data is stored by the target until it is retrieved by an XDRead command.
The resulting xor data is retrieved by an XDRead command with starting logical block address and transfer
length fields that match, or is a subset of, the starting logical block address and transfer length of this com-
mand.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when an XDWrite command is received from an ini-
tiator other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Con-
flict status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XDWrite command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XDWrite commands with a reservation conflict are terminated with Check Condi-
tion status and the sense key is set to Data Protect if any part of the XDWrite operation is prohibited by an
extent reservation.
Table 236: XDWrite (32) command (7Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control
2
:
Reserved
6
Additional CDB Length (18h)
7
8
(MSB)
Service Action (0004h)
DPO FUA
9
(LSB)
10
Reserved
Disable
Write
Reserved
Reserved
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
20
:
Reserved
27
28
29
30
31
(MSB)
Transfer Length
(LSB)
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional CDB Length
Table
number
The Additional CDB Length field indicates the number of additional CDB bytes. This value in the Additional CDB Length
field shall be a multiple of 4. If the number of CDB bytes delivered by the service delivery subsystem is not sufficient to con-
tain the number of bytes specified by the Additional CDB Length field, the command shall be terminated with a Check Con-
dition status. The sense key shall be set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code shall be set to Invalid Field in
CDB.
Control
Disable Write
0
1
The data transferred from the initiator is written to the medium after the xor operation is complete.
The data is not written to the medium.
DPO (Disable Page Out)
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select Page 8 is set false (caching
enabled).
1
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command will not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media. The
FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense page 08h is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address of the data to be affected by the xor operation.
Service Action
0004h
The Service Action Code for the XDWrite (32) command.
Transfer Length
The number of logical blocks that will be transferred to the XDWrite target and the number of logical blocks that will be
affected by the xor operation.
348
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
53h
XDWriteRead (10) command
12.72
The XDWriteRead (10) command requests that the target xor the data transferred (data-out) with the data on
the medium and return the resulting xor data (data-in). This is the equivalent to an XDWrite (10) command fol-
lowed by an XDRead (10) command with the same Logical Block Address and Transfer Length. This command
is only available on transport protocols supporting bidirectional commands.
Table 237: XDWriteRead (10) command (53h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Disable
Write
Reserved
DPO
FUA
Reserved
2
3
4
5
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
(LSB)
Reserved
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
Transfer Length
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
DPO (Disable Page Out)
1
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select Page 8 is set false (caching
enabled).
Disable Write
0
1
The data transferred from the initiator is written to the medium after the xor operation is complete.
The data is not written to the medium.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command does not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media.
the FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense Page 8 is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address of the data to be affected by the xor operation.
Transfer Length
The number of logical blocks to be transferred to the XDWrite target for the xor operation. It also specifies the number of
blocks to be written to the medium after the xor operation.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7Fh
XDWriteRead (32) command
12.73
The XDWriteRead (32) command requests that the target xor the data transferred (data-out) with the data on
the medium and return the resulting xor data (data-in). This is the equivalent to an XDWrite (32) command fol-
lowed by an XDRead (32) command with the same Logical Block Address and Transfer Length. This command
is only available on transport protocols supporting bidirectional commands.
Table 238: XDWriteRead (32) command (7Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control
2
:
Reserved
6
Additional CDB Length
7
8
(MSB)
Service Action (0007h)
DPO FUA
9
(LSB)
10
Reserved
Disable
Write
Reserved
Reserved
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
(MSB)
Logical Block Address
(LSB)
20
:
Reserved
27
28
29
30
31
(MSB)
Transfer Length
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional CDB Length
The Additional CDB Length field indicates the number of additional CDB bytes. This value in the Additional CDB Length
field shall be a multiple of 4. If the number of CDB bytes delivered by the service delivery subsystem is not sufficient to con-
tain the number of bytes specified by the Additional CDB Length field, the command shall be terminated with a Check Con-
dition status. The sense key shall be set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code shall be set to Invalid Field in
CDB.
350
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control
DPO (Disable Page Out)
1
No data is cached. The DPO bit is only meaningful if the RCD bit of Mode Select Page 8 is set false (caching
enabled).
Disable Write
0
1
The data transferred from the initiator is written to the medium after the xor operation is complete.
The data is not written to the medium.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
The Write command does not return Good status until the logical blocks have actually been written on the media.
the FUA bit is only meaningful if the WCE bit of Mode Sense Page 8 is true.
1
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address of the data to be affected by the xor operation.
Service Action
0004h
The Service Action Code for the XDWriteRead Extended (32) command.
Transfer Length
The number of logical blocks to be transferred to the XDWrite target for the xor operation. It also specifies the number of
blocks to be written to the medium after the xor operation.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
51h
XPWrite (10) command
12.74
The XPWrite (10) command requests that the target xor the data transferred with the data on the medium and
then write the xor data to the medium.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when a XPWrite command is received from an initia-
tor other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Conflict
status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XPWrite command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XPWrite commands with a reservation conflict is terminated with Check Condition
status and the sense key is set to Data Protect with the appropriate additional sense code for the condition if
any part of the XPWrite operation is prohibited by an extent reservation.
Table 239: XPWrite (10) command (51h)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
Reserved
DPO
FUA
Reserved
(MSB)
2
3
4
5
Logical Block Address
Transfer Length
(LSB)
Reserved
6
7
8
9
(MSB)
(LSB)
Control
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Control
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
1
The disc drive assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. The host knows the logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed
again in the near future and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
0
The host expects that logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
1
The target accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status. Read commands access
the specified logical blocks from the media (i.e., the data in not directly retrieved from the cache). In the case where
the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block than the media, the logical block is first written to the
media.
0
The target satisfies the command by accessing the cache memory. For read operations, any logical blocks that are
contained in the cache memory are transferred to the initiator directly from the cache memory.
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address where the target reads data from its medium. This field also specifies the starting logical
block address where the xor result data is written to the medium.
Transfer Length
The number of blocks that will be read from or written to the medium.
352
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7Fh
XPWrite (32) command
12.75
The XPWrite (32) command requests that the target xor the data transferred with the data on the medium and
then write the xor data to the medium.
If the logical unit is reserved, a reservation conflict occurs when a XPWrite command is received from an initia-
tor other than the one holding the logical unit reservation. The command is rejected with Reservation Conflict
status if the reservation conflict is due to a logical unit reservation. The XPWrite command is evaluated for
extent reservation conflicts. XPWrite commands with a reservation conflict is terminated with Check Condition
status and the sense key is set to Data Protect with the appropriate additional sense code for the condition if
any part of the XPWrite operation is prohibited by an extent reservation.
Table 240: XPWrite (32) command (7Fh)
Bit
Byte
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Control
2
:
Reserved
6
Additional CDB Length (18h)
7
8
(MSB)
Service Action (0006h)
DPO FUA
9
(LSB)
10
11
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(MSB)
12
:
Logical Block Address
19
(LSB)
20
:
Reserved
27
28
:
31
(MSB)
Transfer Length
(LSB)
Table
number
Field definitions (listed alphabetically)
Additional CDB Length
The Additional CDB Length field indicates the number of additional CDB bytes. This value in the Additional CDB Length
field shall be a multiple of 4. If the number of CDB bytes delivered by the service delivery subsystem is not sufficient to con-
tain the number of bytes specified by the Additional CDB Length field, the command shall be terminated with a Check Con-
dition status. The sense key shall be set to Illegal Request and the additional sense code shall be set to Invalid Field in
CDB.
Control
DPO (Disable Page Out)
The DPO bit is used to control replacement of logical blocks in the cache memory when the host has information on the
future usage of the logical blocks.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
0
The disc drive assigns the logical blocks accessed by this command the lowest priority for being fetched into or
retained by the cache. The host knows the logical blocks accessed by the command are not likely to be accessed
again in the near future and should not be put in the cache memory nor retained by the cache memory.
The host expects that logical blocks accessed by this command are likely to be accessed again in the near future.
FUA (Force Unit Access)
1
The target accesses the media in performing the command prior to returning Good status. Read commands access
the specified logical blocks from the media (i.e., the data in not directly retrieved from the cache). In the case where
the cache contains a more recent version of a logical block than the media, the logical block is first written to the
media.
0
The target satisfies the command by accessing the cache memory. For read operations, any logical blocks that are
contained in the cache memory are transferred to the initiator directly from the cache memory.
Logical Block Address
The starting logical block address where the target reads data from its medium. This field also specifies the starting logical
block address where the xor result data is written to the medium.
Service Action
0006h
The Service Action Code for the XPWrite (32) command.
Transfer Length
The number of blocks that will be read from or written to the medium.
354
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13.0
Drive features
This section describes several features included for disc drives. Refer to the individual drive’s product manual
to determine if your drive supports these features.
13.1
Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology
Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology (S.M.A.R.T.) is designed to recognize conditions that indi-
cate imminent drive failure and provide sufficient warning to the host system of impending failure. The host
system may use the information provided to trigger it to perform diagnostic, preventative, and/or protective
functions (e.g., data backup).
The initiator sets up the parameters for S.M.A.R.T. operation using Mode Select Informational Exceptions Con-
trol page 1Ch. The drive reports information about S.M.A.R.T. operation using Request Sense Additional
descriptions of the Mode Select and Mode Sense commands. Refer to Section 12.16 for details on the Infor-
mational Exceptions Control page. Refer to the individual drive’s product manual to determine if your particular
drive supports S.M.A.R.T. and the extent of its implementation of the S.M.A.R.T. system.
13.2
Self-test operations
Default Self-test (DST) technology is part of a system to recognize drive fault conditions that qualify it for return
to Seagate. If the drive fails the test, remove it from service.
13.2.1
Default self-test
The default self-test is mandatory for all device types that support the Send Diagnostics command. The
response is simply a Good status if the test is successful or a Check Condition status if the test fails. Additional
status is available in the Default Self-test Diagnostics Results page by using the Receive Diagnostic Results
13.2.2
Short and extended device self-tests
There are two optional types of device self-test that may be invoked using the Self-test Code field in the Send
Diagnostics command: a short test and an extended test. The goal of the short device self-test is to quickly
identify if the logical unit is faulty. A goal of the extended device self-test routine is to simplify factory testing
during integration by having logical units perform more comprehensive testing without application client inter-
vention. A second goal of the extended device self-test is to provide a more comprehensive test to validate the
results of a short device self-test if its results are judged by the application client to be inconclusive.
The criteria for the short device self-test are that it has one or more segments and completes in two minutes or
less. The criteria for the extended device self-test are that it has one or more segments and that the completion
time is vendor-specific. Any tests performed in the segments are vendor-specific.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are examples of segments:
a. An electrical segment wherein the logical unit tests its own electronics. The tests in this segment are vendor
specific, but some examples of tests that might be included are: a read/write circuitry test and/or a test of
the read/write head elements;
b. A seek/servo segment wherein a device tests its capability to find and servo on data tracks; and
c. A read/verify scan segment wherein a device performs read scanning of some or all of the medium surface.
The tests performed in the segments may be the same for the short and extended device self-tests. The time
required by a logical unit to complete its extended device self-test is reported in the Extended Self-test Com-
13.2.3
Device self-test modes
There are two modes for short and extended self-tests: a foreground mode and a background mode. These
modes are described in the following sections.
13.2.3.1
Foreground mode
When a device server receives a Send Diagnostics command specifying a self-test to be performed in the fore-
ground mode, the device server returns status for that command after the self-test has been completed. Not all
Seagate drives support this mode.
While performing a device self-test in foreground mode, the device server responds to all commands except
Inquiry, Report LUNs, and Request Sense with a Check Condition status, a sense key of Not Ready and an
additional sense code of Logical Unit Not Ready, Self-test In Progress.
If a device server is performing a device self-test in the foreground mode and a test segment error occurs dur-
ing the test, the device server updates the Device Self-test results log page (see Section 12.10.4) and reports
Check Condition status with a sense key of Hardware Error and an additional sense code of Logical Unit Failed
Self-test. The application client may obtain additional information about the failure by reading the Device Self-
test Results log page. If the device server is unable to update the Self-test Results log page, it returns a Check
Condition status with a sense key of Hardware Error and an additional sense code of Logical Unit Unable To
Update Self-test Log.
An application client should reserve the logical unit before initiating a device self-test in the foreground mode.
An application client may terminate a device self-test that is being performed in the foreground mode using an
Abort Task, Abort Task Set, or Clear Task Set task management function. If a task manager receives an Abort
Task, Abort Task Set, or Clear Task Set task management function while performing a device self-test in the
foreground mode, it aborts the device self-test and updates the Device Self-test Results log page (see Section
13.2.3.2
Background mode
When a device server receives a Send Diagnostics command specifying a device self-test to be performed in
the background mode, the device server returns status for that command as soon as the command descriptor
block has been validated.
After returning status for the Send Diagnostics command specifying a self-test to be performed in the back-
ground mode, the device server shall initialize the Device Self-test Results log page (see Section 12.10.4) as
follows. The self-test code from the Send Diagnostics command shall be placed in the Self-test Code field in
the log page. The Self-test Results field shall be set to Fh. After the Self-test results log page is initialized, the
device server shall begin the first self-test segment.
356
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the device server is performing a self-test in the background mode, it shall terminate with a Check Con-
dition status any Send Diagnostics command it receives that meets one of the following criteria:
a. The Self-test bit is one; or
b. The Self-test Code field contains a value other than 000b or 100b.
When terminating the Send Diagnostics command, the sense key is set to Not Ready and the additional sense
code is set to Logical Unit Not Ready, Self-test In Progress.
While performing a device self-test in the background mode, the device server suspends the device self-test to
service any other commands received with the exceptions listed below.
Exception commands for background self-tests
• Send Diagnostics (with Self-test Code field set to 100b)
• Write Buffer (with the mode set to any download microcode option)
• Format Unit
• Start/Stop Unit (stop only)
Suspension of the device self-test to service the command occurs as soon as possible, but should never take
longer than two seconds.
If one of the exception commands listed above is received, the device server shall abort the self-test, update
the self-test log, and service the command as soon as possible but not longer than two seconds after the com-
mand descriptor block has been validated.
Note. An application client may terminate a self-test that is being performed in the background mode by
issuing a Send Diagnostics command with the Self-test Code field set to 100b (Abort background
self-test function).
13.2.3.3
Elements common to foreground and background self-test modes
The Progress Indication field returned in response to a Request Sense command (see Section 12.38) may be
used by the application client at any time during execution of a device self-test to poll the logical unit’s
progress. While executing a self-test (unless an error has occurred), the device server responds to a Request
Sense command by returning a sense key of Not Ready and an additional sense code of Logical Unit Not
Ready, Self-test In Progress with the sense key specific bytes set for progress indication.
The application client may obtain information about the twenty most recently completed device self-tests by
reading the Device Self-test Results log page (see Section 12.10.4). This is the only method an application cli-
ent can use to obtain information about self-tests performed in the background mode.
Table 241 summarizes when a logical unit returns status after receipt of a self-test command, how an applica-
tion client may abort a device self-test, how a logical unit handles new commands that are received while a
device self-test is in progress, and how a logical unit reports a device self-test failure.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 241: Device Self-test mode summary
When
status is the Device
returned Self-test
How to abort
Processing of subsequent
commands while Device Self-test
is executing
Mode
Device Self-test failure reporting
Fore-
ground
After the
self-testis management
complete function
Abort Task task If the command is Inquiry, Report
Terminate with Check Condition sta-
tus, Hardware Error sense key, and
Logical Unit Failed Self-test or Logi-
cal Unit Unable To Update Self-test
Log additional sense code.
LUNs, or Request Sense, process
normally. Otherwise, terminate with
Check Condition status, Not Ready
sense key, and Logical Unit Not
Ready, Self-test In Progress addi-
tional sense code.
Back-
ground
After the
CDB is
validated with Self-test
Code field set
Send Diagnos- Process the command, except as
Application client checks Device Self-
test results log page (see 12.10.4)
after the Progress Indication field
returned from Request Sense indi-
cates the self-test is complete.
to 100b
358
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14.0
Seagate Technology support services
Online Services
Internet
www.seagate.com for information about Seagate products and services. Worldwide support is available 24
hours daily by e-mail for your questions.
mySeagate
my.seagate.com is the industry’s first Web portal designed specifically for OEMs and distributors. It provides
self-service access to critical applications, personalized content and the tools that allow our partners to man-
age their Seagate account functions. Submit pricing requests, orders and returns through a single, password-
protected Web interface—anytime, anywhere in the world.
For support, questions and comments:
E-mail: [email protected]
Phone (direct): +1-405-324-4740
Phone (toll-free): 1-877-347-2444 (US and Canada), or access a complete list of region-specific international
toll-free phone numbers at my.seagate.com
reseller.seagate.com
reseller.seagate.com supports Seagate resellers with product information, program benefits and sales tools.
You may register for customized communications that are not available on the web. These communications
contain product launch, EOL, pricing, promotions and other channel-related information. To learn more about
the benefits or to register, go to reseller.seagate.com, any time, from anywhere in the world.
reseller.seagate.com partner support
24 hours a day, seven days a week:
By web form: reseller.seagate.com/contact/forms
By phone: Access a complete list of regional phone numbers at reseller.seagate.com/support/
Seagate Online Store
US customers can purchase Seagate disc drives 24 hours daily at www.seagate.com/buy/online/.
Automated Phone Services
®
SeaFONE (1-800-SEAGATE) is the Seagate toll-free number (1-800-732-4283) to access our automated
self-help and directory assistance for Seagate support services. Using a touch-tone phone, you can find ser-
vice and support phone numbers, answers to commonly asked questions, troubleshooting tips and specifica-
tions for disc drives 24 hours daily. International callers can reach this service by dialing +1-405-324-4770.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Presales, Technical Support and Customer Service
Presales Support
Our Presales Support staff can help you determine which Seagate products are best suited for your specific
application or computer system.
Technical Support
If you need help installing your drive, consult your system's documentation or contact the dealer's support ser-
vices department for assistance specific to your system. Seagate technical support is also available to assist
you online at support.seagate.com or through one of our technical support service centers. Have your system
configuration information and your drive’s “ST” model number available.
SeaTDD™ (+1-405-324-3655) is a telecommunications device for the deaf (TDD). You can send questions or
comments 24 hours daily and exchange messages with a technical support specialist during normal business
hours for the technical support call center in your region.
Warranty Service
Seagate offers worldwide customer support for Seagate drives. Seagate distributors, OEMs and other direct
customers should contact their Seagate service center representative for warranty-related issues. Resellers or
end users of drive products should contact their place of purchase or one of the Seagate warranty service cen-
ters for assistance. Have your drive’s “ST” model number and serial number available.
Authorized Service Centers
In some countries outside the US, you can contact an Authorized Service Center for service.
USA/Canada/Latin America Support Services
Presales Support
Call Center
Americas
Toll-free
Direct dial
FAX
+1-405-324-4704
1-877-271-32851
+1-405-324-47301
Technical Support
Call Center
Americas
Toll-free
Direct dial
FAX
+1-405-324-4702
1-800-SEAGATE2
+1-405-324-47003
Warranty Service
Call Center
USA, Mexico and
Latin America
Toll-free
Direct dial
FAX / Internet
+1-405-324-4722
1-800-468-34724
+1-405-324-47204
Canada
Memofix5
1-800-636-6349
—
+1-905-660-4936
+55-21-2509-7267
+1-905-660-4951
www.memofix.com
Brazil
MA Centro de Serviços5
+55-21-2507-6672
www.mainformatica.com.br/produtos.htm
1
Hours of operation are 8:00 A.M. to 11:45 A.M. and 1:00 P.M. to 6:00 P.M., Monday through Friday (Central time)
For product-specific phone number
2
3
4
5
Hours of operation are 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M., Monday through Friday (Central time)
Hours of operation are 8:30 A.M. to 12:15 P.M. and 1:30 P.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday (Central time)
Authorized Service Center
360
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
European Support Services
For presales and technical support in Europe, dial the toll-free number for your specific country. If your country
is not listed here, dial our presales and technical support call center at +1-405-324-4714 from 8:00 A.M. to
11:45 A.M. and 1:00 P.M. to 5:00 P.M. (Central Europe time) Monday through Friday. The presales and technical
support call center is located in Oklahoma City, USA.
For European warranty service, dial the toll-free number for your specific country. If your country is not listed
here, dial our European call center at +31-20-316-7222 from 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. (Central Europe time) Mon-
day through Friday. The warranty service call center is located in Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
Toll-Free Support Numbers
Call Center
Austria
Presales and Technical Support
0 800-20 12 90
Warranty Service
0 800-20 12 90
Belgium
Denmark
France
Germany
Ireland
Italy
Netherlands
Norway
Poland
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Turkey
00 800-47324283 (00 800-4SEAGATE)
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-311 12 38
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324283
00 800-31 92 91 40
00 800-47324283
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-311 12 38
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-47324289
00 800-31 92 91 40
00 800-47324289
United Kingdom
FAX Services—All European Countries (toll call)
Warranty Service
+31-20-653-3513
Africa/Middle East Support Services
For presales and technical support in Africa and the Middle East, dial our presales and technical support call
center at +1-405-324-4714 from 8:00 A.M. to 11:45 A.M. and 1:00 P.M. to 5:00 P.M. (Central Europe time) Mon-
day through Friday. The presales and technical support call center is located in Oklahoma City, USA.
For warranty service in Africa and the Middle East, dial our European call center at +31-20-316-7222 from 8:30
A.M. to 5:00 P.M. (Central Europe time) Monday through Friday, or send a FAX to +31-20-653-3513. The war-
ranty service center is located in Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Asia/Pacific Support Services
For Asia/Pacific presales and technical support, dial the toll-free number for your specific country. The Asia/
Pacific toll-free numbers are available from 6:00 A.M. to 10:45 A.M. and 12:00 P.M. to 6:00 P.M. (Australian East-
ern time) Monday through Friday, except as noted. If your country is not listed here, direct dial one of our tech-
nical support locations. Warranty service is available from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. April through October, and
10:00 P.M. to 7:00 P.M. November through March (Australian Eastern time) Monday through Friday, except as
noted.
Call Center
Australia
China (Chinese)
Hong Kong
Toll-free
Direct dial
—
+86-10-6225-5336
FAX
—
—
—
—
—
—
+81-3-5462-2978
—
—
+65-6488-7525
—
—
1800-14-7201
800-810-9668
800-90-0474
001-800-0830-1730
1-600-33-1104
001-803-1-003-2165
—
1-800-80-2335
0800-443988
800-1101-150
00-800-0830-1730
001-800-11-0032165
1, 3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1, 3
Hong Kong (Chinese)
2, 3
India
Indonesia
Japan
Malaysia
New Zealand
Singapore
1, 3
Taiwan (Chinese)
Thailand
Warranty Service
Call Center
Asia/Pacific
Toll-free
—
1800-12-9277
—
Direct dial
+65-6485-3595
—
FAX
+65-6485-4860
—
Australia
3
India
+91-44-821-6164
+91-44-827-2461
1
Hours of operation are 8:30 A.M. to 5:30 P.M., Monday through Friday (Australian Western time).
Hours of operation are 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M., Monday through Saturday.
Authorized Service Center
2
3
362
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A.
Glossary
This section contains a glossary of terms used in this publication.
ABTS
Abort Sequence.
ABTX
Abort Exchange.
ACC
Accept.
ACK
Acknowledgment.
Active
The state of Sequence Initiator until all the Data frames for the Sequence have been transmitted. The state of
Sequence Recipient until all the Data frames for the Sequence have been received. The period of time during
which frames of a Sequence (or an Exchange) are actively being transmitted or received.
Active Virtual Circuit Credit limit
The maximum number of VC_Credits available for a Virtual Circuit in the Active state. It represent the maxi-
mum number of VC_Credits held by an N_Port on a given Virtual Circuit when the Circuit is in the active state.
Address identifier
An address value used to identify source (S_ID) or destination (D_ID) of a frame.
ADVC
Advise Credit.
Alias
Alias is a group address recognized by an N_Port if the N_Port has registered as a member of the group, with
the Alias Server.
Alias address identifier (alias)
One or more address identifiers which may be recognized by an N_Port in addition to its N_Port Identifier. An
alias address identifier is Fabric unique and may be common to multiple N_Ports.
Alias_Token
A 12-byte field to indicate the type of Alias (such as Multicast, Hunt Group) and certain properties associated
with the Alias (such as FC-PH TYPE, Node Name for the Common Controlling Entity).
Application client
An object that is the source of SCSI commands.
Application client buffer offset
Offset in bytes from the start or base address of the application client’s data buffer to the location for the trans-
fer of the first byte of a data delivery service request.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arbitrated loop topology
A topology where L_Ports use arbitration to establish a point-to-point circuit. A configuration that allows multi-
ple ports to be connected serially.
Attenuation
The transmission medium power loss expressed in units of dB.
Available BB_Credit
Also called “Available buffer-to-buffer credit.” A transmitter uses this variable to determine permission to trans-
mit frames, and if so, the allowable number of frames to transmit. The transmitter may transmit a frame when
the Available BB_ Credit value is greater than 0. The rules for modifying Available BB_Credit are:
(a) in an OPN Initiator, Available BB_Credit may be initialized to a value less than or equal to the
Login_BB_Credit of the OPN Recipient upon transmission of any OPN;
(b) in an OPN Recipient (acting as a Sequence Initiator), Available BB_Credit may be initialized to a value
less than or equal to Login_BB_Credit of the OPN Initiator (acting as a Sequence Recipient) upon receipt
of a full duplex OPN;
(c) Available BB_Credit is decremented upon transmission of a frame;
(d) Available BB_Credit is incremented upon receipt of R_RDY, except that following an OPN to or from a
Sequence Recipient with Login_BB_Credit>0, one R_RDY is discarded for each frame sent until the num-
ber of R_RDYs discarded equals the Login_BB_Credit value.
Available_receive_buffers
In class 3, the number of buffers in a receiving port which are available for receiving frames at link rate. Equal
to the largest number of R_RDYs an NL_port can issue immediately upon transmission or receipt of an OPN.
BB Flow control rules keep this number greater than or equal to the Available BB_Credit variable in a transmit-
ting port. The number of available receive buffers must be greater than or equal to Login_BB_Credit upon
receipt of any OPN.
Bandwidth
Maximum effective transfer rate for a given set of physical variants such as communication model, Payload
size, Fibre speed, and overhead specified by FC-PH.
Base address
The address of the lowest address byte to be transferred to or from an application client buffer.
Baud
The encoded bit rate per second.
BB Credit_CNT
Buffer-to-buffer Credit_Count.
BB_buffer
The buffer associated with buffer-to-buffer flow control.
BB_Credit
Buffer-to-buffer Credit.
364
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Beginning Running Disparity
The Running Disparity present at a transmitter when Encoding of the Special Code associated with an Ordered
Set is initiated, or at a receiver when Decoding of the Special Character associated with an Ordered Set is ini-
tiated.
BER
See Bit error rate.
Bit error rate (BER)
The statistical probability of a transmitted bit being erroneously received in a communication system. The BER
is measured by counting the number of erroneous bits at the output of a receiver and dividing by the total num-
ber of bits.
Bit synchronization
The state in which a receiver is delivering retimed serial data at the required BER.
Block
A upper level construct of application data related to a single Information Category and transferred within a sin-
gle Sequence.
BNC
Acronym for a Bayonet-Neil-Councilman Coaxial Cable Connector. Specifications for BNC style connectors are
defined in EIA/TIA 403-A and MIL-C-39012.
BSY
Busy.
Buffer
A logical construct which holds the contents of a single frame.
Byte
An eight-bit entity with its least significant bit denoted as bit 0 and most significant bit as bit 7. The most signifi-
cant bit is shown on the left side in FC-PH, unless specifically indicated otherwise. Bytes are packed four per
32-bit word, or eight per 64-bit word.
Cable plant
All passive communications elements (e.g., optical fibre, twisted pair, or coaxial cable, connectors, splices,
etc.) between a transmitter and a receiver.
CATV
Central Antenna Television.
CClTT
Comite Consultatif International, Telegraphique et Telephonique (see ITV-TS).
CDB
Command descriptor block.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center wavelength (LED)
The average of the two wavelengths measured at the half amplitude points of the power spectrum.
Centre wavelength (laser)
The nominal value of the central wavelength of the operating, modulated laser. This is the wavelength where
the effective optical power resides.
Character
Any Transmission Character associated by FC-1 transmission code with a FC-2 data byte or special code.
Transmission characters are generated and interpreted only by FC-1.
Circuit
A bidirectional path within the Fabric.
Class 1 service
A service which establishes a dedicated connection between communicating N_Ports.
Class 2 service
A service which multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N_Ports with acknowledge-
ment provided.
Class 3 service
A service which multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N_Ports without acknowledge-
ment.
Class 4 bidirectional circuits
A pair of unidirectional virtual circuits between two communicating N_Ports.
Class 4 Circuit Initiator
The N_Port which initiates the setup of a Class 4 circuit.
Class 4 Circuit Recipient
The N_Port which accepts a Class 4 circuit with the Originator N_Port.
Class 4 end-to-end credit limit
The maximum amount of end-to-end credit available for a virtual circuit. It represents the maximum number of
Class 4 end-to-end credit held by an N_Port on a given virtual circuit.
Class 4 service
A service that establishes virtual circuits to provide fractional bandwidth service between communicating
N_Ports. The service multiplexes frames at frame boundaries to or from one or more N_Ports with acknowl-
edgment provided.
Class l/SOFcl
Class 1 frame with a SOFcl delimiter.
Classes of service
Different types of services provided by the Fabric and used by the communicating N_Ports.
366
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Code balance
The numerical sum of the 1 bits in any 10 bits in the transmitted bit stream divided by 10 (e.g., 1110100011 has
a code balance of 6/10 = 60%).
Code bit
The smallest time period used by FC-0 for transmission on the media.
Code violation
An error condition that occurs when a received transmission character cannot be decoded to a valid data byte
or special code using the validity checking rules specified by the transmission code.
Comma
The seven bit sequence 0011111 or 1100000 in an encoded stream.
Comma character
A special character containing a comma.
Command
A request describing a unit of work to be performed by a device server.
Command byte count
Upper limit on the extent of the data to be transferred by the SCSI command.
Command descriptor block (CDB)
A structure up to 16 bytes in length used to communicate a command from an application client to a device
server.
Concatenation
A logical operation that “joins together” strings of data. This operation is represented with the symbol “||”. Two
or more fields are concatenated to provide a reference of uniqueness (e.g., S_ID||X_ID).
Connection
See Dedicated Connection.
Connection initiator
The source N_Port which initiates a Class 1 connection with a destination N_Port through a connection
request and also receives a valid response from the destination N_Port to complete the connection establish-
ment.
Connection recipient
The destination N_Port which receives a Class 1 connect-request from the connection Initiator and accepts
establishment of the connection by transmitting a valid response.
Connection-oriented frames
Frames sent in either a Class 1 dedicated connection or a Class 4 circuit.
Connectionless buffers
Receive buffers participating in connectionless service and capable of receiving connectionless frames.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connectionless frames
Frames participating in connectionless service (i.e., Class 1 frames with SOFc1, Class 2, and Class 3 frames
referred to individually or collectively).
Connectionless service
Communication between two N_Ports performed without a dedicated connection.
Continuously increasing relative offset
The relationship specified between relative offset values contained in frame (n) and frame (n+1) of an informa-
tion category within a single Sequence.
COR
Camp-On Request.
Credit
The maximum number of receive buffers allocated to a transmitting N_Port or F_Port. It represents the maxi-
mum number of outstanding frames which can be transmitted by that N_Port or F_Port without causing a buffer
overrun condition at the receiver.
Credit_CNT
Credit Count.
CTI
Circuit Initiator.
CTR
Circuit Recipient.
Current running disparity
The running disparity present at a transmitter when Encoding of a valid data byte or special code is initiated, or
at a receiver when decoding of a transmission character is initiated.
D_ID
Destination_Identifier.
Data character
Any transmission character associated by the transmission code with a valid data byte.
Data frame
A frame containing information meant for FC-4/ULP or the link application.
Data out delivery service
A confirmed service used by the device server to request the transfer of data from the application client.
dB
Decibel.
dBm
Decibel (relative to 1 mw power).
368
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Decoding
Validity checking of received transmission characters and generation of valid data bytes and special codes
from those characters.
Dedicated connection
A communicating circuit guaranteed and retained by the Fabric for two given N_Ports.
Dedicated duplex
A synonym for Class 1 dedicated connection.
Dedicated simplex
A unidirectional Class 1 connection with ACKs transmitted in Class 2.
Delimiter
An ordered set used to indicate a frame boundary.
Destination N_Port
The N_Port to which a frame is targeted.
Destination_Identifier (D_ID)
The address identifier used to indicate the targeted destination of the transmitted frame.
Device server
An object within the logical unit which executes SCSI tasks and enforces the rules for task management.
DF_CTL
Data Field Control.
Discard policy
An error handling policy where an N_Port is able to discard data frames received following detection of a miss-
ing frame in a sequence.
Disparity
The difference between the number of ones and zeros in a transmission character.
Dispersion
A term used to denote pulse broadening and distortion. The two general categories of dispersion are modal
dispersion, due to the difference in the propagation velocity of the propagation modes in a multimode fibre, and
chromatic dispersion, due to the difference in propagation of the various spectral components of the optical
source.
DJ
Deterministic jitter.
DUT
Device under test.
E_D_TOV
Error_Detect_Timeout value.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ECL
Emitter Coupled Logic.
EE_buffer
The buffer associated with end-to-end flow control.
EE_Credit
End-to-End Credit.
EE_Credit_CNT
End-to-End Credit Count.
EIA
Electronic Industries Association.
Electrical fall time
The time interval for the falling edge of an electrical pulse to transition from its 90% amplitude level to its 10%
amplitude level.
Electrical rise time
The time interval for the rising edge of an electrical pulse to transition from its 10% amplitude level to its 90%
amplitude level.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility.
Encoding
Generation of transmission characters from valid data bytes and special codes.
EOF
End of frame.
ESB
Exchange Status Block.
ESTC
Estimate Credit.
ESTS
Establish Streaming.
Exchange
The basic mechanism which transfers information consisting of one or more related non-concurrent sequences
which may flow in the same or opposite directions. An exchange may span multiple Class 1 dedicated connec-
tions. The exchange is identified by an Originator Exchange_Identifier (OX_ID) and a Responder
Exchange_Identifier (RX_ID).
370
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exchange Status Block
A logical construct which contains the state of an exchange. An originator N_Port has an Originator Exchange
Status Block and the responder N_Port has a Responder Exchange Status Block for each concurrently active
Exchange.
Exchange_Identifier (X_ID)
A generic reference to OX_ID and RX_ID (see Exchange).
Exclusive connection
A Class 1 dedicated connection without Intermix (see dedicated connection).
Execute command service
A peer-to-peer, confirmed service requested by the application client to perform a SCSI command.
Extinction ratio
The ratio (in dB) of the average optical energy in a logic one level to the average optical energy in a logic zero
level measured under modulated conditions at the specified baud rate.
Eye opening
The time interval across the eye, measured at the 50% normalized eye amplitude which is error free to the
specified BER.
F_BSY
Fabric_Port_Busy.
F_BSY(DF)
F_BSY response to a data frame.
F_BSY(LC)
F_BSY response to any link control except P-BSY.
F_CTL
Frame_Control.
F_Port
The Link_Control_Facility within the fabric which attaches to an N_Port through a link. An F_Port is address-
able by the N_Port attached to it, with a common well known address identifier (hex “FFFFFE”) (see local
F_Port, and remote F_Port).
F_Port
Fabric_Port.
F_Port Name
A Name_Identifier associated with an F_Port.
F_RJT
Fabric_Port_Reject.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fabric
The entity which interconnects various N_Ports attached to it and is capable of routing frames by using only the
D_ID information in a FC-2 frame header.
Fabric_Name
A Name_Identifier associated with a fabric.
FACT
Fabric Activate Alias.
FC
Fibre Channel
FC-4 Region
A set of N_Ports connected either point-to-point or to a common fabric, such that any N_Port in the set can
successfully complete the N_Port Login procedure with all other N_Ports in the set and successfully maintain
an exchange for a particular FC-4.
FC-PH
ANSI X3.230-1994, Fibre Channel Physical and Signaling Interface.
FC-4
Fibre Channel Layer 4 mapping layer.
FCP
Fibre Channel Protocol.
FCP I/O operation
An unlinked SCSI command, a series of linked SCSI commands, or a task management function.
FCP_Port
An N_Port or NL_Port that supports the SCSI Fibre Channel Protocol.
FCPH
The architecture specified by the Fibre Channel standard.
FCS
Frame Check Sequence.
FCSI
Fibre Channel Systems Initiative.
FDACT
Fabric Deactivate Alias.
Fiber optic test procedure (FOTP)
Standards developed and published by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA) under the EIA-RS-455
series of standards.
372
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fibre
A general term used to cover all transmission media specified in FC-PH.
Fibre Channel Name
A Name_Identifier which is Fibre Channel unique.
Fibre optic cable
A jacketed optical fibre or fibres.
FL_Port
An F_Port that contains Arbitrated Loop functions associated with Arbitrated Loop topology.
FOTP
Fiber optic test procedure.
FQXID
Fully qualified exchange identifier.
Fractional bandwidth
A portion of the total bandwidth available on a path.
Frame
An indivisible unit of information used by FC-2.
Frame Content
The information contained in a frame between its Start-of-Frame and End-of-Frame delimiters, excluding the
delimiters.
FRU
Field Replaceable Unit.
FT-1
Frame type 1.
FT-O
Frame type 0.
Fully qualified exchange identifier
A token used to uniquely identify a FCP I/O Operation.
FWHM
Full Width Half Max.
GAID
Get Alias_ID.
Hard address
The AL_PA which an NL_Port attempts to acquire in the LIHA Loop Initialization Sequence.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hex
Hexadecimal notation.
HG
Hunt Group.
Hunt Group
A set of N_Ports with a common alias address identifier managed by a single node or common controlling
entity. However, FC-PH does not presently specify how a Hunt Group can be configured.
Hz
Hertz = 1 cycle per second.
ID
Identifier.
Idle
See “Idle Word.”
Idle Word (Idle)
An ordered set of four transmission characters which are normally transmitted between frames. The Idle Word
is also referred to as an Idle.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
Ignored
A field that is not interpreted by the receiver.
Infinite buffer
A terminology to indicate that at FC-2 level, the amount of buffer available at the Sequence Recipient is unlim-
ited. The ULP chooses the amount of buffer per Sequence based on its MTU (maximum transfer unit).
Information Category
A frame header field indicating the category to which the frame payload belongs (e.g., Solicited Data, Unsolic-
ited Data, Solicited Control, and Unsolicited Control).
Information transfer
Transfer of frames whose payload has meaning to the cooperating FC-4s.
Information Unit
An organized collection of data specified by FC-4 to be transferred as a single sequence by FC-2.
Information Unit
An organized collection of data specified by FC-4 to be transferred as a single sequence by FC-2.
374
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Relative Offset
A relative offset value specified at the sending end by an upper level for a given block or subblock and used by
the sending FC-2 in the first frame of that block or subblock (see subblock, block, and Relative Offset). Initial
Relative Offset value may be zero or non-zero.
Initialization
For FC-1 level the period beginning with power on and continuing until the transmitter and receiver of that level
become operational.
Initiator
An SCSI device containing application clients that originate device service requests and task management
functions to be processed by a target SCSI device.
Initiator identifier
Token by which a target identifies the initiator device.
Interface connector
An optical or electrical connector which connects the media to the Fibre Channel transmitter or receiver. The
connector consists of a receptacle and a plug.
Intermix
A service which interleaves Class 2 and Class 3 frames on an established Class 1 connection.
Intersymbol interference
The effect on a sequence of symbols in which the symbols are distorted by transmission through a limited
bandwidth medium to the extent that adjacent symbols begin to interfere with each other.
IP
Internet Protocol.
IPA
Initial process associator.
ITV-TS
The International Union–Telecommunication Standardization (formerly CClTT).
IU
Information Unit.
Jitter
Deviations from the ideal timing of an event which occur at high frequencies. Low frequency deviations are
tracked by the clock recovery and do not directly affect the timing allocations within a bit cell. Jitter is not
tracked by the clock recovery and directly affects the timing allocations in a bit cell. For FC-PH the lower cutoff
frequency for jitter is defined as the bit rate divided by 2,500. Jitter is customarily subdivided into deterministic
and random components.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
375
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jitter, deterministic (DJ)
Timing distortions caused by normal circuit effects in the transmission system. Deterministic jitter is often sub-
divided into duty cycle distortion (DCD) caused by propagation differences between the two transitions of a sig-
nal and data dependent jitter (DDJ) caused by the interaction of the limited bandwidth of the transmission
system components and the symbol sequence.
Jitter, random (RJ)
Jitter due to thermal noise which may be modeled as a Gaussian process. The peak-to-peak value of RJ is of
a probabilistic nature and thus any specified value yields an associated BER.
JNA
Join Alias Group.
L_Port
An N_Port or F_Port that contains Arbitrated Loop functions associated with Arbitrated Loop topology.
LA RJT
Link Application Reject.
LAN
Local Area Network.
laser chirp
A phenomenon in lasers where the wavelength of the emitted light changes during modulation.
LCF
Link Control Facility.
LCR
Link Credit Reset.
LED
light emitting diode.
level
3. A document artifice used to group related architectural functions. No specific correspondence is intended
between levels and actual implementations.
4. a specific value of voltage (e.g., voltage level).
link
1. Two unidirectional fibres transmitting in opposite directions and their associated transmitters and receivers.
2. The full-duplex FC-0 level association between FC-1 entities in directly attached Ports (see Port).
Link_Control_Facility
A link hardware facility which attaches to an end of a link and manages transmission and reception of data. It is
contained within each N_Port and F_Port.
LLC
Logical Link Control.
376
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Local F_Port
The F_Port to which an N_Port is directly attached by a link (see remote F_Port).
LOGI
Log in.
Logical unit
A target resident entity that implements a device model and executes SCSI commands sent by an application
client.
Logical unit identifier
Identifier used by an initiator to reference the logical unit.
Login_BB_Credit
On FC-AL, equal to the number of receive buffers that a receiving NL_ port must have available when a loop
circuit is established. Login_BB_Credit is discovered in the PDISC or PLOGI protocol.
LOGO
Log out.
LOL
Loss of light.
Loop Tenancy
The period of time beginning when a port wins arbitration and ending when it receives a CLS in response to its
own CLS, or forwards a CLS transmitted to it.
Loop_ID
7-bit values numbered contiguously from 0 to 126 decimal and representing the 127 legal hard addresses on a
loop (not all of the 256 possible AL_PAs are used in FC-AL for reasons related to running disparity). Loop_IDs
correspond to the 7-bit SEL word in SFF-8045 used for specifying hard addresses. Decimal 127 (7F hex) is not
a valid Loop_ID, but is used to signify that no hard address is being assigned to an NL_Port.
Loopback
A mode of FC-1 operation in which the information passed to the FC-1 transmitter for transmission is shunted
directly to the FC-1 receiver, overriding any signal detected by the receiver on its attached fibre.
LR
Link Reset primitive sequence.
LRR
Link Reset Response primitive sequence.
LS_ACC
Link Service Accept.
LW
Long wavelength.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
m
Meter.
MAC
Media Access Control.
Mandatory
A function which is required to be supported by a compliant implementation of FC-PH.
MAS
Master of link.
Mb
Mega bit.
MB
Mega byte.
MBd
Mega baud.
Meaningful
A control field or bit shall be applicable and shall be interpreted by the receiver, wherever it is specified as
meaningful. Wherever it is specified as “not meaningful,” it shall be ignored (see valid).
MM
Multimode.
Mode-partition noise
Noise in a laser based optical communication system caused by the changing distribution of laser energy par-
titioning itself among the laser modes (or lines) on successive pulses in the data stream. The effect is a differ-
ent center wavelength for the successive pulses resulting in arrival time jitter attributable to chromatic
dispersion in the fibre.
ms
Millisecond.
ms
Microsecond.
N_Port
A hardware entity which includes a Link_Control_Facility. It may act as an originator, a responder, or both.
N_Port
Node_Port.
378
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N_Port Identifier
A fabric-unique address identifier by which an N_Port is uniquely known. The identifier may be assigned by the
fabric during the initialization procedure. The identifier may also be assigned by other procedures not defined
in FC-PH. The identifier is used in the S_ID and D_ID fields of a frame.
N_Port Name
A Name_Identifier associated with an N_Port.
NA
Not applicable.
NAA
Network Address Authority.
NACT
N_Port Activate Alias.
Name_Identifier
A 64-bit identifier, with a 60-bit value preceded with a 4-bit Network Address Authority Identifier, used to identify
entities in Fibre Channel such as N_Port, Node, F_Port, or Fabric.
NDACT
N_Port Deactivate Alias.
Network_Address_Authority (NAA)
An organization which administers network addresses.
Network_Address_Authority (NAA) identifier
A four-bit identifier defined in FC-PH to indicate a Network_Address_Authority (NAA).
NL_Port
An N_Port that contains arbitrated loop functions associated with the Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop topology.
Node
A collection of one or more N_Ports or NL_Ports controlled by a level above FC-2.
Node_Name
A Name_Identifier associated with a node.
Non-repeating ordered set
An ordered set which, when issued by FC-2 to FC-1 for transmission, is to be transmitted once.
NOP
No operation.
NOS
Not Operational primitive sequence.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Not Operational
A receiver or transmitter that is not capable of receiving or transmitting an encoded bit stream respectively,
based on the rules defined by FC-PH for error control. For example, FC-1 is Not Operational during Initializa-
tion.
ns
Nanosecond.
NTP
Network Time Protocol.
OESB
Originator Exchange Status Block.
OFC
Open fibre control.
Offset
Relative Offset.
OFSTP
Optical fiber system test practice.
OLS
Online primitive sequence.
Open
The period of time starting when a sequence (an exchange) is initiated until that sequence (the exchange) is
normally or abnormally terminated.
Open fibre control (OFC)
A safety interlock system that controls the optical power level on an open optical fibre cable.
Operation
A construct which may be used by a level above FC-2 and is associated with one or more exchanges.
Operation_Associator
A value used in the Association_Header to identify a specific operation within a Node and correlate communi-
cating processes related to that operation. Operation_Associator is the mechanism by which an operation
within a given Node is referred to by another communicating Node. Operation_Associator is a generic refer-
ence to Originator Operation_Associator and Responder Operation_Associator (see Process_Associator).
Operational
The state of a receiver or transmitter that is capable of receiving or transmitting an encoded bit stream, respec-
tively, based on the rules defined by FC-PH for error control. Those receivers capable of accepting signals from
transmitters requiring laser safety procedures are not considered operational after power on until a signal of a
duration longer than that associated with laser safety procedures is present at the fibre attached to the
receiver.
380
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPN Initiator
The port on an Arbitrated Loop that sent the OPN primitive.
Optical fibre
Any filament or fibre, made of dielectric material, that guides light.
Optional
Characteristics that are not required by FC-PH. However, if any optional characteristic is implemented, it shall
be implemented as defined in FC-PH.
Ordered set
A transmission word composed of a special character in its first (leftmost) position and data characters in its
remaining positions. An ordered set is represented by the combination of special codes and data bytes which,
when encoded, result in the generation of the transmission characters specified for the ordered set.
Originator
The logical function associated with an N_Port responsible for originating an exchange.
Originator Exchange Identifier (OX_ID)
An identifier assigned by an originator to identify an exchange and meaningful only to the originator (see
Responder Exchange Identifier).
ORL
Optical return loss.
OVC_ID
Originator VC_ID.
OX_ID
Originator_Exchange_Identifier.
P_BSY
N_Port Busy.
Payload
Contents of the data field of a frame, excluding optional headers and fill bytes, if present.
PDISC
Discover N_Port Service parameters.
Plug
The cable half of the interface connector which terminates an optical or electrical signal transmission cable.
Port
A generic reference to an N_Port or F_Port.
Port_Name
A Name_Identifier associated with a port.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power on state
In this state, any circuits or optical devices respond to controls resulting from higher levels.
ppm
Parts per million.
Preferred Address
On FC-AL, the AL_PA which an NL_Port attempts to acquire first during loop initialization. Following power-on
reset, the preferred address of a private NL_Port is its hard address (if any). Following receipt of a LIP other
than LIP(AL_PD,AL_PS), the preferred address of a private NL_Port is its previously acquired address. Fabric-
assigned or soft addresses are not considered to be preferred.
Previously Acquired Address
This address only has meaning during loop initialization. During initialization, it is the AL_PA which was in use
prior to receipt of LIP. After the time a loop initialization completes and the next one begins, an NL_Port has no
previously acquired address.
Primitive Sequence
An ordered set transmitted repeatedly and continuously until a specified response is received.
Primitive Signal
An ordered set designated to have a special meaning such as an Idle or Receiver_Ready (R_RDY).
Private loop device
A device with only private NL_Ports.
Private NL_Port
An NL_Port which is observing the rules of private loop behavior.
PRLI
Process Login.
PRLO
Process Logout.
Process policy
An error handling policy where an N_Port is able to continue processing Data frames received following detec-
tion of one or more missing frames in a sequence.
Process_Associator
A value used in the Association_Header to identify a process or a group of processes within a Node.
Process_Associator is the mechanism by which a process is addressed by another communicating process.
Process_Associator is a generic reference to Originator Process_Associator and Responder Process_ Associ-
ator (see Operation_Associator).
Profile
An interoperability specification that provides implementation guidelines for systems manufacturers, system
integrators, component manufacturers, and users seeking to design and select interoperable Fibre Channel
peripherals, hosts, and components. A Profile specifies particular settings for various Fibre Channel physical,
link-level, and upper-level protocol options to enhance interoperability.
382
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Public loop device
A device with at least one public NL_Port.
Public NL_Port
An NL_Port which can observe the rules of either public or private loop behavior. A public NL_Port may have
open Exchanges with both private and public NL_Ports concurrently.
QoSF
Quality of Service Facilitator.
QoSR
Quality of Service Request.
R_CTL
Routing Control.
R_A_TOV
Resource_Allocation_Timeout value.
R_RDY
Receiver_Ready.
R_T_TOV
Receiver_Transmitter_Timeout Value.
Random Relative Offset
The relationship specified between Relative Offset values contained in frame (n) and frame (n+1) of an Infor-
mation Category within a single Sequence. For a given Information Category i within a single Sequence, Ran-
dom Relative Offset (RO[i]) value for a frame (n+1) is unrelated to that of the previous frame (n). (see Initial
Relative Offset and Continuously Increasing Relative Offset).
RCS
Read Connection Status.
Receiver
1. The portion of a Link_Control_Facility dedicated to receiving an encoded bit stream from a fibre, convert-
ing this bit stream into Transmission Characters, and Decoding these characters using the rules specified
by FC-PH.
2. An electronic circuit (Rx) that converts a signal from the media (optical or electrical) to an electrical retimed
(or nonretimed) serial logic signal.
Receiver overload
The condition of exceeding the maximum acceptable value of the received average optical power at point
g
R
-12
to achieve a BER <10
.
Note. (See FC-PI-2, Section 5.9, Interoperability points, Figure 10, where gR = Bulkhead Receiver Con-
nector).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiver sensitivity
-12
The minimum acceptable value of average received signal at point gR to achieve a BER <10 . It takes into
account power penalties caused by use of a transmitter with a worst-case output. In the case of an optical path,
it does not include power penalties associated with dispersion, jitter, effects related to the modal structure of
the source or reflections from the optical path. These effects are specified separately in the allocation of maxi-
mum optical path penalty.
Note. (See FC-PI-2, Section 5.9, Interoperability points, Figure 10, where gR = Bulkhead Receiver Con-
nector).
Receptacle
The fixed or stationary female half of the interface connector which is part of the transmitter or receiver.
Reflections
Power returned to point S of figure x by discontinuities in the physical link.
Relative Offset (Offset)
The displacement, expressed in bytes, of the first byte of a Payload related to an upper level defined-origin for
a given Information Category (see Continuously Increasing and Random Relative Offset).
Relative Offset space
A virtual address space defined by the sending upper level for a single information category. The address
space starts from zero, representing the upper level defined-origin, and extends to its highest value.
Remote F_Port
The F_Port to which the other communicating N_Port is directly attached (see local F_Port).
Repeating ordered set
An ordered set which, when issued by FC-2 to FC-1 for transmission, is to be repetitively transmitted until a
subsequent transmission request is issued by FC-2.
REQCS
Request Clock Synchronization.
Request byte count
Number of bytes to be moved by a data delivery service request.
RES
Read Exchange Status Block.
RESB
Responder Exchange Status Block.
reserved
A field which is filled with binary zeros by the source N_Port and is ignored by the destination N_Port. Note:
Future enhancements to FC-PH may define usages for reserved fields. The reserved fields should not be
checked or interpreted. Any violation of this guideline may result in loss of upward compatibility with future
implementations which comply with future enhancements to FC-PH.
384
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Responder
The logical function in an N_Port responsible for supporting the Exchange initiated by the Originator in another
N_Port.
Responder Exchange_Identifier (RX_ID)
An identifier assigned by a Responder to identify an Exchange and meaningful only to the Responder.
RFI
Radio Frequency Interference.
RIIN
reflection induced intensity noise.
RJ
Random jitter.
RJT
Reject.
RlN
Relative intensity noise.
RMC
Remove connection.
RMS
Root mean square.
RNC
Report node capability.
RO
Relative offset.
RSS
Read sequence status block.
RTV
Read timeout value.
Run length
Number of consecutive identical bits in the transmitted signal, e.g., the pattern 0011111010 has a run length of
five (5).
Running disparity
A binary parameter indicating the cumulative disparity (positive or negative) of all previously issued transmis-
sion characters.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RVC_ID
Responder VC_ID.
RVCS
Read virtual circuit status.
Rx
Receiver.
RX_ID
Responder_Exchange_Identifier.
s or sec
Second(s).
S/N
signal-to-noise ratio.
S_ID
Source_Identifier.
S_Length
Security_Length.
S_Type
Security_Type.
SBCCS
Single byte command code sets.
SCN
State change notification.
SCR
Stacked connect request.
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface.
SCSI device
A device that originates or services SCSI commands.
SEQ-CNT
Sequence count.
SEQ_ID
Sequence ID.
386
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sequence
A set of one or more data frames with a common Sequence_ID (SEQ_ID), transmitted unidirectionally from
one N_Port to another N_Port with a corresponding response, if applicable, transmitted in response to each
data frame.
Sequence initiator
The N_Port which initiates a sequence and transmits data frames to the destination N_Port.
Sequence recipient
The N_Port which receives data frames from the sequence initiator and, if applicable, transmits responses
(Link_Control frames) to the sequence initiator.
Sequence status block
A logical construct which tracks the state of a sequence. Both the sequence initiator and the sequence recipi-
ent have a sequence status block for each concurrently active sequence.
Sequence_ID (SEQ_ID)
An identifier used to identify a sequence.
SISB
Sequence initiator status block.
SM
Single mode.
SOF
Start of frame.
Solicited control
One of the information categories indicated in the frame header.
Solicited data
One of the information categories indicated in the frame header.
Source N_Port
The N_Port from which a frame is transmitted.
Source_Identifier (S_ID)
The address identifier used to indicate the source port of the transmitted frame.
Special character
Any transmission character considered valid by the transmission code but not equated to a valid data byte.
Special characters are provided by the transmission code for use in denoting special functions.
Special code
A code which, when encoded using the rules specified by the transmission code, results in a special character.
Special codes are typically associated with control signals related to protocol management (e.g., K28.5).
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spectral width
1. FWHM (Full Width Half Maximum) The absolute difference between the wavelengths at which the spectral
radiant intensity is 50 percent of the maximum power. This form is typically used for LED optical sources.
2. RMS The weighted root mean square width of the optical spectrum. See FOTP-127. This form is typically
used for laser optical sources.
SRSB
Sequence recipient status block.
SSB
Sequence status block.
Status
A single byte returned by the device server to the application client in its response to indicate the completion
and completion state of a command.
STP
Shielded twisted pair.
Streamed sequence
A new Class 1 or Class 2 sequence initiated before receiving the final acknowledgement for the previous
sequence in the same exchange. Any new Class 3 sequence initiated before the expiration of R_A_TOV for all
data frames in the previous sequence.
Subblock
A upper level construct which contains partial application data for a single information category (see block). A
collection of subblocks for a given information category may be specified for transfer within a single sequence.
SW
Short wavelength.
Synchronization
Receiver identification of a transmission word boundary.
Tag
The initiator-specified component of the task identifier.
Target
A SCSI device that receives SCSI commands and directs such commands to one or more logical units for exe-
cution.
Target identifier
Address of up to 64 bits by which a target is identified.
Task
An object within the logical unit representing the work associated with a command or group of linked com-
mands.
388
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Task attribute
The queuing specification for a task (Simple, Ordered, Head of Queue, ACA).
Task identifier
The information uniquely identifying a task.
Task management function
A peer-to-peer confirmed service provided by a task manager that can be invoked by an application client to
affect the execution of one or more tasks.
TP
Twisted pair.
TPLS
Test process login status.
Transceiver
A transmitter and receiver combined in one package.
Transmission character
Any encoded character (valid or invalid) transmitted across a physical interface specified by FC-0. Valid trans-
mission characters are specified by the transmission code and include data and special characters.
Transmission code
A means of encoding data to enhance its transmission characteristics. The transmission code specified by FC-
PH is byte-oriented, with:
1. Valid data bytes; and
2. Special codes encoded into 10-bit transmission characters.
Transmission word
A string of four contiguous transmission characters occurring on boundaries that are zero modulo 4 from a pre-
viously received or transmitted special character.
Transmitter
1. The portion of a Link_Control_Facility dedicated to converting valid data bytes and special codes into
transmission characters using the rules specified by the transmission code, converting these transmission
characters into a bit stream, and transmitting this bit stream onto the transmission medium (optical or elec-
trical).
2. An electronic circuit (Tx) that converts an electrical logic signal to a signal suitable for the communications
media (optical or electrical).
Tx
Transmitter.
TYPE
Data structure type.
UI
Unit interval == 1 bit period.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ULP
Upper layer protocol.
ULP
Upper Level Protocol.
ULP process
A function executing within an FC node which conforms to Upper Layer Protocol (ULP) defined protocols when
interacting with ULP processes residing in other FC nodes.
Uncategorized information category
One of the information categories indicated in the frame header.
Unrecognized ordered set
A transmission word containing a K28.5 in its first (leftmost) position but not defined to have meaning by FC-
PH.
Unsolicited control
One of the information categories indicated in the frame header.
Unsolicited data
One of the information categories indicated in the frame header.
Upper level
A level above FC-2.
Upper Level Protocol (ULP)
The protocol user of FC-4.
Valid
A validity control bit indicates if a field is valid, in which case, the value in the field shall be treated as valid. If a
validity control bit indicates that a field is invalid, the value in the field shall be treated as invalid (see meaning-
ful).
Valid data byte
A string of eight contiguous bits within FC-1 which represents a value with 0 to 255, inclusive.
Valid frame
A frame received with a valid Start_of_Frame (SOF), a valid End_of_Frame (EOF), valid data characters, and
proper cyclic redundancy check (CRC) of the frame header and data field.
VC
Virtual circuit.
VC_Credit
Virtual circuit credit.
VC_ID
Virtual circuit identifier.
390
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VC_RDY
Virtual circuit ready.
Vendor unique
Functions, code values, and bits not defined by FC-PH and set aside for private usage between parties using
FC-PH. Caution: different implementations of FC-PH may assign different meanings to these functions, code
values, and bits.
Virtual circuit (VC)
A unidirectional path between two communicating N_Ports that permits Class 4 service to be used. Two virtual
circuits are required to form a Class 4 circuit.
Virtual Circuit Credit (VC_Credit)
The number of receiver buffers allocated to a virtual circuit by an F_Port. It represents the maximum number of
frames that an N_Port may transmit without causing a buffer overrun condition at the F_Port receiver.
Virtual circuit credit limit
The maximum number of VC_Credits available for a virtual circuit. It represents the maximum number of
VC_Credits held by an N_Port on a given virtual circuit.
Virtual Circuit Identifier (VC_ID)
An identifier associated with either the originator (OVC_ID) or responder (RVC_ID) for a virtual circuit.
Virtual path
A fixed route through a fabric in support of a virtual circuit.
WAN
Wide area network.
Well-known addresses
A set of address identifiers defined in FC-PH to access global server functions such as a name server.
Word
A string of four contiguous bytes occurring on boundaries that are zero modulo 4 from a specified reference.
Worldwide_Name
A Name_Identifier which is worldwide unique, and represented by a 64-bit unsigned binary value.
WWN
Worldwide name.
X_ID
Exchange_Identifier.
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
392
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Actual Retry Count
Index
Actual Retry Count bytes
Additional CDB Length
Numerics
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read
reservations 251
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
A
Abort Prefetch
Abort Task Set
Aborted Command
additional sense
data 296
Additional Sense Code
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Additional Sense Code Qualifier
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Additional Sense Length
Address To Translate
AENC. See Asynchronous Event Notification
Acknowledge_0 Capable
Acknowledge_N Capable
acoustics 217
Action Code
AL_PA 50
AL_PD 47
Allocation Length
CDB 133
Action Specific
Activate Persist Through Power Loss
Active Notch
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Allow Login Without Loop Initialization
Alternate Credit Model
Automatic Read Reallocation of defective data blocks
Enabled
Alternate Sector
Automatic Write Reallocation of defective data blocks
Enabled
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
AWRE. See Automatic Write Reallocation of
Alternate Sectors Per Zone
Alternate Track
B
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Alternate Tracks Per Volume
Alternate Tracks Per Zone
ANSI FC_PH. See ANSI Fibre Channel Physical
ANSI Fibre Channel Physical Interface Version
Basic Queuing
Behavior Code
Behavior Code Version Number
Bit Pointer
Bit Pointer Valid
Block Descriptor Data
Block Descriptor Length
ANSI-Approved Version
arbitration 47
ARRE. See Automatic Read Reallocation of defective
Block Length
Broadcast
ASCII Model Number
Association
Association Header
Buffer Capacity
Buffer Empty Ratio
Buffer Full Ratio
Asynchronous Event Notification Capability
Auto Contingent Allegiance Queue
Buffer ID
Index-2
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buffer ID and Buffer Offset fields
Buffer Offset
buffer to buffer
channels 3
credit 29
transfer 14
Buffer to Buffer Credit
Buffered Class 1
Burst Length
Bus Inactivity Limit
Busy Timeout Period
Class Valid
Clear ACA
Clear Task Set
CLS 43
Byte Check
Code Set
Byte Transfer Length
Command Data
Command Queuing
Command Specific Data
Command/Data Mixed
C
Cache Segment Size
Caching Analysis Permitted
Camp-on
Capability Entries
Commands 155
Common Features
Company Identifier Assigned by IEEE
Categories per Sequence
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compile Date
Complete List
Concurrent Sequences
Connect Time Limit
Continuous Increase SEQ_CNT
Continuously Increasing Offset
Control
Control Byte
CDB 133
Copyright Notice
Corrected
Correction Span
credit 29
Current Operating Definition
Cylinder Number
Cylinder Skew Factor
D
Data
Data Bytes Per Physical Sector
Data Field Control
Index-4
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defect Logical Block Address
Defect logical block address
Demand Read Retention Priority
Density Code
Data Length
Data Overlay Allow
Data Protect
Data Strobe Offset Count
Data Structure Type
Data Transfer Disconnect Control
Data/Response Allowed
Data/Response Mix
Device ID Data
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data format
decoding 13
Dedicated Simplex
Default Number of Cache Segments
Default Operating Definition
Disable Certification
Disable Correction
Defect Descriptor
Disable Discovery
Defect Descriptor Bytes
Disable Exception Control
Disable Loop Master
Disable Page Out
Defect List Length
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disable Page Out–Force Unit Access
disparity 33
Document Identifier
Download Microcode with Offsets and Save mode
Drive Capabilities
Disable Prefetch Transfer Length
Disable Primary
Disable Queuing
Drive Serial Number
Disable Read-Ahead
Disable Save
Disable Saving Parameters
Drive Step Rate
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Drive Type
Disable Soft Address
Disable Target Fabric Discovery
Disable Target Initiated Port Enable
Disable Target Oriented Loop Initialization
Disable Transfer on Error
DTOLI. See Disable Target Oriented Loop
Disable Update
Disable Write
Disconnect Immediate
Disconnect Time Limit
Discontinuity
Dual Port
Dynamic Half Duplex
E
element 252
Enable Early Recovery
Enable Modify Data Pointers
Enable SpinDn Ctrl
Index-6
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enable Spin-Down
Enable Threshold Comparison
Enable Vital Product Data
ESI Page
Enclosure Services
Enclosure Services Interface Page
End of Medium
Establish Image Pair
EWasc
exchange 28
Exchange Identifier Interlock
Exchange Identifier Reassignment
Explanation Code
Ending Boundary
Extended Self-Test Routine Completion Time
Extended Self-test Routine Completion Time
F
Fabric 10
Equal
Error Code
Error codes
timer 43
Error Detect Timeout Value Resolution
Error Policy
Fabric Port
Fabric Port Common Service Parameters
FC Service Sub Type
FC Services Sub Type
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FC Services Type Code
First reservation key
FC-0 6
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
keys 250
FC-1 6
Flag
FC-1.5 6
FC-2 6
Flags
FC-3 6
FC-4 7
Force Sequential Write
FC-CT Revision
FCP XFER RDY. See Fibre Channel Protocol
Force Unit Access
FCP_Port Identifier. See Fibre Channel Protocol Port
Feature flags and additional byte fields
Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop
Fibre Channel Fabric Loop Attach Technical Report
Format Data
Format Indication bytes
Format Options Valid
Frame Control
Fibre Channel Protocol Port Identifier
Field Pointer
Field Pointer bytes
Filemark
frames 23
Firmware Error
Firmware Release Number
G
G List
Generation
Index-8
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read
reservations 251
Idle Condition Timer
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
Global Logging Target Save Disable
Global Process Logout
Immediate
Incorrect Length Indicator
Information Bytes
Initial Process Associator
Initialization Pattern
H
Hard Address of Originator
Hard Address of Responder
Hard Sectoring
Hard Sectoring Drive Type
Head Number
Head of Queue
Head Offset Count
Hierarchical Support
Initialization Pattern Descriptor
Initialization Pattern Length
Initialization Pattern Modifier
Initiator Control
Hunt Groups
I
Identification Descriptor
Identification descriptor list
Identifier
Identifier Length
Initiator Control fields
Initiator Function
Inquiry Data
Identifier Type
inquiry data
Inquiry Length
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Interleave
Length of Response Information
Length of Sense Information
levels
intermediate–condition met
Intermix Mode
Link
Interval Timer
Invalid CRC Count. See Invalid Cyclic Redundancy
Link Failure Count
Invalid Cyclic Redundancy Check Count
Invalid logical block address
Invalid Transmission Word
Invalid Transmission Word Count
J
Just In Time
Link Status Page Change
Link_Reset 20
L
L_Port 48
Landing Zone Cylinder
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Link_Reset_Response 20
Linked Command
LIP 37
LIP F7 Initiated Count
LIP F7 Received Count
LIP F8 Initiated Count
Last reservation key
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
keys 250
LBA of First Failure
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Index-10
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIP F8 Received Count
LIP Loop A/B
LISA 43
List Binary
List Parameter
Lock
Log Errors
Logical Block Cache Segment Size
Logical Block data
Logical or Physical Notch
Log Parameter
Logical Unit Number
CDB 132
logical unit number
address 296
Logical Unit Number List
Logical Unit Number List Length
Logical Unit Off Line
reset 21
steps 50
Loop Map Port x
bypass 21
enable 21
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loss of Signal Count
Mode
Mode definitions
Loss of Synchronization Count
Low Revision
Mode Parameters
LS Command Code. See Link Services Command
LUN List Length
Mode Select Page Headers
CDB 132
Mode Sense Page Headers
MRIE. See Method of Reporting Informational
M
Maximum Burst Size
Maximum Interleave
Maximum Number of Notches
Maximum Prefetch
Maximum Prefetch Ceiling
Maximum Rebuild Read Size
Maximum Regenerate Size
Maximum XOR Write Size
Medium Rotation Rate
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Medium Type
Method of Reporting Informational Exceptions
Multicast
Multiplication Factor
N
Network Address ID
NL_Ports 48
No Sense
Node Name
Node Name of Originator
Node Name of Responder
Node Port Common Service Parameters
Minimum Prefetch
Miscompare
Index-12
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Node Port End to End Credit
Node Port ID of Originator
Node Port ID of Responder
Node Port Identifier
OPNyx 47
nodes 23
Non-Cache Segment Size
Normal Auto Contingent Allegiance
Not_Operational 20
Notched Drive
Options
Ordered Queue
Originator Exchange Identifier
Number of Blocks
Number of Cache Segments
Number of Cylinders
Originator Exchange Identifier, Aborted
Originator Process Associator
Originator Source Identifier
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Number of Heads
P
P List
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
O
Offline 20
Offset
Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic command
Offset Boundary
Offset Port x
Open Sequences per Exchange
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Page Control
Page Control Field
Page Format
Page Length
Pages Notched
Parameter
Parameter Code
Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic command
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Index-14
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter Code Reset
Parameter Control Bits
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
Parameter Length
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
Parameter list format
Parameter List Length
Performance
CDB 132
Parameter Pointer
Parameter Pointer Control
Parameter Savable
Performance Mode
Peripheral Device Type
Peripheral Qualifier
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read
reservations 251
Parameter Value
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready keys
Partial Medium Indicator
Physical Block data
Pattern Type
payload 28
Payload Length
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
point-to-point 10
service 33
Port
Port x Link Rate
Port_Identifier
ports 9
Post Error
Port A
Port A Name
Port A Port_Identifier
Port A Position
Port B
Port B Name
Port B Port_Identifier
Port B Position
Port Bypass
Prevent Loop Port Bypass
Primitive Sequence Protocol Error
Priority
Port Identifier
Port Link Fail
Port Link Rate
Process Associator
Process Associator Valid
Process Associators
Port Name
Port Name of Originator
Port Name of Responder
Port Position
Product Date Code
Product Identification
Product Revision Level
Product Serial Number
Progress Indication
Port x Bypass
Port x Link Fail
Index-16
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
protocol 6
Read Transfer Ready Disable
Reason Code
Q
Queue Algorithm Modifier
Queue Error Management
Reason Explanation
Rebuild Delay
Receive Data Field Size
R
Random Relative Offset
Recipient Control
Recipient Control fields
Recoverable read error
Read Cache Disable
Read Capacity data
Recovered read error
Read Combined Descriptor Header and Data mode
Read Continuous
Read Data
Recovery Time Limit
reinitialization 46
Relative Address
CDB 132
Read Retry Count
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Persistent Reserve In Reservation Descriptor
Reserve 255
Reserved Area
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Residual Count
Residual Over Run
Residual Under Run
Responder Exchange Identifier
Responder Identifier
Relative Offset
Relative Offset by Info Category
Release 255
Responder Identifier, Aborted
Report A Check
Report Count
Responder Process Associator
Response Code
Report Device Identifier Parameter List
Report Log Exception Condition
Report Node Capabilities Flags
Response Data Format
Response Information
Response Information format
Response Length Valid
Reservation Descriptors
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for read
reservations 251
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
keys 251
Reservation Key
Rotation Position Locking
Persistent Reserve In parameter data for ready
keys 250
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Index-18
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rotational Offset
Sector Number
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Round
rounding 154
Routing Control
Sectors Per Track
Segment Number
Select-ID
mapping 182
Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology
Self-test
self-test
S
default 355
extended 355
short 355
S.M.A.R.T. See Self-Monitoring Analysis and
Save Implemented
Save Pages
Save Parameters
Scope
Self-test Code
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
Self-test Results Log Parameter
Self-test Results Value
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Self-test Segment Number
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
Send
Persistent Reserve In Reservation Descriptor
Send Diagnostic Parameter Length
Sense Data Length
Scope-specific Address
Persistent Reserve In Reservation Descriptor
SCSI Device Off Line
SCSI Sense Information
SCSI Status
Sense Key
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
SCSI-2
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sense Length Valid
Sequence Count
Service Options
Service Parameters
Service Parameters, Class 1, 2, 3
Servo RAM Release Date in ASCII
Servo RAM Release Number
Servo ROM Release Date in ASCII
Servo ROM Release Number
Set Bad Device Light
Sequence Count, Highest
Sequence Count, Lowest
Sequence Delivery
Diagnostic page–Send Diagnostic command
Sequence Identifier
Simple Queue
Sequence Identifier, Last
Size Enable
Soft Reset
Soft Sectoring
Sequence Identifier, Valid
Soft Sectoring Drive Type
Software Write Protect
Service Action
Service Action Reservation Key
Service Option fields
Source Identifier of Requesting N_Port
Index-20
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stacked Connect Request
standard inquiry data
T
Target Function
format 296
standards 5
Standby
Target Reset
Standby Condition Timer
Start
Start_1
Start_2
Starting Boundary
Target reset since last command
Target Save Disable
Task Attribute
Temperature
Temperature Data
Terminate I/O Process
Starting Cylinder–Reduced Write Current
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Starting Cylinder–Write Precomp
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Startling Cylinder–Write Precomp.
Rigid Disc Drive Geometry Parameters page
Stop Format
Strict
Supplied Format
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Supported Operating Definition
Supported Page List
Terminate Task
Test
Third Party Orig N_Port ID Validity
Third Party Orig Proc Assc Valid
Third Party Originator N_Port ID
Third Party Originator N_Port ID Validity
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Party Originator Process Associator
Third Party Resp Proc Assc Valid
Translate Format
Translated Address
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Third Party Responder Process Associator
Threshold Met Criteria
Translated Format
Translate Address page–Receive Diagnostic
Type 27
Timestamp
Device Self-test Results Log parameter data
format 202
topologies 9
Total Concurrent Sequences
Track Skew Factor
Tracks Per Zone
Transfer Block
Transfer Disable
Persistent Reserve In Reservation Descriptor
Type Code
Transfer Length
Type Code Extension
CDB 132
Typical CDB
ten-byte 131
U
Unique Drive Identifier
Unit Attention
Index-22
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unrecoverable read error
Unrecovered read error
Volume Overflow
VU Information Length
Untagged Queue
VU Information Lengths
W
window
V
access 47
Valid Vendor Version
Validity Bit
Vendor Identification
Vendor Identifier
Vendor Specific
Write Cache Enable
Write Data
Vendor Unique
Vendor Version
Verification Length
Verify Correction Span
Verify Recovery Time Limit
Verify Retry Count
Write Retention Priority
Write Retry Count
Write Transfer Ready Disable
Version Number
X
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Index-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XORDis
Index-24
Fibre Channel Interface Manual, Rev. D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seagate Technology LLC
920 Disc Drive, Scotts Valley, California 95066-4544, USA
Publication Number: 77767496, Rev. D, Printed in USA
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|